Skip to main content

Full text of "Tracts relating to the modern higher mathematics"

See other formats


UC-NRLF 


$B  ma  3bE 


GIFT   OF 
George   Davidson 

1325-1911 


A'^ 


/Tt^-^/^/'A 


MATHEMATICAL    TRACTS. 

No.  I. 

DETERMINANTS, 


EELATING    TO*^  THE 


MODERN  HIGHER  MATHEMATICS: 


TRACT  No.  1. 
DETERMINANTS. 


BT 


i 


w 


Rev.    W.     J.  yWRJGHT,     A.M., 

MEMBER  OF  THE  LONDON  MATHEMATICAL  SOCIETY. 


"  That  vast  theory,  transcendental  in  point  of  diflaculty,  elementary  in  regard  to  its 
being  the  basis  of  researches  in  the  higher  arithmetic,  and  in  analytical  geometry." 
— (M.  Heemite,  quoted  by  Prof.  Stlvestee  in  Phil.  Mag.  1852.) 


LONDON : 
C.  F.  HODGSON  &  SOIST,  GOUGH  SQUARE, 

FLEET   STREET. 

1875. 


My  acknowledgments  are  due  to  R.  Tucker,  Esq.,  M.A.,  Honorary- 
Secret  ary  of  the  London  Mathematical  Society,  for  valuable  assistance 
rende  red  in  passing  these  sheets  through  the  press. — W.  J.  W. 


^Jj-^i^^-^eC&^trx^  /ji-^SEc 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Definitions 

Formation  of  Determinants 

Minors  

Fourth  Order  

Circle  through  Three  Points     ... 
Multiplication  of  Determinants 

CHAPTER  n. 

Minors  as  Differential  Coefficients  ... 

Skew  Symmetrical 

Theorems 

Orthogonal  Substitutions  

Laplace's  Equation  in  ^ 

Determinants  from  Roots  of  Equations 

Pairs  of  Imaginary  Eoots 

Theorem  of  Malmsten 

Simultaneous  Differential  Equations 

CHAPTER  HL 

Functional  Determinants  

Multiple  Integral 

The  Jacobian  

The  Hessian  

CHAPTER  IV. 

Study  1st — Discriminant  in  Investigating  Loci 
Study  2nd — Foci  of  Involution  ...         


Page 
9 
10 
17 
19 
21 
25 


28 
31 
33 
36 
41 
44 
47 
48 
52 


55 

57 
60 
62 


65 

70 


rwi.^d2d21 


INTRODUCTION  TO   THE   SERIES. 


DuEiNQ  some  intervals  of  foreign  travel,  and  consequent 
interruption  of  formal  ministerial  labor,  I  resolved  to 
begin  tlie  preparation  of  a  Series  of  Elementary  Tracts 
upon  the  following  subjects  in  the  Modern  Higher  Mathe- 
matics ;  viz — 

Trilinear  Coordinates. 

Invariants. 
Theory  of  Surfaces. 
Elliptic  Integrals. 
Quaternions. 

Upon  further  reflection,  I  have  concluded  to  introduce 
the  Series  by  a  treatise  upon  Determinants,  brief  and  very 
elementary,  but  sufficiently  inclusive  and  rigorous  to  sup- 
port and  explain  the  references  to  this  theory  which  are 
involved  in  the  ordinary  exposition  of  the  first  three  sub- 
jects of  the  proposed  list. 

In  undertaking  this  labor,  I  hope  to  turn  the  attention 
of  the  students  of  my  country,  especially  those  who  are 
desirous  of  becoming  Mathematicians,  to  these  studies, 
which  at  present  lie  considerably  beyond  the  usual  "  Sci- 
entific Course,^'  even  in  our  best  colleges,  but  which  the 
demands  of  Physics  and  higher  Engineering  must  soon 


11  INTRODUCTION. 

bring  within  it.  I  purpose,  therefore,  to  give  a  strictly 
elementary  view  of  the  principal  developments  of  the  Pure 
Mathematics  since  the  year  1841.  I  mark  this  year,  not 
only  because  it  is  the  proper  initial  point  at  which  to 
begin  the  proposed  survey,  but  because  the  year  itself 
was  remarkably  rich  in  mathematical  productions. 

Jacobi,  in  that  year,  exhibited  the  versatility  of  his 
genius,  whose  power  twelve  years  before  had  been  proved 
by  his  "  Nova  Fundamenta"  in  giving  to  the  world  his 
celebrated  Memoirs  "  De  forrnatione  et  proprietatibus  De- 
terminantium'^  and  De  Deterniinanfibus  Functionalibas/' 
which  have  been  the  bases  of  all  subsequent  labors  in  the 
Theory  of  Determinants. 

In  the  same  year,  Dr.  Geo.  Boole  laid  down  the  prin- 
ciples out  of  which  has  grown  the  Modern  Higher  Algebra. 

In  the  year  1841,  also,  was  published,  in  the  seventh 
volume  of  '^Memoires  des  Savans  etrmigers^^'  the  full  text  of 
the  general  theory  of  the  Abelian  Functions,  although  what 
was  known  as  Abel's  Theorem  had  appeared  much  earlier. 

Before  the  close  of  that  year,  last  and  perhaps  least, 
but  confessedly  of  immense  influence  on  the  British  Uni- 
versities, was  published  Gregory^s  "Processes  and  Ex- 
amples of  the  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus." 

At  this  period  Modern  G  eometry  was  unknown.  Indeed, 
till  the  appearance  of  Townsend's  volumes,  in  1863,  it  is 
believed  that  the  only  work  in  the  English  language  on 
this  subject  was  that  of  Dr.  Mulcahy,  and  in  any  language 
that  of  Chasles,  "  T/aite  de  Geometrie  Superieure/^  which 
had  then  been  published  but  little  more  than  a  decade. 

Mathematicians  have  not  only  introduced  a  new  lan- 
guage, which,  taken  in  connexion  with  the  new  processes. 


INTRODUCTION.  Ill 

makes  modern  mathematics  absolutely  unintelligible  to 
one  who  has  for  a  few  years  laid  aside  such  studies,  but 
also  new  functions,  whose  theory  is  regarded  as  a  high 
subject  of  research.  It  would  be  simple  pedantry  to 
attempt  an  illustration  of  this  in  terms  of  the  language 
itself;  but  we  may  select  a  function  which  is  well  known, 
and,  ascending  briefly  the  steps  by  which  it  has  reached 
its  present  development,  observe  something  of  the  spirit  of 
modern  mathematical  analysis. 

Take  the  theory  of  Elliptic  Functions.  Before  the 
middle  of  the  last  century,  mathematicians  began  to 
investigate  the  solutions  of  problems  depending  on  the 
rectification  of  elliptic  arcs. 

Undoubtedly  the  first  definite  progress  in  the  right 
direction  was  the  discovery  of  Euler,  which  is  recorded 
in  sec  7.  oi  Novi  Comm,  Petrup.  for  1758-59,  and  which 
gives  the  integral  of  the  differential  equation 

mdx ndtf 

{a-^hx-i-cx'^  +  dx^  +  ex^y        (a-\-by-\-ci/-j-dy^-{-ey^y 

The  next  step  was  taken  by  Lagrange,  who  published, 
in  the  fourth  volume  (p.  98)  of  Melanges  de  PhilosopJiie  et 
de  Mathematique  de  Turin/'  sua.  d priori  solution  of  the  same 
general  equation  which  Euler  had  solved  tentatively  for 
special  cases. 

In  1775,  John  Landen  published  in  the  ^^Philosophical 
Transactions^'  his  theorem,  showing  that  any  arc  of  an 
hyperbola  is  equal  to  the  difference  of  two  elliptic  arcs. 
The  extension  of  this  theorem  relating  to  the  general 
theory  of  transformation  is  still  the  subject  of  research 
among  mathematicians,  among  whom  especially  may  bo 
mentioned  Richelot  (see  '^Die  Landensche  Transformation/' 

b2 


IV  INTRODUCTION. 

Konigsburg,  1868,  also  in  several  volumes  of  Grelle's 
Journal.) 

In  1786,  Legendre's  first  paper  upon  Elliptic  Integrals 
was  presented  to  tlie  French  Academy ;  and  from  that  time 
onward,  for  a  space  of  nearly  fifty  years,  till  his  death,  this 
subject  chiefly  engaged  his  attention;  and  when,  in  1825, 
he  presented  to  the  Academic  des  Sciences  the  first 
volume  of  his  "  Traite  des  Fonctions  ElUptiques/'  it  was 
supposed  that  the  resources  of  the  Integral  Calculus  in 
this  direction  were  exhausted. 

About  this  time,  however,  the  young  Norwegian  Abel 
appeared  upon  the  field ;  and,  by  bringing  into  his  analysis 
the  general  Theory  of  Equations,  was  enabled  to  show  that 
what  had  been  done  was  but  a  small  part  of  what  might 
be  expected ;  and  immediately  extended  the  boundaries 
of  knowledge  by  proving  his  theorem  for  the  com- 
parison of  all  Transcendental  Functions  whatever,  whose 
differentials  are  irrational  from  involving  the  second  root 
of  a  rational  function  of  the  variable  x.  This  is  not  the 
place  to  describe  Abel's  theorem ;  but  the  great  research 
bestowed  by  modern  mathematicians  upon  the  Abelian 
Functions  serves  to  show  the  spirit  and  line  of  a  particular 
analysis,  and  the  interest  which  attaches  to  a  subject, 
which,  under  continual  expansion  for  more  than  a  century 
by  minds  of  the  highest  mathematical  power,  still  suggests 
for  itself  a  much  greater  amplitude. 

In  the  complete  works  of  Abel,  by  Holmboe,  we  see  the 
ease  and  power  of  that  remarkable  genius,  for  whom  the 
principal  mathematicians  of  his  age,  Poisson,  Cauchy,  and 
Legendre,  foresaw  the  wreath  of  an  enduring  fame.  0^ 
the    labors    of   Jacobi  in   this    direction,   whose   work. 


INTEODUCTION.  V 

*'  Wova  Fundamenta,'^  appeared  in  the  same  year  of  Abel's 
death,  1829,  it  is  not  my  intention  to  speak.  Had  Abel 
reached  the  patriarchal  age  of  Legendre,  he  would  still  be 
living  to  write  theorems  ior  future  generations.  Abel  died 
before  he  had  completed  his  twenty-seventh  year. 

In  caMer  23  of  the  "  Journal  de  VEcole  Poly  technique/' 
and  in  the  9th  volume  of  Liouville,  and  in  the  18th  and 
19th  of  Gomptes  Bendus,  we  find  Abel's  work  proved  and 
elucidated  by  Hermite  and  Liouville.  In  these  journals, 
and  in  Gomptes  Bendus  since  1843,  the  contributions  of 
MM.  Serret  and  Chasles  would  need  especial  study.  So 
also  *^'  Theorie  der  AhelscJien  Functionen/'  by  Olebsch  and 
Gordon,  Professors  in  the  University  of  Giessen  (1866),  and 
"  Theorie  des  Fondions  douhlement  periodiques  et  des  Fonc- 
tions  elliptiques/'  by  Briot  and  Bouquet  (1859). 

It  is  not  necessary  to  mention  the  greater  number  of 
distinguished  Continental  writers  upon  Abelian  functions. 
Neumann  of  Halle,  and  Eiemann  of  Tiibingen  (1863-4), 
Ivory,  Bronwin,  and  Cayley,  of  Cambridge,  are  some  of 
the  well  known  writers  upon  these  functions. 

The  student,  however,  should  not  fail  to  study  the  papers 
of  Konigsberger  (Grelle,  Vol.  64)  and  Weirstrass  on  the 
solution  of  HyperelHptic  Functions  {CrelUj  Yol.  47) ;  nor 
should  a  paper  by  Rosenhain,  in  "  Memoires  de  I'Institut 
par  divers  Savans/'  be  omitted,  as  also  a  report  by  Russell 
on  Elliptic  and  HyperelHptic  Integrals  before  the  British 
Association,  from  1870  and  now  in  progress. 

But  what  is  the  use  of  such  studies  ?  If  the  array  of 
illustrious  names  herein  given  do  not  suflSciently  guaran- 
tee their  importance,  let  me  say  that  it  is  by  such  abstract 
and   difficult  labors  men  become  mathematicians.   What 


VI  INTRODUCTION. 

then?  Well,  suppose  that  it  is  shown  that  the  secular 
inequalities  resulting  from  the  action  of  one  planet  on  an- 
other are  the  same  as  if  the  mass  of  the  disturbing  planet 
were  diffused  along  its  orbit  in  the  form  of  an  elliptic  ring 
of  variable  but  indefinitely  small  thickness,  and  that  it  is 
inquired,  what  is  the  attraction  exerted  by  such  a  ring 
upon  an  external  point  ?  The  problem  involves  eventually 
two  elliptic  integrals,  as  Gauss  shows,  of  the  first  and 
second  kinds. 

The  final  application,  then,  of  the  higher  analysis  must  be 
the  sufficient  answer  to  all  cui  bono  inquirers.  Take,  for 
instance,  the  original  BesseFs  functions  in  L^),  YJ^),  and 


«=^I 


Jn  (z)  =  --   I   cos  (z  sin  ia  —  n(u)  du), 

hitherto  mostly  in  the  hands  of  German  mathematicians, 
and  successfully  applied  to  the  solution  of  physical  pro- 
blems in  heat,  electricity,  and  the  investigation  of  aerial 
vibrations  in  cylindrical  spaces.  A  good  example  and 
illustration  of  this  function  may  be  seen  in  "  8tudien  ilher 
BesselVschen  FunMlonen/'  by  Dr.  Eugen  Lommel,  a  paper 
in  Crelle,  Yol.  56,  and  one  of  high  value  by  Strutt  of 
Cambridge. 

If  the  utility,  then,  of  advanced  modern  mathematical 
study  is  not  to  be  doubted,  what  provision  can  be  made 
for  its  wider  diffusion  ? 

Now,  the  work  of  reducing  the  higher  mathematics  to 
the  comprehension  of  ordinary  readers,  while  confessedly 
a  difficult  and  generally  a  thankless  undertaking,  has  in 
some  cases  been  attended  with  unlooked-for  success. 

Bowditch's  notes  upon  "  Mecanique  Celeste/'  side  by  side 
with  his  translation ;  Mrs.  Somerville's  paraphrase  of  the 


INTRODUCTION.  Vll 

same  original  work,  and  the  excessive  elementary  labors  of 
the  Jesuit  Fathers  upon  the  Principia,  were  and  are  rewarded 
with  the  strongest  expressions  of  appreciation.  And  there 
can  be  no  doubt  that  similar  labors  will,  in  some  circles, 
always  be  regarded  with  favor.  Students  must  early  know 
the  goal,  else  their  ambition  may  come  too  late.  The  equip- 
ment of  a  mathematican  is  now  a  very  different  thing  from 
what  it  was  thirty,  or  even  ten,  years  ago.  There  should 
be  some  way  by  which,  in  very  early  years,  the  broad  field 
of  modern  mathematics  could  be  entered.  Determinants 
should  be  taught  constantly  with  common  Algebra ;  Qua- 
ternions with  Geometry ;  Trilinear  Coordinates  with  the 
Cartesian;  and  Invariants,  Co- variants,  and  Contravariants 
with  the  general  Theory  of  Equations. 

One  grand  principle  should  never  be  forgotten  :  the 
educational  value  of  a  subject  is  greatly  modified  by  the 
the  hands  which  administer  it. 

This  is  conspicuously  true  in  mathematical  teaching, 
whether  by  books  or  lectures.  Let  this  be  suggested. 
Every  high  subject  has  its  easy  elementary  side,  and  there 
it  may  be  pierced.  The  works  of  Cremona,  Helmholtz, 
Tait,  Sylvester,  Clifford,  and  Cayley,  may,  in  some  of  their 
elementary  forms,  be  commingled  with  ordinary  mathe- 
matical studies  j  and  thus  the  ancient  tasks  of  the  student 
will  be  expanded  and  enlivened  by  fresh  contributions 
from  the  great  teachers  of  the  world.  Inspiration  is 
needed  for  study,  and  study  must  deepen  the  inspira- 
tion. 

The  fundamental  equations   of    Quaternions  in  i,  j,  Jc 

are  easily  exhibited  to  a  class  in  Geometry  in  such  manner 
as  to  become  a  source  of  real  pleasure  to  them ;  and  thus 


Vlll  INTRODUCTION. 

they  may  be  incited  to  learn  the  power  of  an  instrument 
which  bids  fair  to  stand  unrivalled  in  the  field  of  mathe- 
matical physics. 

The  rich  stores  of  research  and  discovery  entombed  in  the 
volumes  of  the  learned  societies  of  Europe,  and  in  the  ma- 
thematical journals,  are  something  enormous;  and  my 
object  is  to  bring,  in  a  more  elementary  form,  some  of 
the  more  important  subjects  into  a  wider  notice. 

In  regard  to  this  tract  on  Determinants,  it  is  very  ele- 
mentary, and  intended  to  be  more  suggestive  than  ex- 
haustive. 

The  works  consulted  in  its  preparation  embrace  the 
entire  literature  of  the  subject ;  viz. — The  theory  and 
practiceof  Determinants,  by  Baltzer,Brioschi,Spofctiswoode, 
Salmon,  Trudi,  Dodgson  (the  two  latter  hardly  worth  con- 
sulting) j  the  numberless  papers  in  Crelle  and  Liouville, 
and  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Eoyal  Societies,  from  1841 ; 
also  a  short  account  of  Functional  Determinants  in  the 
Analytical  Mechanics  of  Prof.  Peirce,  of  Harvard;  and  the 
chapter  devoted  to  the  subject  by  Todhunter,  in  his 
Theory  of  Equations,  and  those  of  Boole,  Ferrers,  and 
Whitworth. 

W.  J.  w. 


15,  Eegent  Sqtjahe, 

London,  W.C.  ;  1875. 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 
CHAPTER    I. 

PRINCIPLES. 

1.  Definitions. — The  common  and  general  expression  for  a 
determinant  of  the  nth  order  consists'of  the  arrangement  of  n^ 
quantities  in  n  rows  and  n  columns,  as  follows  : — 


ail 


^2  2 


Cli  n 


^n  n 


or,  more  briefly,       2  (±  an  «2  2 «^n«)> 

which  is  to  be  understood  as  expressing  the  sum  of  the 
1.2.3  ...  n  products  obtained  by  fully  permuting  the  n 
suffixes,  so  that  each  product  shall  include  all  the  suffixes,  and 
the  several  products  differ  from  each  other  by  at  least  one 
variation  of  these  suffixes. 

Every  variation  in  the  suffixes  introduces  a  change  of  sign. 

The  letters  of  the  expression 

S(±  an  022  a«n), 

taken  from  the  diagonal  of  the  square,  are  called  the  leading 
letters ;  and  these,  together  with  all  the  others  of  the  deter- 
minant, are  called  the  constituents. 

The  products  themselves,  when  formed,  are  called  the  ele- 
ments* 


*  Called  by  Laplace  resultants  {Hist,  de  VAcad.  1772). 


10  ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 

Coiisfcifcuents  are  called  conjugate  to  each  other,  when,  con- 
sidered in  reference  to  their  respective  rows  and  columns, 
they  hold  the  same  positions. 

Reserving  other  definitions  till  we  have  made  some  develop- 
ment of  the  subject,  let  us  seek  some  simple  illustrations  in 
the  formation  of  determinants. 

2.  Let  us  assume  a  determinant  of  two  places,  or  the  second 


order,  as 


^2     62 


Writing  together  the  leading  letters  ai  62,  we  have  the  first 
element,  or  product,  and  permuting  the  suffixes  we  obtain  the 
second  0-3  bi,  since,  by  definition,  a  variation  of  the  suffixes 
gives  a  change  of  sign.*  These  two  products  taken  together 
form  the  eccj)ansio7i  of  the  determinant.     Hence  we  write 

3.  Connecting  now  these  constituents  with  variables,  let  us 
find  the  conditions  of  co-existence  of  the  homogeneous  equa- 
tions of  the  first  degree 

aiX-\-hiy  =^  a2X-\-h>yj 

and  suppose  c  to  be  their  common  value,  then 

a.2£»  +  &2  2/  =  ^• 
Eliminating  y  and  x,  we  have 

(ai 52— ^2^1)  ^  =  ^2^—^10  I 
and  {aih2—a2hi)y  =  aiC—a2C) 

Observe  (1)  that  the  coefficient  di^a— «^2&i  is  common  to  both 

*  Laplace  has  not  only  stated  the  rule  for  the  change  of  signs  hy 
disarrangement,  which  he  refers  to  M.  Cramer,  hut  proves  the  more  simple 
rule  of  Bezout  by  permutation  of  the  suffixes.  (Mist,  de  I' Acad.  1-772, 
p.  295.) 


ELEMENTATiY    DETERMINANTS. 


11 


variables  ;  (2)  that  this  coefficient  is  identical  with  the  value  of 


the  determinant 


as  given  above  ;  it  may  therefore  be  written  in  that  form.  The 
same  remark  will  evidently  apply  to  the  second  members 
h^c—hiG  and  a^c  — ttgC,   and  we  may  write  (1)  as 


«!  5i 

X   == 

c  hi 

^2  &2 

G  hz 

»!  6i 

y  = 

G  a^ 

^2  ^2 

G    di 

1 


(2). 


If  now  we  regard  c  =  0,  the  second  members  of  (1)  and   (2) 
vanish,  and  we  have  simply 


^2  h 


=  0, 


which  must  be  interpreted  as  the  condition  of  the  co-existence 
of  the  two  equations,  when  their  second  members  vanish. 

4.  It  will  be  sufficiently  evident,  from  what  has  preceded, 
how  a  determinant  of  the  second  order,  as  last  written,  is  to  be 
expanded  ;  viz.,  by  multiplying  together  the  letters  of  each 
diagonal,  beginning  with  the  upper  left-hand  corner,  and 
connecting  the  products  with  the  negative  sign.  Observing 
this  rule  for  forming  the  products,  it  plainly  can  make  no 
difference  with  the  result,  if  we  write  the  rows  as  columns  ;  as, 


tti     0-2 

h,  h. 


ax  hi 

^2     ^2 


5.  It  is  also  evident  that  the  sign  of  the  determinant  will 
change  when  the  rows,  or  columns,  are  interchanged  j  as, 


ai  hi     =  — 

hi  a^ 

=  — 

0^2  &2 

^2  &2 

&2  «2 

ai  hi 

*  Laplace  "  Sur  le  calcul  integral. 


12 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


6.  Let  US  now  examine  a  determinant  of  the  third  order. 


Cii  hi  Ci 

=  ai 

h  C2 

+  &, 

c,  aa 

+   Cl 

^2    &2 

dz  h  C2 

h   Cs 

C3  % 

%    &3 

«3  h  C3 

Each  of  these  three  determinants  is  formed  by  omitting  in 
succession  the  row  and  column  which  contain  ai,  hi,  Cj ;  i.e.,  by 
writing  in  the  above  order  the  remainders  of  the  second  and 
third  columns,  the  third  and  first,  and  first  and  second.  The 
further  expansion  may  be  written  out  by  the  rule  already 
given  for  the  determinant  of  the  second  degree,  that  is,  by 
diagonal  multiplication.  Otherwise,  we  may  write  down  the 
leading  letters  ai,  Z>2,  Cg,  and  fully  permute  the  suffixes.  The 
sum  of  all  the  products  thus  obtained,  with  their  appropriate 
signs,  will  express  the  true  expansion.  The  rule  for  the  signs 
being,  as  has  been  stated,  that  every  variation  of  the  suffixes 
yields  a  change  of  sign,  or  that  an  even  number  of  permutations 
gives  Si  plus,  and  an  odd  number,  a  minus  sign.  The  per- 
mutation of  the  suffixes  of  the  diagonal  letters  (%  &2  ^3)  gives 
six  products,  which  result  corresponds  with  products  obtained 
from  reducing  each  of  the  three  equivalent  determinants  as 
written  above ;  as, 

aih2C3—aih^C2-i-hiC2a3—hiCsa2-\-Ciazhs  —  Ciash2. 


7.  It  is  easily  shown  that,   if  two  rows,  or  two  columns, 
become  identical,  the  determinant  vanishes  ;  as, 

=  0, 


tti  ai  Cl 

= 

ai  hi  Cl 

a^  ^2  C2 

(h  h  c^ 

^3     %     Cg 

a^  &3  C3 

which  is  perhaps  sufficiently  obvious  without  multiplying  out 
at  length. 

8.  We  shall  now  proceed  to  show  how  this  determinant 
arises.  Having  shown  how  a  determinant  of  the  third  order 
may  be  reduced,  the  determinant  itself  being  given,  let  us 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  13 

seek,  inversely,  to  construct  a  function,  or  its  equivalent 
functions,  by  an  actual  process  of  elimination,  such  that  its 
several  products  shall  be  identical  with  those  of  the  given 
determinant.* 

Let  us  seek,  for  example,  the  condition  of  the  co- existence 
of  the 'equations 

aiX  +  hiy  +  CiZ  =  a2^  +  ^22/  +  ^^2  2!  =  CLs^  +  ^sy  +  c^z. 

If  the  common  value  be  zero,  then 

aiX-\-hiy-\-CiZ  =  0  "\ 

a2X  +  h2y-\-C2Z  =  0  > (3)« 

azX  +  h3y  +  CiZ  =  0) 

As  to  the  manner  of  solving  these  equations  so  as  to  exhibit 
the  required  condition,  two  methods,  at  least,  are  open  to  us.f 

(a.)  We  may  multiply  the  second  of  the  equations  by  I,  the 
third  by  m,  and  add  ;  then,  whatever  the  value  of  the  variables, 
I  and  m  may  be  so  taken  as  to  cause  two  of  their  coefficients 
with  which  they  are  multiplied  to  disappear — -that  is,  two  of  the 
coefficients  of  the  second  and  third  equations ;  and,  since  the 
equations  are  simultaneous,  that  of  the  third  must  vanish 
also.  The  equations  will  now  contain  only  two  unknowns,  I 
and  w,  whence  these  may  be  determined  from  the  second 
and  third,  and  their  values  substituted  will  give  the  desired 
condition.  So  far  as  this  relates  to  elimination,  it  is  similar  to 
the  method  employed  by  Laplace,  referred  to  in  a  note  below. 

{b.)  Otherwise,  by  eliminating  alternately  y  and  z  from  (3), 
(a2h3  —  ash2)x  +  (c2hs  —  h2Cs)z  —  0, 
{a2Ci— a^G^x-\- (1)20^—1  zC'dy  =  0, 


*  This  was  also  exhibited  by  Laplace,  and  its  application  to  the  resolu- 
tion of  linear  equations.  It  might  be  of  interest  to  compare  the  method 
of  Lagrange,  in  his  Memoir  on  the  "  Movement  of  the  nodes  and  inclination 
of  the  orbits  of  planets,"  with  the  theorem  of  Malmsten  for  finding  particular 
integrals  by  determinants. 

t  fcJee  Ferrers,  Salmon,  and  Tait,  on  Determinants. 


14 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


which,    remembering   to    change  signs  in  transposing,    may 
evidently  be  written 


y        ^ 


Z>2C3— C2&3      a^C2  —  a^Cs      a2&3  — ^362 

Dividing  now  the  terms  of  the  first  of  (3)  respectively  by  these 
equals,  we  have 

^1(^2^3  — C2&3)+^l('^3C2  — fl^2C3)+Ci(tl2&3  — %W   =0    (4). 

Had  we  divided  in  the  same  manner  the  terms  of  the 
second  and  third  equations  of  (3),  we  should  have  found 
identical  relations ;  and,  since  the  equations  are  simultaneous, 
we  have  therefore  found  the  required  condition.  If  now  we 
perform  in  (4)  the  multiplications  indicated,  we  shall  have  six 
products  identical  with  those  obtained  above. 
We  see  also  that  (4)  may  be  written  (Art.  5) 

0, 


ay 

&2     C2 

+  h 

1 

C2     0^2 

+  Ci 

^2     62 

hs   C3 

C3   ag 

ag  &3 

and  hence  also 

a,  h,  Ci 

^2    1)2    C2 

=  0. 

0 

h  h  Cz 

1 

9.  If  the  products  are  written  out,  by  permuting  the  suffixes, 
it  is  only  necessary  to  observe  the  cyclic  order ;  thus,  if  we 
have  a-i  (^2  C3)  the  next  function  of  the  order  or  line  a  must 
be  a^ih^Ci),  and  the  third  a^  (&1C2). 

Also  that,  while  {a^h^c^^  is  of  course  identical  with  itself,  it 
indicates  the  determinant  equally  in  each  of  two  positions  ;  i.e., 


«!    hi    Ci 

= 

«1    ^2    ^3 

a^  Z>2  ^2 

h    62    h 

%  ^3  C3 

Ci     C2      C3 

The  one  =  (^i&aO  =  ci\(J)2C^-\-  'bi{c2a^-\-Ci{a2l^, 

the  other  =  (^162^3)  =  ci\(b2C^  +  diQ^z^^i)  -\-  a^^hiC-^- 

Taken  together  the  products  are  equal,  but  the  corresponding 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


15 


terms,  after  the  first,  are  dissimilar.  The  reason  of  this  remark 
will  be  obvious,  when  it  is  considered  that  the  products  may 
be  derived  otherwise  than  by  permuting  the  suffixes. 

10.  We  are  in  a  position  now  to  illustrate  one  or  two  im- 
portant uses  of  determinants  as  a  system  of  notation.  The 
equation,  for  instance,  of  the  straight  line  passing  through  two 
given  points,  may  be  written  as  a  determinant 

111      =0. 

y  2/1  2/2 

In  this  form  it  is  easily  remembered  ;  while,  for  practical  use, 
greater  brevity  and  clearness  will  be  ensured.  Suppose  one 
of  the  points,  as  (x2y2),  is  changed  to  the  origin;  then,  since  its 
coordinates  must  vanish,  the  determinant  becomes 

0. 


1 

1 

1 

y 

2/1 

0 

X 

Xi 

0 

Now,  we  know  the  equation  of  a  line  passing  through  the 
origin    and   a  given  point  to  be  ^  =  ^  aj,  which  must  be  the 

Xi 

value  of  the  determinant  if  our  notation  holds  true.     Hence 


we  write 


111 

= 

2/  2/1 

2/  2/1  0 

X    Xi 

aj  a?!  0 

=  0; 


and  we  may  thus  here  state  what  will  be  found  true  generally, 
that  if  all  the  constituents  but  one  of  a  column  or  row  become 
zero,  both  the  column  and  row  which  contain  that  constituent 
may  be  erased  from  the  determinant. 

A  second  illustration  may  be  found  in  the  expression  for 
the  area  of  a  triangle  in  terms  of  the  coordinates  of  its  vertices, 
the  axes  being  rectangular.*      This  may  be  written  as  the 


Salmon's  Conies,  p.  30. 


16 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


foregoing,  with  an  additional  suffix,  as, 


1 

1 

1 

2/1 

2/2 

2/3 

»i 

x^ 

X 

=  0. 


If,  now,  two  of  the  points,  as  (xi  ?/i),  (x2 1/2),  be  connected  with 
the  origin,  the  coordinates  evidently  of  the  other  vertex  become 
zero,  and  we  have,  therefore,  simply 

yi  y2    =  0. 

Xi    X2 

Other  illustrations  will  occur  to  the  reader. 


11.  If  any  row  or  column  he  multiplied  hy  any  quantity,  the 
determinant  is  multiplied  hy  that  quantity. 


a    h    c 

= 

ai  hi  Ci 

%  ^2  C2 

xa  h  c 
050.1  hi  Ci 
xa-i  62  ^2 


ax  hx  ex 
«!  hi  Ci 
a^    &2    ^2 


(!)• 


A  negative  sign  placed  before  the  determinant  is  equivalent 
to  interchanging  one  row  or  column  with  another  parallel  to  it. 

(2). 


a    h 

= 

«i  hi 

= 

h    a 

ai  hi 

a    h 

hi  ai 

It  follows,  from  (1),  that 


and,  from  (1)  and  (2),  that 


x^  xy   xz 

=zx' 

1  y    z 

X    yi    Zi 

1  2/1  ^x 

x    2/2     ^2 

1    ^2    2^2 

a  h  c 

=zah 

1  c    1 

a  h  c\ 

1    Ci   1 

a  h  C2 

1  C2  1 

All  these  results  are  so  nearly  self-evident,  or  so  easily  verified, 
that  it  is  only  necessary  to  write  them  down. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


17 


12.  Minors.     The  determinant 


a    he 

=  a 

&1    Ci 

+  & 

ci  ai 

+  c 

til  &i 

«]     &i     Ci 

Z>2   c,\ 

Ca  ^2 

^2  h 

«2      ^2     C2 

may  be  written  more  briefly  as 


..(1) 


•where  A  represents  the  primitive  determinant,  and  A,  B,  and  G 
the  several  minors  formed,  as  is  evident,  by  omitting  in  turn 
the  column  and  row  which  contain  a,  5,  c.  The  determinant 
may  also  be  written  A  =  aA  +  a^Bi  +  0^2  ^i?  where  A,  i?i,  and  Gi 
represent  the  minors  when  the  rows  of  the  determinant  are 
written  as  columns — 


a    tti   «2 

=  a 

hh. 

+  a. 

62    & 

+    ^2 

h   hi 

h    hi    &2 

Ci    C2 

C2     c 

C      Ci 

C      Ci      C2 

..(2). 


In  comparing  (1)  and  (2),  it  will  be  seen  that  the  first  minor 
in  each  of  the  two  sets  of  minors  is  the  same,  but  the  others 
are  unlike.  It  is  important  to  observe  this  difference.  The 
practical  use  will  be    seen   in  the   solution  of  the  following 

equations  : 

ax  -\-hy  -k-cz  =  e, 

aiX  +  hiy  +  CiZ  =  ei, 
a^x  +  hiy  +  CiZ  =  e^. 

Multiply  the  first  by  A,  the  second  by  J5i,  and  the  third  by  Ci, 
and  add,  and  we  have  Ax  =  Ae  +  Biey  +  Gie2,  since  y  and  z 
vanish.    In  like  manner  the  values  of  y  and  z  may  be  found. 

It  might  be  necessary  to  some  readers  to  see  the  entire 
process  written  out ;  thus, 

aAx  -hhAy  -{-cAz  =  e  A, 
ayBiX  +  hiBiy  +  CiBiZ  =  ej^i, 
a2GiX-\-h.j,Gii/  +  C2G1Z  =  e^Gi ; 


18 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


or 


a 

l,h. 

a+h 

\h. 

y  +  c 

hh 

z=  e 

hK: 

Cl     C2 

Ci     C2 

Ci   C2 

Ci    C2 

«! 

h^l 

x  +  h 

hh 

y  +  <^i 

h^l     z  =  ei 

h  i 

C'i    c 

C2   c 

C2    c 

C2     c 

^2 

h  h. 

x-i-  h 

bbl 

y+c2 

&&1 

Z  =  62 

5     &1 

C   Ci 

C   Ci 

C    Ci 

C     Ci 

Adding  and  combining,  we  have 


a  di  a2 

x  + 

h   hi  &2 

y  + 

C    Ci    C2 

z  = 

e  ei   e. 

h  61   h 

h  h,  &2 

C    Ci    C2 

h  hi  62 

C     Ci     C2 

C    Ci     C2 

6    &!    &2 

C    Ci    C2 

The  coefficients  of  1/  and  z  having  two  parallel  lines  identical 
vanish,  and  we  have,  changing  the  rows  to  columns  for  the 
final  expression, 


a   h   c 

X  = 

e   h   c 

«!    hiCi 

ei  hi  ci 

cbi  h^  C2 

62   &2   C2 

13.  If  the  constituents  of  any  determinant  he  resolvahle  into  the 
sum  of  n  other  constituents,  the  determinant  is  resolvahle  into  the 
sum  of  n  other  determinants. 

Let  A  =  a^  +  &-B  +  cO,  where  A,  B,  0  have  the  meaning  of 
Art  12.     Increase  a,  h,  c  by  x,  y,  z,  respectively,* 

Ai  =  (a+x)A-{-(h  +  y)B+(c  +  z)  G 

=  (a-\-oe) 


Hence 


Ai  = 


hi  ci 

+  (}+y) 

Ci  ai 

+  (c  +  z) 

ai  hi 

h  C2 

C2    ^2 

«2    h 

a-\-x   cfci    «2 

= 

a    ai    a> 

+ 

X    Qi    a.> 

h-Yy    hi    h., 

b    hi    h2 

y  h  h 

c  + 

Z       Ci     C2 

c    c 

1        C2 

Z     Ci      C2 

If  we    had   used   the    sign  of  multiplication,    or    division, 
*  Salmon's  Deter,  p.  10. 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


19 


between  the  quantities   a  and  x,  b  and  y,  &c.,  we  should  have 
reached  results  already  pointed  out  in  Art.  11. 

14.  Since  identical  parallel  lines  in  a  determinant  cause  it 
to  vanish,  we  might  infer  the  same  result  if  two  given  lines 
differ  only  by  a  constant  factor ;   as, 

=  0. 


ace  a 
ax  a 


a  a 
a  a 


So  also,  having  in  mind  the  proof  of  the  last  Art.,  we  might 
show  that,  when  the  sum  of  several  lines  differs  from  the  given 
lines  only  by  constant  factors,  the  same  result  will  follow  ;  as, 

la  ■\- max   a  ai 
lb-]- mil    b    bi 

Ic  +  WlCi     c     Ci 

In  the  same  manner,  if  to  any  line  we  add  the  sum  of  the 
other  lines  separately,  or  increased  by  constant  factors,  the 
determinant  will  vanish  ;*  thus, 


=  1 

a   a   ai 

+  m 

(Xi   a   ai 

b    b    h 

&i    b    b. 

G     C      Ci 

Ci     G      Ci 

lab       +     na  -\-mh     a    b 
1    tti  bi  nai+mbi   ai    bi 

1    ^2  ^2  na^  +  mbi   a^   ^2 

And,  as  the  last  determinant  vanishes,  the  remaining  one  is  evi- 
dently the  original.    Hence  we  may  easily  verify  the  following : 


\  +  na  -\-mb  a  b 
l  +  ^o-i-j-m&i  «!  bi 
l  +  woa  +  mSa    Ci2    &2 


a   b   G 

ai  bi  Ci 

a^  O2  Cq, 

&c. 


«  —  (&  +  c)  be 

«i— (&1  +  C1)  bi  Ci 

^-Z— (^2  +  ^2)  ^2^2 

&c. 


15.  Determinants  of  the  fourth  order. 


di  a^  %  0^4 

&i  ^2  &3  'bi 

C\  C2  C3  C4 

di  ^2  ^3  C?4 


a—a2     b  —  62  C—C2 

%  — ^2     &1  — &2  Ci  — c^ 
^2                 ^2  ^2 

&C. 


=    0 


ttl 

bi 

Ci   di 

^2 

h 

Ca    <^2 

ag 

h 

C3    ^3 

a^ 

h 

C4  d^ 

expresses  the  condition  of  the  co-existence  of  four  homogeneous 

*  Spottiswoode's  Deter,  p.  18. 

c  2 


20 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


equations  of  tlie  first  degree  when  the  second  members  vanish 
(Art.  8).  We  may  regard  it  as  the  sum  of  four  determinants 
of  the  third  order,  each  of  which  gives  three  other  partial 
determinants,  and  each  of  these  in  turn  gives  two  products. 
The  whole  number  of  products  of  a  determinant  of  this  order 

will  therefore  be 

1.2.3.4, 

a  result  identical  with  the  number  obtained  by  permuting  the 
suffixes,  as  a-Ji^cS^.  This,  as  a  determinant,  may  be  expressed 
as  four  partial  determinants, 

ai  (&2  C3  d^,    ^2  (^3  C4  (?i),    «3  (&4  Ci  £^2),    (^i  (^1 C2  d^. 

This  result  may  be  obtained  by  the  actual  solution  of  four 
equations  with  four  variables,  or  the  law  of  formation  as  seen 
in  the  case  of  three  unknowns  would  enable  us  to  write 


ai  hi  Ci  di 

(1%  O2  C2  0^2 

ttg  &3  C3  d^ 

a^  &4  C4  d^ 


ai 

(h 

a. 

a. 

h 

h 

h 

h 

«i 

«2 

C3 

e, 

d, 

d. 

d. 

d. 

=   «! 


'2      ' 
■       C3 


.    d. 


.    d. 


+  ^3 


h,    . 


h,  . 


.    da 


with  this  exception,  we  could  not  tell  what  signs   to  write 
before  them. 

These  must  be  determined  by  considering  the  number  of 
permutations  which  arise  between  (Xi (62  03(^4)  and  ai^hsC^di). 
First,  considering  ai  (hiC^d^),  which  we  assume  tobepZ^^s,  we 
exchange  suffixes  with  a  and  h,  which  gives  the  required  suffix 
for  a.  Then,  let  h  and  d  exchange,  which  gives  di,  finally  b  and 
c,  when  the  required  element  is  reached  in  all  three  permuta- 
tions ;  and  therefore  the  sign  must  be  negative,  by  definition, 
since  the  number  is  odd.  The  third  element  is  obtained  from 
di  (^2  C3  f^4)  by  permuting  the  suffixes  of  a  and  c,  and  h  and  d, 
an  even  number ;   and  therefore  the  sign  to  be  prefixed  is  plus. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


21 


The  fourth  element  with  three  permutations  is  found,  in  the 
same  manner,  to  be  negative ;  and  thus  the  whole  number  of 
products  of  this,  and  any  other  determinant,  of  any  order, 
assuming  the  law  of  formation  to  be  general,  may  be  written 
out  at  once. 

16.  Before  proceeding  further,  it  may  be  interesting  to  work 
one  or  two  examples  for  the  sake  of  illustrating  the  reduction 
of  determinants  of  the  third  order  as  exhibited  under  Art.  14, 
and  show  how  the  same  principles  may  be  applied  to  those  of 
four  places. 

Ex.  1. — Let  it  be  required  to  find  the  equation  of  a  circle 
through  three  points,  say  (2,  3),  (4,  5),  (6,  1). 

We  shall  evidently  obtain  three  equations  by  substituting 
successively  these  coordinates  of  the  three  points  in  the 
general  equation  x'^-^y^-{-2ax-\-2hy  +  c  =  0,  viz., 

4a-f   6Z;  +  c  =-13, 
8a-f-]06  +  c=-41, 
12a+  2&H-c=-37. 
To  obtain  a,  h,  c  we  have 


4    6  1 

a  = 

8  10  1 

12     2  1 

-2  2  0 

a=2 

-14  0 

3  11 

8 

-2  2 
-1  4 

a  =  8 

-13     6  1 
-41  10  1 
-37     2  1 

-13       3  1 

-28       2  0 
-24  -^2  0 

-7       2 

-6  -2 

13 
3' 


Explanation.  —  The  A,  co- 
efficient of  a,  has  the  two 
factors  2  and  4.  The  bottom 
row  subtracted  from  each  of 
the  other  rows  gives  zero  for 
a  constituent  in  two  places, 
which,  by  Art.  8,  causes  A  to 
reduce  to  the  2nd  or  lowest 
order. 

The  absolute  term  of  the 
equation  is  first  factored,  and 
then  the  upper  row  is  taken 
from  each  of  the  others,  when 
it,  like  the  other,  reduces  to  a  A 
of  2nd  degree. 


For  the    other   values    of  the    unknowns,  we  write  for  the 
determinant,  which  has  been  found  to  be  —48,  successively, 


22 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


A& 


1  = 


-13  1 

4 

-41  1 

8 

-37  1 

12 

8 

3' 

and    Ac  = 


-13  4  6 
-41  8  10 
-37  12     2 


61 


From  these  values  the  required  equation  can  be  formed.  The 
reductions  of  the  right  members  of  these  equations  are 
effected  in  the  same  manner  as  for  the  value  of  a,  almost  by 
simple  inspection. 

Ex.  2. — Take  the  quadric  (given  by  Dr.  Salmon,  p.  168  of 
his  Solid  Geometry') 

7ajH62/H52^— 4?/;3— 4a;?/  +  10aj-f  4?/  +  62  +  4  =  0, 
differentiate  it  with  respect  to  its  variables,  and  we  shall  have 

7a;-2v/  +  5  =  0, 

— 2aj  +  67/-2;2  +  2=:0, 

-2?/  +  5;3-L3=0, 

5.r  +  27/-|-3;?  +  4  =  0. 

The  determinant  will  then  be,  when  written  at  length, 


7  - 

_2 

0 

-2 

6  - 

-2 

0  - 

_2 

5 

5 

2 

3 

2  - 

-2 

0 

-4 

6  - 

-2 

-3  - 

-2 

5 

1 

2 

3 

0 

-6 

-6 

-3 

0 

14 

10 

18 

0 

4 

14 

15 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Explanation. — Obtained  by  taking 
the  last  column  from  the  first ;  next, 
twice  the  bottom  row  from  the  first, 
and  adding-  four  and  three  times  the 
same  to  tho  second  and  third  rows ; 
then  thrice  the  last  column  from  the 
first  and  second. 

It  is  to  be  especially  observed  that 
the  sign  changes  in  the  determinant 
when  the  factor  12  appears.  The 
reason  is  obvious,  since  the  whole 
determinant  is 

«i  {h c 3^/4)  -  a^  (^3  ^4  <^i)  +  %  {h^  Cj  d^ 

and  Oi  =  Oc,  =  a^  —  0, 

while  ^4  =  1,  and  therefore  in    this 
case  the  determinant  reduces  to 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


23 


=  12 


=  12 


3   3   1 
7   5   6 

2   7   6 


=  12 


0  0  1 
-11  -13  6 
-13    -8   5 


-11  -13 
-13  -8 


=  -972. 


Ex.    3. — To   find   an   expression  for    three    points    in   in- 
volution. 

Substitute,  in  the  determinant 

1    1    1      =0, 

Xi    t^2    '^3 

2/1  2/2  Vs 
Xi  =  ai-\-a2,     X2  =  hi  +  h2,     X3  =  Ci  +  C2 

IJl  =  ^1^2,        2/2  =  &1&2,        2/3  =  C1C2. 

and  we  have 

111 

(i\  +  a2  hx  +  h^  C1  +  C2 
cii^a      &1&2       C1C2 


=  (ci  —  a^  (hi  -  C2)  (tti — J2) 

+  (C2— ai)(&2— Ci)(a2-&i). 


K^ 


Ex.  4. — The  following  solution  is  given  of  the  determinant 
proposed  by  Dr.  Salmon  (p.  12,  Deter.) 


25 

-15 

23 

-5 

0 

0  - 
0 
-5 

=  +6 


-15 

-10 

19 

5 

30 
-20 
14  - 
5 


23 

19 

15 

9 


9 

-5 


04 

-50 

1 

15 

24 

14 

9 

-5 

Explanation. — The  sum  of  2nd  and  4th 
columns  is  taken  from  the  Ist,  9  times  last 
row  is  added  to  the  first,  once  and  twice 
the  last  are  taken  from  2nd  and  3rd,  the 
sum  of  2nd  and  3rd  columns  is  taken 
from  the  first,  the  last  row  is  added  to 
the  1st  and  2nd,  and  finally  twice  the  2nd 
row  is  added  to  the  last.  Sign  changes 
twice  —  1st,  when  —^^.{biC^d^  alone 
remains  of  the  determinant ;  and,  2nd, 
when  hy  a  still  further  reduction  the 
determinant  becomes  —a2{a^h-^. 


0       80  -36 

-12  -23      29 

0  -70      72 


36  X -600 


=  -194400. 


8-1 
-7      2 


24 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


Ex.  5. — Notation. 


I 

m 

n 

h 

m, 

ni 

k 

m^ 

^2 

0. 


Tliis  determinant  expresses  what  will  be  at  once  recognised 
as  expressing  the  elimination  of  x,  y,  z  from 

Ix  -\-my  +nz  =  0, 
liX-\-miy  +  niZ  =  0, 
Z2  a?  +  ma  y  +  7^2  2J  =  0, 

or  the  condition  that  three  straight  lines  may  be  parallel  to 
one  plane. 


Ex.  6.  — Let  Si,  82,  83  be  three  circles  of  the  form 
8,=  (x~aiy+(y-iO'-ol  =  0; 

find  the  circle  orthotomic  to  these  three. 

Let  8  be  the  required  circle  ;   and,  since  8  and  ^1  are  to  be 
orthotomic,  we  must  have 

^a,-ay  +  (hi-hy  =  cl+c'', 

and,  by  eliminating  a,  h,  and  {a^  +  P  —  c^)  from  the  four  resulting 
equations,  we  have  the  determinant 

0. 


^+/ 

X 

y    1 

<+K-< 

ai 

Z>i     1 

<  +  !>l-cl 

a^ 

62     1 

<  +  i>l-i 

^3 

63     1 

17.  Multiplication  of  Determinants. — We  have  now  to 
determine  the  product  of  one  determinant  by  another.  This 
we  may  accomplish  by  the  method  of  transformation.* 

*  Salmon,  Spottiswoode,  and  Tait. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  25 

Let  US  take  two  systems  of  linear  equations, 

ax  +hj  -{-cz  =  Vf 
ayx  +  hiy-hciz  =  v^, 
aa  a;  +  62  2/  +  ^2  ^  =  '^2? 

and  dv  +  evi  -{-fv^  =  0, 

(ZiV  +  eiVi+/iV2=  0, 
d^v  +  e^  Vi  +/2  V2  =  0. 

Substitute  the  values  of  v^  v^ ,  &c,  in  the  second,  and,  collecting 
terms,  we  shall  have 

{ad  +  ea^  -j-fa2  )  x-\-  &c.  =  0, 
{adi  +  ei  tti  +/i  a^)  x  +  &c.  =  0, 
(ac?2  +  62  ci\  4-/2  ^2)  ^  +  &c.  =  0. 

The  condition  of  coexistence  of  these  equations  (Art.  8)  will 
be  the  determinant 


ad  -{-aie  ^a^f  hd  +&ie  +^2/  cd  -\-Cie  ■\-C2f 
ad^-\-aiei-\-a2fi  bdi  +  hie^  +  h^fi  cdi  +  CiGi  +  c^fi 
ad2  +  aie2  +  a2f2    hd2  +  hie2+h2f2    6(^2  +  0162  +  ^2/2 


=  0...(1). 


But  it  is  evident  that  these  two  systems  of  equations  may 
be  treated  as  one,  since  the  variables  they  contain  are  common 
to  both ;  and  we  may  inquire  the  condition  of  coexistence  of 
these  six  equations 

ax  -{-by  +CZ   —v  =  0, 

aiX  +  hiy-\-CiZ  — Vi  ^0, 

ttg  a?  +  Z?2  2/  +  C2  2!  —  -yg    =  0, 

dv   +evi  +fv2    =0, 

diV  +  eiVi+fiV2  =  0, 

c?2 1;  +  62  ^1 +/2  ^?2  =  ^• 

Here  we  may  say,  as  before,   the  condition  of  co-existence  of 


SSK- ' 


26  ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 

these  equations  is  expressed  by  the  determinant 


a  h  c    -1        0        0  [  =  0. 

aj  hi  Ci 

(Xi2  O2  C2 

0  0  0 

0  0  0 

0  0  0 


This  determinant  may  evidently  be  written 

A  B     =AxD, 
0    D 


1 

0 

0 

0 

-1 

0 

0 

0 

-1 

d 

e 

/ 

d. 

61 

/l 

d2 

62 

/2 

or 


a    h    c   \   X 

d    e  f 

ai  hi  ci 

d\  Oi  /i 

a^  hi  C2 

^2   62  /a 

(2); 


but  this  is  no  other  than  the  condition  expressed  by  (1)  ;  and 
therefore  we  say  that  (1)  and  (2)  must  be  equal. 

That  is,  the  product  of  one  determinant  by  another  is  a 
determinant  whose  constituents  consist  of  the  sums  of  the  products 
ohtained  hy  multiplying  each  column  of  the  one  determinant  hy 
the  rows  of  the  other. 


Ex.  1. 


cos  a  cos  h  cos  c 
cos  «!  cos  hi  cos  Ci 
cos  ^2  cos  hi    cos  C2 


2  _ 

10   0 

0   10 

0  0   1 

=  1, 


Ex.  2. — The  equations  of  four  planes  intersecting  in  a  point 


are 


Ix  -j-my  -\-nz  +d  =0, 
liX  +  miy-\-7iiZ-{-di  =  0, 
Z2  a;  -f  wi2  ^  +  ^2  2!  +  (?2  =  0, 
kx  +  m3y-^niZ-^d2=  0, 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


27 


and  the  determinant  formed  is  evident ;  but  if  two  of  the  planes 
pass  through  the  axis  of  z,  we  shall  have 

=  0, 


I 

m 

n 

d 

h 

m^ 

th 

d 

h 

W2 

0 

0 

h 

ms 

0 

0 

which  is  simply  the  product  of  the  two  determinants 

=  0, 


k    ^2 


n    d 
111  di 


which  may  be  multiplied  by  the  rule. 

Suppose,  however,  we  wished  to  interpret  the  latter  equation 
geometrically,  in  which  case  we  see  that  either 

=  0. 


k    ^2 

=  0, 

or 

n    d 

k    W3 

01,  d^ 

The  first  supposition  marks  the  coincidence  of  the  third  and 
fourth  planes  ;  the  second  that  the  four  planes  intersect  some- 
where in  the  axis  of  z. 


28 


CHAPTER    11. 

FORMS  OF  INVERSE  AND  SKEW  DETERMINANTS. 

18.  Minors  as  constituents  and  as  differential  coefficients. 

We  have  already  seen  that  a  determinant  may  be  written 
briefly  by  the  aid  of  its  minors  as 

A  =  aA-\-hB-\-cC. 

But  since  in  any  determinant  we  can  interchange  parallel  lines 
and  obtain  the  same  result  with  a  change  of  sign,  when  the 
number  of  such  interchanges  is  odd,  we  can  write  a  deter- 
minant of  the  third  order,  as  above, 

A  =  aiAi  +  hiBi  +  CiCi, 
as  the  result  of  interchanging  the  first  and  second  rows,  and 

A  =  a^  A2  +  h2  B2  +  C2  G2 
for  the  like  process  between  the  first  and  third,  or  evidently, 
in  general, 

A  =  rti,^i,  +  0^2cAc  Ci„cA^c (1), 

where  c  is  1  n. 

If  now  we  write 

ABC 

A,  B,  Gi 

A2  B2  G2 

we  have  what  is  called  the  inverse  or  reciprocal  of  a  deter- 
minant of  three  places,  that  is,  a  determinant  consisting  of  the 
minors  corresponding  to  the  constitue^its  of  the  given  determinant. 

19.  If,  now,  we  differentiate  (I),  of  the  last  Art.,  in  respect  to 
to  c^ic,  we  must  have 

dA  J,         dA         AS 

=  ^ic,     -;i =   ^c,  &C. 

daic  da%c 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  29 

That  is,  if  we  differentiate  a  determinant  in  respect  to  anj 
constituent,  the  corresponding  minor  will  be  the  differential 
coefficient.* 

Hence,  for  a  determinant  of  the  nth.  order,  we  may  write 

d^     ,  dA  dA  ... 

While  this  is  a  more  cumbrous  notation  than  that  which  it 
replaces,  it  has  its  advantages,  which  will  become  more  ap- 
parent ;  for  example,  it  enables  us  to  distinguish,  at  once, 
between  those  determinants  which  do  and  do  not,  identically, 
vanish. 

Since  a  determinant  is  the  same  in  the  sum  of  the  products 
(Art.  14),  whether  we  expand  in  the  order  of  the  rows  or 
columns,  we  may  write 

^A      .         dA  dA 

^  =  ^kl  T^-+^    2   1 Cikn    1 • 

ddki  dak2  da^n 

It  is  equally  evident,  from  what  has  preceded,  that 
dA  dA  dA      _  ^ 

^Ik  -j rC('2k-^ (^nk-j •      —    U, 

daic  da^c  da,,c 

since  in  these  products  we  have  in  fact  introduced  into  the 
given  determinant  a  line  parallel  and  identical  with  some  other 
line,  and  therefore  the  determinant  in  such  form  vanishes 
identically. 

This  may  be  explained  briefly  thus :  from  what  has  pre- 
ceded, it  is  manifest  that,  when  we  take  the  sum  of  the  pro- 
ducts of  any  line — that  is,  the  sum  of  •the  products  of  all 
the  constituents  of  that  line  by  their  corresponding  minors — 
the  determinant  subsists  ;  but  if  the  minors  do  not  correspond 
with  their  constituents,  the  determinant  vanishes  identically ; 
hence,  in  general, 

dA     ^        dA  dA        f. 

«is  ^— +  a2s  3 —  CLns  —  =  ^• 

dau  da^c  cine 

*  The  notation  followed  here  is  the  same  as  that  of  Jacobi,  Baltzer, 
Spottiswoode,  and  Brioschi. 


30 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


20.  We  shall  fail,  perhaps,  of  our  object  unless  we  descend 
to  special  cases. 

Let  US  take  a  determinant  of  four  places 


ail     • 
^2  1  a  12 


an 
(X24 


The  first  minor  is  obtained  by  erasing  one  row  and  one  column . 
the  second  minor  by  erasing  two  rows  and  two  columns. 
Let  Ai  1  =  the  first  minor,  and  ^22  the  second; 


then 


but 


dai: 


=  Ai, 


d'A 
dan 


da-ii  da^; 


0. 


=A 


22 ) 


So  also,  when  we  take  the  second  differential  in  respect  to 
either  the  first  row   or  column,  the  result  must  be  the  same, 
since  A^  1  does  not  contain  any  one  of  these  constituents. 
Hence,  in  general,  we  may  write 

d'^A  r.  d'A 


daii  da^i 


=  0  or 


dax  1  dai  „ 


=  0. 


21.  Since  an  interchange  of  two  lines  efiects  a  change  of 
sign,  we  must  indicate  a  corresponding  change  in  the  ensuing 
differential  coefficient. 


Thus,  while 


d^  A 


At  2) 


dai  1  da2  2 
an  exchange  of  a-^  3  with  a^  o,  ov  a^i  gives 

d^A  d'A  d'A 


=  A, 


dai  1  <^^i  2        ^^1 2  ^(^1 1  da^  1  da^ 

since  in  either  exchange  the  second  minor  is  not  affected,  or  in 
general 


(V-A 


rPA 


da^c  dakk 


da,k  duk, 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


31 


Evidently  no  a  priori  proof  is  needed  here ;  a  simple  induction, 
as  above,  is  sufficient :  or,  in  other  words,  the  theorem  demands 
only  a  clear  statement,  when  its  truth  is  at  once  obvious. 

22.  In  the  case  of  a  symmetrical  determinant  (Art.  1,  def.), 
when  a-i  i  =  cti  2>  we  shall  find,  on  difi'erentiating  the  determi- 
nant in  reference  to  any  conjugate  constituent,  that  the  difier- 
ential  coefficient  will  be  doubled,  since  the  constituent  function 
is  supposed  to  enter  twice  j  as,  if  cti  2  =  ^2 1   and    cii  3  =  cig  1, 


«!  1  (Xi  2  Cf>ii 
0/2  \  ^22  ^2  3 
^3  1      ^3  2     <^3  3 


^11  Cti2  (l\: 
C(j\2  ^2  2  ^2  1 
^13     ^2  3      ^^3 : 


and  we  have 


d^ 


=  2  J-i  2,   and,  in  general, 


^^  =  1  and 

daj,c 


dA 


=  2^,. 


23.  In  the  case,  then,  of  a  skew,*  as 
the  following,  when  the  terms  of  the 
leading  diagonal  are  zero,  and  the 
conjugates  are  of  opposite  signs,   as 

(Zj  2  =  —  ^2 1  and  ain  =  —  CLm; 


in  which  case 


consequently 


dA 

dai^ 


0      a^ 

^2  1    0 


da2 1 


—  -4i„ — An\  —  0, 


«i« 


when  the  determinant  is  of  the  third  and  every  odd  order. 

When  the  determinant  is  skew  and  of  an  even  order,  we 
shall  have 

^12  =  — -^2  1   and   - —  =  2Aci,.\ 
da^ 


*  Salmon,  p.  30  ;  CreUe,  Vol.  51,  p.  264. 
t  Baltzer,  p.  13. 


32  ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

That  is,  wlien  the  skew  symmetric  determinant  is  of  an  odd 
degree^  it  vanishes ;  hut  if  of  an  even  degree,  its  differential 
coefficient  in  respect  to  any  constituent  function  is  equal  to  twice 
its  corresponding  minor. 


24.  Referring  again  to  equation  (1),  Art.  19,  we  see  that, 

since  -= —  =  -4ic  is  a  determinant  of  the  n—1  order,  it  may, 
da^, 

as  such,  have  an  expansion  similar  to  that  equation.     If,   for 

example,  the  original  determinant  were  of  the  fourth  order, 

- —  would  express  a  determinant  whose  outer  row  and 
daic 

column  had  been  erased,  in  other  words,  a  determinant  of  the 
third  order. 

Let  us  take,  then,  - —  to  represent  generally  a  determinant 
daj,i 

of  the  n—\  order,  and  suppose 

.  dA    ,         dA  dA 

A  =  aci 1- ac  2  -^ —  a,n  - — , 

da^  1  da-c  2  da^  „ 

to  represent  a  determinant  of  the  n""  order  ;  then,  if  we  differ- 
entiate this  equation  in  respect  to  %  1,  the  left  member  will  be 
identical  with  the  proposed  expression  for  the  determinant  of 
the  n — 1  order  ;  that  is, 

dA  d^A       ,  d'^A  d^A 


da^  1         "    dac  1  da^  1       "    da^  2  <^%  1  dag  „  da^  1 

The  same  equation,  differentiated  with  respect  to  a,,  2  ^^^ 
aj,  n ,  will  yield  similar  expressions  for  determinants  of  the 
n  —  1  order, 

d'^A 


dA   _  ^         d'^A          ^          d^A 
dak2~    '  ^  dac  1  da^^  '  '"^  ^  da^  2  dak  2 

..  a< 

dA                   d'A 

'. —  =  a,i  ' — +  

•  a. 

'  dac  n  daj,  2 

d^A 
dac  u  dau  «' 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


33 


25.  Remembering  that  the  determinant  subsists  when  the 
constituent  function,  and  the  function  of  the  differential 
coefficient,  as  factors,  are  identical  (Art.  18),  we  may  write 


but 


^  =  CL\c-^ ho^2c  -. — 

dai  c  aa2  c 

^  dA    ,  dA 

dai  c  da^  ^ 


dA   ^ 

dObn  c  ' 


dA 

^j»  1  ~^      » 


when  c  and  1  are  different. 

We  shall  continue  to  use  the  differential  notation,  and  apply 
it  to  the  minors  of  the  reciprocal  of  a  determinant,  as 

dA  dA  dA 

dai  1  dai  %  dai  n 

dA  dA  dA 

aa<i  I  aci<i  2  aai  ^ 


dA       dA  dA 

dan  1    dan  2  dan « 

We  might  use  a  different  notation,  as 

^11      -o-i  2    -^1  n 


An  1        A, 


but  we  prefer  to  familiarize  the  reader  with  the  one  we  have 
adopted. 

26.  We  now  propose  the  following  theorem : — Any  deter- 
minant other  than  skew,  multiplied  iy  its  second  differential 
coefficient,  is  equal  to  the  difference  of  the  products  of  the  dfferential 
coefficients  an,  ai2,  ct.21?  ^22?   taJcen  as  conjugates. 

Confining,  for  the  present,  the  demonstration  to  a  particular 
case,  let  us  write 

dA 


^  dA    .  dA 

0=  ^11- — -\'Cl2\:^ — 

ctoi2  da-ii 


an 


da^  2* 


34 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


aai  2  wa2  2 


0  =  ai4-- l-<X2  4^ — 


Multiply  these  equations  by 

d^^  d'A 


^4  2 


dA 

da^2 


dA 


da^. 


d^A 


dai  1  da2 1     dui  i  da^  2        '    dai  1  da^  ^ 

respectively ;  and,  adding  the  results, 

/   ^^      d'A       ^  ^^^      d'A        ^^^      d'A     \    dA 

\       daiidttii  daiida2  2  danda^J  da^ 

1^^       dA       ^^         d'A  ^        d^A      \ 

\       doiiduzi  dan  dci^i  dai^daij 


d'A 


dai  1  da^ 


dA 
da^ 


(a         ^'^       \a         ^'^  a         ^'A      \   dA 

^  \       dai  1  <^^2 1  dai  1  da^  2  dai  1  ^^2  4 '  da^  j 


The  right  mem|per  may  be  reduced  as  follows : — The  first 
parenthesis  becomes,  by  making  one,  interchange  of  suffixes, 

(a         ^'^      +a         ^'^  a     -Jlj^—] 

\       daiida^i  da^dai^^  dai^daiJ' 


T>  i.  A  dA    .  dA 

But  A  =  aii- —  +  ^123 — 

aai  1  aai  2 


dA 
dai^ 


,         dA  d^A       ,  d'A 

and    —- —  =  an l-ai2i -. —    

aa2 1  clai  i  da^  1  dai  2  da^  1 

therefore  —  - —  is  the  value  of  the  parenthesis. 
da^i 


«14 


d'^A 


dai  4  da2 1 


dA 


In  the  same  manner,  the  second  is  found  equal  to  — — ;  and 

daii 

so  also  the  third  and  fourth,  without  change  vf  sign.     That  is, 
the  values  of  the  third  and  fourth  parentheses  appear  to  have 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


35 


the  same  sign.  The  essential  sign  must  be  determined  from 
the  rule  of  signs. 

In  this  case  we  remember  that 

The  parentheses  after  the  second  therefore  destroy  each  otl^er. 
The  multipliers  used  interpose  to  change  this  order  in  the 
first  and  second,  and  hence  we  write  as  the  result 


d'^A 


dai  I  da^ . 


dA       dA___dA_      dA 
daii     da^i      da^i     da^ 


This  proof  might,  it  is  evident,  have  been  made  general.     It 
is  now,  however,  in  a  form  to  be  readily  verified. 


27.  Theorem  second. — A  determinant  formed  from  the  first 
differential  coefficients  of  the  given  determinant  may  he  expressed 
in  terms  of  the  given  determinant^  and  is  equal  to  that  determinant 
involved  to  a  degree  one  less  than  its  numher  of  places. 


I 


Let 


an   «!  2 
^21    ^22 


^2, 


^»1     ^n2     ^nn 

be  the  given  determinant. 

Its  first  differential  coefficients,  taken  in  order  and  arranged 
in  square  form,  will  then  be 


(iA 
dan 

dA 
dai2 

dA 
da^n 

d^ 
da^i 

d^ 

da2  2 

dA 

da^n 

dA 
da,,  I 

^A 

dan -2, 

d2 

dA 
'  da^n 

36  ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

Let  now  A^  be  multiplied  by  A,  and  we  shall  have 
AAi  = 


d^   ,              d^  c?A    ,              c?A 

^11^^ \--"0.in^ — •     a2i- h...  a2»i — 

daii               ct<^in  dan               da^ 

^     cZA    ,              (?A  ^A    .              dA 

%i3 r...  ttin^ —     »2ii r...  ftin^ — 

ao-ai                aa2n  aa2i               o^ti^2» 


c?A  ^       „ 
a„i- —  +...  &c. 
dan 

&c.        &c. 


cZA    ,  c?A 

o^ii:} f-...  ami — ■ 


•&c. 


&c. 


d^  , 

da^i 


Observing  these  products,  it  will  be  seen  that  all  except 
those  of  the  leading  diagonal  vanish  identically ;  and  hence 
we  have 


AAj 


A   0    ...    0     =  A' 
0    A   ...    0 


0    0    ...   A 
or        .  Ai  =  A"-^ 

which  was  to  be  proved. 


28.  We  shall  now  begin  to  introduce,  as  we  proceed  with 
the  general  theory,  some  of  the  geometrical  uses  of  determi- 
nants. 

Mr.  Spottiswoode,  in  Yol.  51,  p.  262,  and  Prof.  Cayley,  in 
32nd  Vol.  of  Grelle,  have  discussed  the  subject  of  orthogonal 
substitutions  in  connection  with  skew  determinants.* 

We  have  already  given  a  definition  of  a  skew  determinant; 
we  will  now  show  how  to  effect  an  orthogonal  transformation 
of  the  third  order,  and  express  the  values  of  the  nine  direc- 
tion-cosines in  terms  of  three  independent  variables,  or  in 
general  how  to  connect  n"^  quantities  by  ^n  (n  +  1)  relations, 

*  On  the  number  of  linear  substitutions,  see  Journal  de  VEcole  Folytech- 
nique,  Tom.  22,  38  cahier. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  37 

iw  (n— 1)  of  them  only  being  independent.     Let  ns,  for  ex- 
ample, write  the  following  linear  equations  : 

x  =  aiiU  +  ai2'v-{-ai2Wy 
y  =  a2iU  +  a22V  +  a23W, 
z  =  a3iU  +  a32V-{-a3sf^f 

and  a  derived  system 

X  —  aiiU  +  a2iV  +  asiWf 
Y  =  tti  2  w  +  ^2  2  v  +  ag  2  w;, 
Z  =  aiaW  +  ^asV  +  aggW, 

where  we  will  suppose  aik=:  —  Uki  and  «,»=!; 
therefore,  by  addition,  we  have  at  once 

x  +  X  =  2u,   y  +  Y=2v,    z-hZ=z2w. 

If,  in  the  first  system,  we  find  the  values  of  u,  i',  ty,  which 
we  do  by  multiplying  the  equations  respectively  by 

dA      dA      dA 
dtti  I    dOi  I    da^  I 

and  adding,  when 

.  dA      ,   dA      ,dA 

Aw  =  - — aj  +  -- — y  +  ~ — z, 
dan        da2\        dcizx 

and,  by  a  similar  process,  we  obtain 

.  dA      ^    dA      ^   dA 

Av  =  - — x-\-  - — 2/  +  -— 0, 
dai  2        da2  %        da^  2 

Aw  =  - —  Xf  &c. ; 
dai2 

whence,  by  substituting  for  the  values  of  u,  VjWj  u  =  — — ,  &c., 


we  obtain 

AX=  (2  4^- a]^  +  2  P-y  +  2 

\     dan         I  "<^'^2i 


aai2          ^     CLCL22         I            CLCL32 
A^  =  2-— a;  +  2-— 2/+     2- A)z. 

dais  "«23  ^      "^3  3  / 

Treating  the  second  system  in  the  same  manner,  we  find 

Au  =  -= —  X  +  &c. , 
dan 

da2i 

Aw  =  - —  Z  +  &c.  ; 
da^i 

and  also,  by  substitntion,  taking  value  of  x  and  instead  of  X, 
we  find 

\  '  doii  I  dai2  dcfiz 

A2/  =  2-^X  +  &o., 
da2i 

Az  =  24^X  +  &c., 
dag  I 

or,  more  symmetrically, 


a;  =  C11X+C12  Y+Ci3-Z^' 
y  =  CiiX+CiiY+CisZ 

Z  =  C3]X-HC32  Y+C33Z  . 


(1). 


and 


where 


X  =  Ciia5  +  C2iy  +  C3i2! 
Y=  Ci2X  +  C22y  +  C3 

Z  =  Ci3X+C2zy+c, 


'83«-) 


2-^- A  — 

cZdii  "  da22 

Cii, 


-A 


dA 


(2), 


C22,  anjd   — — -^  =  Cia,  &c. 


ELEMENTARY   DETEKMINANTS. 


39 


Now,  if  (1)  and  (2)  are  connected  by  an  orthogonal  substi- 
tution, we  must  have,  by  Solid  Geom., 


0,  &c.  &c. 


That  is,  the  suras  of  the  squares  of  the  direction-cosines  =  1, 
and  the  sums  of  their  products  taken  two  and  two  =  0,  when 
the  axes  are  rectangular.  But  these  results  immediately 
follow,  if  we  substitute  (2)  in  (1). 

Proceeding  now  to  give  to  c  values  corresponding  to  any 
given  case,  we  see  that  the  determinant  must  be  analogous  to 
the  following  * 


A  = 


1  n  —  m 
-n  1  I 
m    --1        1 


=  l  +  ZHmH< 


and,  forming  the  minors, 
Im—n 


lm-\-n  nl—m 
l  +  m^  mn  -|- 1 
mn  —  l     l-\-n^ 


and 


dA      . 
o A 


^A 


l^l^  +  rn'  +  n' 
2(hn+n) 


—  C22  —  ^'ssj 


dai2  __  ^     ._ 

A  '''       l  +  l'-^m'  +  n'' 


&c.  &c.* 


^     where  Cj  1,  Ci  2,  &c.  represent  the  values  of  the  nine  direction- 
cosines  in  the  given  transformation. 

29.  Ex.  1.  We  may  find  an  illustration  of  what  has  gone 
before  in  the  following  well-known  geometrical  relations. 

*  The  values  of  I,  m,  n  are  a  tan  ^Q,  h  tan  ^0,  c  tan  \e,  where  the  system  is 
revolved  through  an  an^le  0,  the  direction-cosines  of  the  old  axes  being 
a,  b,  c.  {Crellc,  vol.  51,  ^.  263.) 


40 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


Suppose  Zmw,  Zimi^i,  Za^Tig^a  the  din^ction-coeines  of  three 
right  lines  in  reference  to  their  three  rectangular  axes  ;  ai,  ag,  a^ 
the  angles  included  between  them  : 

P  +  m^  +  ri^  =  1,  III  +mmi  -j-nni  =  cos  ai, 

Z^  4-  mj  +  Wj  =1,  ZZg  -\-m1n2  +nn2  =  cos  ctj, 

Z^  +  m^  +  ^2  =  1,  Z,Z2-|-'W?i?%  +  ^^i^2  =  <^os  as- 
Now  we  are  enabled  to  write 


I  771    n 

II  Wi     TZi 


2      ^2      ^^2 


1         cos  ag    COS  ^2 

COS  «3  1  COS  til 

COS  a.z    COS  «!        1 


Z     m     n 

2 

10    0 

h   '^h   ^1 

0    1    U 

Z2    mg    tia 

0    0    1 

For  the    above  equations  are  true  for  every  value  of  cii,  a.^, 
and  therefore  true  when  ai  &c.  =  0,  as 


=  1, 


which  conforms  to  the  condition,  and  is  true  when  the  lines 
are  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  giving  a  determinant  which 
has  already  been  noticed  (Art.  16). 

Ex.  2.  Another  illustration  is  afforded  by  a  determinant 
which  is  related  to  equations  of  a  higher  character  than  we 
had  purposed  to  introduce  at  this  stage  of  our  progress,  but 
we  will  just  notice  it. 

Suppose  a  function  of  Z  is  expressed  in  the  following  deter- 
minant, 

a— I      d        e 

d     b-l      f  (1), 

e       f      c-l 

and  suppose  this  function  be  multiplied  by  a  function  of  ~Z; 
we  may  then  write  as  the  result 


/(- 0-/(0  = 


A-l''    B 
D    B-P 


JE 
F 


(^). 


F  G-r  I 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  41 

Determinant  (1)  expresses  an  equation  of  frequent  occnrrence 
in  mathematical  physics,  as  an  instance  of  which  the  reader 
may  examine  Laplace's  equation  in  g  on  the  secular  inequali- 
ties'of  the  planets  (Mecanique  Celeste,  Bk.  II.  sec.  56.) 

Are  the  roots  of  such  an  equation  real  ?  Special  cases  had,  of 
course,  been  resolved  by  the  older  mathematicians,  as  Cauchy 
and  others ;  but  the  method  by  Sylvester  (PMlosojoMcal  Mag. 
1852),  depending  upon  the  rule  for  the  multiplication  of  deter- 
minants, is  more  simple  and  elegant.  The  method  is  shown 
above  in  (2),  when/(Q  •/(  — 0  is  given,  in  which  we  find  by 
expansion 

A  =  a''-{-d'  +  e\  D  =  ef+d  (a  +  h), 
B  =  ¥+f+d\  E=fd  +  e(a-^c), 
C  =  c'+f  +e\      F=ed-\-f  (b  +  c). 

With  these  values  (2)  becomes 

I'-Ll'-^MP-N  (3), 

where,  if  L,  M,  and  N  are  essentially  positive,  then,  according 
to  Des  Cartes'  rule  of  signs,  we  must  have  an  equation  for  P, 
and  therefore  for  f(l),  whose  roots  cannot  be  of  the  form 
of  (l—Jpy  =  —  2/^  ^^d  therefore  negative,  but  must  be  essen- 
tially real.  The  only  question  to  be  considered  is,  what  is 
the  essential  sign  of  Jv,  M,  and  JV?  In  the  expansion  of  (2), 
we  shall  find  that  the  L  of  (3)  is  equal  to 

a''  +  h^  +  c''-\-2f  +  2e^  +  2d\ 

M=  (ah-dy  +  (ac-eyi-(hc-fy 

+  2  (af-^edy  +  2  (he-fy+(cd-fy, 

and  N=     a  d   e 

d   b  f 

6    f     C 

where  L,  M,  N  are,  it  is  evident,  essentially  positive. 

Ex.  3.  It  might  be  well  to  mention  one  peculiar  case  in  the 
multiplication  of  determinants,  as  exhibiting  or  suggesting  an 
easy  treatment  of  a  large  number  of  theorems.     It  may   be 


42 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


found  in  Grelle,  Vols.  39  and  51 ;  it  is  also  given  by  Salmon 
and  Brioschi. 


Suppose 


i  +  t~i=o 


the  equation  to  a  conic,  a,  h  the  semi-axes. 

If,  now,  we  take  any  three  points  on  the  curve  and  form  a 
triangle,  its  area  could  be  expressed  at  once  by  the  determi- 
nant given  in  Art.  8,  in  terms  of  the  co-ordinates  of  its  vertices  ; 
and  similarly,  in  this  case,  the  determinant 


1 

1    1 

y 
h 

h    h 

X 

Xy    £a 

a 

a  a 

immediately  suggests  itself  as  expressing  twice  the  area  of  the 

a 
given  triangle,  =  db  2  — ,  iS  being  =  to  the  area  of  the  triangle 

whose  points  are  given  (xy)^  (a^i^/i),  fe^/a)-     If  now  we  square 
this  determinant,  or  multiply  it  by 


=  =f2 


8_ 
2aV 


^  y.  -I 

a    b 

^  Hi   -I 
a    b 

^  Hi    —I 
a   b 


we  shall  obtain  a  symmetrical  determinant,  as 

O'l  ^  g  _  _  48^ 
h  b,f  ~  a'})'' 
9   f   ci 

where  S  =  \ab  (- aib^Ci  +  a^f^  +  big^-\- c^h^ - 2fyhy ; 

and  since,  if  the  points  are  on  the  curve,  we  have 


2  «,2  ^2  2  ^2  -.2 

5+1-1  =  0'     ^'+^-1  =  0,   and  ^^  +  || -1=0, 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


43 


aj  =  &i  =  Ci=  0,  and  likewise  8  =  \ab  (^2/^^)*, 
wMch  is  the  value  of  the  determinant 


0  h 

9 

h  0 

f 

9  f 

0 

where^=^+2^-l,  ,  =  ^»  +  &' -l,/=^+M-^-l, 


a"        b"  a- 

which  can  be  reduced  as  follows  : 


Let  c,  d,  e  represent  the  sides  of  the  triangle,  and  0,  D,  E  the 
parallel  semi-diameters  respectively. 

Then,  from  the  nature  of  the  ellipse,  we  have 


>y 


G^  a 

D^""       «^      "^       Z>^     ' 

2  —  ^2         "r 


but  feL^V^^l=^' 


=  2(1-?-^)' 


E 


6'- 


and  corresponding  values  for  —  and  -^i>  which  differ  from  the 

other  values  of  h,  g,  and/  by  only  the  factor  2  and  the  negative 
sign. 

Therefore,  by  substituting,  we  have 


therefore 


45P 

d? 
2D^ 

2E' 

d^      e^ 
W  2E^ 

0 

Si  =  i.ah 

cde 

4iO^D''E^^ 


ODE 


30.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  examples  here  given 
are  simply  for  illustration,  and  to  satisfy  the  reader  that  the 


u 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


principles  employed  are  capable   of  wide   application   in   all 
Co-ordinate  Geometry. 

Two  theorems  will  now  be  added,  whicli  tbe  reader  will  be 
able  to  prove  in  a  manner  more  or  less  general. 

1.  The  square  of  a  determinant  of  an  even  order  can  he  ex- 
pressed hy  a  shew  symmetric  of  an  even  order. 

2.  While  a  symmetric  shew  of  an  even  order  does  7iot  vanish, 
its  inverse  is  a  symmetric  shew  determinant.* 

31.  Let  us  now  consider  briefly  determinants  arising  from  the 
roots  of  equations. 

It  is  well  known  that,  by  Sturm's  theorem,  we  find  the  number 
and  places  of  real  roots — that  the  imaginary  roots  enter  by  pairs, 
and  are  equal  in  number  to  the  variations  of  signs  of  the  leading 
powers  of  x  in  all  the  functions. 


Let 


1 


C2 


-1    ^n-1 

^2 


be  the  determinant  formed  from  the  roots  of  the  equation 
Substituting  c  for  x,  we  wiite 


c^+c^n-icr'+&c. 

&c.  &c. 


2C-^..Oo=0, 

=  0, 

'■+  ...=0. 


*  These  theorems  have,  in  fact,  already  been  exhibited,  but  their  appli- 
cations to  linear  equations  generally  will  be  seen  in  Crelle,  Vols.  51  and  52, 
and,  for  earlier  investigations  of  the  theory  of  Substitutions,  see  Euler,  Vols. 
15  and  20  of  Novi  Commentarii  Acad.  Fetrop.  Compare  also  the  formulas 
given  by  Rodigues  in  Liouville,  tom.  5,  with  those  of  Euler  here  cited  in 
N.  G.  A.  P.  under  Be  motu  corporum  rigidoruni. 


I 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  45 

Let  these  equations  be  multiplied  by  any  indeterminants,  as 
fCi,  K'a  ...  <c„ ,  and  assume 

Kicl  +  K^cl  +  K^cl  +  &c.  =v (1), 

also  '^1  +  ^2-1- 'fn  =  0, 

K1C1+K2C2+ JCnCn  =  0, 

'^iC^^  +  'c.c-H K,,Cl''  =  0', 

whence,  by  a  short  algebraic  process,  we  shall  find 

0,=   -l(^,c»;+fC2C^ K^cl)  (2). 

By  differentiating  the  given   determinant    and   employing 
the  value  of  v,  we  have,  from  the  determinant, 

dA    .    ,   dA   ,   ,  dA    s        . 

s;f'  +  5^-''^+ d7<^^' 

and,  from  (1), 

_  dA    V  _  dA    v^  dA    V 

"^"■^'A'     "'"dd'A'     "''"d^'A! 


which  values,  substituted  in  (2),  give 


0. 

which  evidently  represents  the  sums  of  the  combinations  of 
the  roots  taken  n—s  and  n  —  s. 

Let  us  now  seek  for  A  in  terms  of  the  involved  roots  by 
their  differences. 

Let  s  =  n—1, 

and  0  (x)  =  (x—Ci)  (aj  — Cg)  ...  (ic  — c„)  ; 

and  since  /Cj,  x-g,  &c.  are  any  values 

V  .    V  V 

*■! —    — 7 — \J       '^2  — 7 — \i        ......        '^w  —  T~7      \» 

^l(Ci)  ^i(C2)  (pi{Cn) 

1  1       dA  1  1       dA 


therefore 


^i(cO        A     dc^^-''     9i(cn)        A      (ZC^' 


46 
but 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


dc'l-' 


,«-.       ,n-. 


=  Ai. 


Let  (J)'  (x)  designate 


therefore 


(aj— C2)  (x—cs) (aj-c„), 

1      _  1       dA, 


(pi  (ca)        Ai     del 
Similarly,  if  we  put 

d^i   _  A  dA2  _   . 


n-2 


dA 


dc„_i 


n-2   


A„.i  =  1, 


and  02(«)  =  («— C3)  ...  (a;  — O,    ^aW  =  («— ^4)  ...  («— c„)j 

there  will  result 

1  1       ^A,  1  1 


^^(Ca)         Aa     dcj  ^'      0n-2(c„.i)         A„_i' 

whence,  by  multiplication,  member  by  member, 
A  =  0'(<^i)  ^1(^2)  02(^3)  ...  «?>n-2(c„-l) 

=  (Ci  — C2)(Ci-C3)...(Ci  — c„)...(c2-c„)...(c,»^i  -O (3), 

which  is  the  product  of  the  differences  of  n  roots  expressed  as 
a  determinant.' 

All  this  is  easily  generalized  as  follows : — 


If,  in 


A  = 


C2 


cl        o\ 


^1  ^2 


w, 


we  consider  that  this  determinant  would  vanish  if  Ci  =  C2,  and 
that  therefore  Ci  —  Co,  must  be  a  factor,  and  what  is  true  of  these 


ELEMENTAET   DETERMINANTS. 


47 


two  roots  is  true  of  all  the  others  considered  two  and  two ; 
hence  we  are  enabled  to  write  (3)  at  once. 

Or  we  might  prove  trae  generally  the  method  which  is  here 
exhibited  as  a  special  case, 


=    (Cl-C3)(C2-C3) 


Ex. :  Prove  that 


1 

1     1 

= 

0 

Cj         02        Cg 

<  <  ^l 

C1-C3 

-Ca) 

1           1 

C1  +  C3  C2  +  C3 

= 

0 

^2""  C3 


C3 


1 

1 

1 

1 

Cl 

Ca 

Ca 

C4 

^; 

< 

^I 

^'5 

r-t 

< 

^'t 

r,J 

i 

2 

a 

4 

=  (c, 


(Ci-C3)(C2-C3)(c3  —  Ci). 


C4)  (Ca  -  C4)  (Ca  -  C4)  (C2  -  C3) 

(Ci  —  C2)  (Ci  +  C2  +  C3  +  C4) . 


32.  If  now  we  proceed  to  form  the  square  of  (4)  of  the  last 
Art.,  we  may  write  the  result 

80      Si  8,,. 

81  82     Sn 


8n-\        8n 


8„ 


where  80,  82,  8n,  &c.  express  the  sumof  the  first,  second, 

and  nth  powers  of  Cj,  Ca,  &c. 
Thus,  for  example. 


1    1 


80  8i 

81  82 


=  (ci-c2y. 


In  the  same  manner  we  shall  find 


^0   ^1 

8, 

^1   82 

8, 

S,  8, 

8, 

=   2(Cl-C2)'(c,-C3)'(C3-Cl)^ 

&c.  &c. 


where  2  =  the  sum  of  the  products. 

These  determinants  are  of  great  practical  value  in  the  theory 
of  equations,  inasmuch  as,  with  their  aid,  as  with  the  functions 
of  Sturm,  we  determine  the  number  of  variations  of  signs,  and, 


48  ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

as  stated  at  the  beginning  of  the  preceding  Art.,  this  determines 
the  number  of  pairs  of  imaginary  roots. 

But  if  these  determinants  are  all  positive,  there  will  be  no 
variations,  and  consequently  all  the  roots  of  the  equation  will 
be  real. 

To  those  acquainted  with  the  general  theory  of  equations 
these  hints  will  be  sufficient  to  show  the  bearing  of*  determi- 
nants upon  this  subject ;  the  real  object  in  this  and  the  pre- 
ceding Art.  being  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  solution  of  linear 
differential  equations  by  the  use  of  the  determinant  notation. 

33.   When  n~l  particular  integrals  are  given,  to  find  the  n*^.  * 
Let  us  take  the  general  linear  differential  equation,  coefficients 
being  constant 

0+^£^^+ 4^^^=« -(i)- 

If  we  separate  the  signs  of  operation  from  those  of  quantity, 
the  part  involving  only  signs  of  operation  and  constants  may 
be  considered  as  an  operation  performed  on  ?/,  as 


/(£)»=»• 


From  which  we  get  ?/  at  once  explicitly,  if  we   are  able  to 
perform  the  inverse  operation 

This  we  cannot  easily  do  in  its  general  form,  but  we  can  con- 
ceive the  operation   f  li-)  to  be  made  up  of  certain  binomial 

operations,  and  then  perform  the  inverse  operation  for  each  of 
these.  We  will,  however,  in  this  case  proceed  in  a  different 
manner. 

Let  us  first  assume  the  n  particular  integrals,  that  is,  values 
*  See  Malmsten,  in  Crelle,  vol.  39. 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


49 


that  will  satisfy  (1),  as  yi,  2/2  ...^/n;    coefficients  now  being 
variable. 

Proceeding  as  in  Art  3] ,  and  placing 

'^•12/J        +'^22/2       ICnVl        =^ 

f^i^i    +'^22/2    K^yl    =v 


we  obtain 


•^i2/r'+'^22/r' '^nv: 


0 


Ar=-^(K,y^^  +  K,y;+...K,rJ 


C^h 


Solving,  as  before,  for  the  values    of  tbe   indeterminates 
»:i,  K2  ...  K-,,,  and  substituting  in  (2),  we  find,  since 

A  =  ■ 


y\    y\ 


vT"  yV 


y\ 


yV 


that 


In  differentiating  this  determinant,  we  get  A',  or 


r/A 


^A 


A'  n      ^i^        I        n      "^ 


dy:-''' 


(4). 


therefore 

Resuming  now  equation  (1)  : 

Let  us  suppose  the  n—1  particular  integrals  2/1,  2/2 >  •••  Vn-i 
are  known,  f 

Let  y  =  yiKi        +2/2*^2        +    2/n-l'^n-l 

0  =  2/1  '-''l        +  2/2  4        +    Vn-l  f^'n-l 

0  =  y\K[     +2/2 '^2     +•>...  2/n-i<-l 

o  =  2/r.;  +  2/2"'.;+ 2/::?Cj 


(5). 


*  r,  n, «  —  1  do  not,  of  course,  indicate  powers, 
t  Crelle,  vol.  39,  p.  94. 


50  ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 

Solving,  we  find 


2/2  2/3 

yl    y\ 


y.    2/ 


2/n-l 
2/n-l 


ylil 


:  d= 


2/3  2/4 

2/3      2/i 


2/3     VT 


2/1      2/2 

2/;  2/^ 


yV  yl' 


yn.2 
2/L2 


i/n-2 


::  AiiA^: 


A..1. 


If  now  we  differentiate  successively  equation  (5),  remem- 
bering the  assumed  relations  between  the  n—1  functions,  we 
shall  have 


dx 


2/1 '^'1+2/2 '^'2+ y'n-\*^n-\: 


2/'l''^'l+2/2'^'2  + 


yn-\f^n-\ 


d''-'y 
dx''-' 


dry 
dx"* 


2/r 

''^•i+2/r'^2+- 

yl 

+. 

/rs  +  2/rs 

+ 

... 

•^  ?» - 1     n  -  1 

y> 

',+^^2+ 

yl- 

i^ 

-1 

+2(»/r'<  +  2/r'<  + CK.J 


which,  substituted  in  (1),  give 

+[^(;/rn+2;/»-']s  + [^(2/;::D+22/;::!]<-i  =  o- 

Let  «■',  =  PA,,     tj  =  UA-i  K„=  UA,, ; 


ELEME NOTARY    DETERMINANTS.  51 

whence 

k';  =  u'a,+ua[,  k:=:U'a,+  ua:, i^:=u'a,+ua',. 

But  yr\  +  yr\  + CiVi 

famishes  the  determinant 


and 


dA 
dx 


Vi     2/2 


ur  yV 


2/1    y-i 
y\    y\ 


j\    y% 


yn-i 
yl-i 


yT-\ 


yn-i 
y\-i 


•'n-l 


=  ^, 


therefore      ^/P'  K  +  yV  K  + yl:^  K^,  =  0, 

and  2/r-^  A^  -  2/r'^  + Cl  A^_^  =  A'; 

'  therefore  JJ'A  +  UAA  +  2UA'  =  0, 

By  integrating  this  equation,  we  have 


u  = 


A' 


or,  substituting  for  JT  the  values  of  k,  and  A„  and  integrating 
again,  ic,  =  L^^  e-/^''^  dx. 


If  we  write 
we  have 


A  =  -±-  =S± 
A 


yn-2 


yi-yi' 

.,  =  (_!)-!  [dA_^,-fA..^^^ 

J  dy'l~- 
e2 


52 


ELEMENTAEY   DETERMINANTS. 


Returning  now  to  equation  (4),  we  see  that  it  can  be  written 
^'        where  A  =  Ce-f""^'. 


Ar  = 


Ce-f^ 


A  single  instance  is  thus  given  in  full,  that  the  reader  may- 
judge  for  himself  of  the  practical  benefits  of  the  determinant 
notation  in  conducting  intricate  analytical  operations. 

34.  In  the  solution  of  simultaneous  difierential  equations— r- 
that  is,  a  system  of  equations  with  but  one  dependent  variable, 
in  which  some  form  of  this  variable,  as  a  function  of  the  in- 
dependent variables,  must  be  found  to  satisfy  all  the  equa- 
tions— there  is  no  reason  why  determinants  may  not  be  em- 
ployed to  effect  the  elimination  (if  this  method  be  preferred  to 
those  of  D'Alembert  or  Lagrange)  as  in  the  case  of  ordinary 
linear  equations. 

If,  for  example,  we  have  three  simultaneous  differential 
equations  of  the  form, 

d 


Ex.  1 


dt 


X  +  hy  +  cz  =  0, 


ax  +  —  y-i-cz 
dt 


0, 


ax-\-Vy-\--~  0  =  0. 
ctt 

The  condition  of  co-existence  is  the  determinant 
L*  \df  I  \  dtl 


d 

b 

c 

It 

d 

1 

a 

dt 

c 

y 

d 

a 

dt 

I.  e. 


-—.  —  (ah  4-  ac  +  h'c)  — -  +  ah'c  -\-  a  be     a;  =  0, 
Ldr  dt  J 


and  we  can  proceed  to  integrate  at  once  this  equation,  givii 
rise  to  only  three  arbitrary  constants. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


53 


Ex.  2. — Let  us  take  four  simultaneous  equations. 

The  equations  of  Airy,  for  determining  the  secular  variations 
of  the  eccentricity  and  longitude  of  the  perihelion,  will  serve 
as  an  illustration : 


—  u  +  aiV—a^v  =  0, 
»!«— —  v  —  a^u  =  0, 

(Ml 


dt 


u  -\-hiv' —h^v  =  0, 


hiu — —  v'—h^u  =  0. 
dt 

The  determinant  for  eliminating  the  variables  w,  v,  u\  v\  is 

therefore 


d 

dt 

a, 

-aj 

0 

dl 

d 

dt 

0 

—a 

0 

-h 

\ 

d 
dt 

-h. 

0 

d 
dt 

h 

d" 


d' 


^^4  +  (^1  +  ^1  +  2a2&2)  ^2  +  (aA-a2hy  =  0 ; 

which  can  readily  be  integrated,  and  is,  of  course,  symme- 
trical for  either  of  the  variables.  This  may  be  regarded  as 
the  equation  in  u. 

35.  One  other  example  upon  this  point,  and  then  we  shall 
proceed  to  another  subject. 

Suppose  we  have  a  pair  of  linear  partial  differential  equa- 


tions, as 


-J-  dx  +  —-  dy  =  0, 
ax  dv 


dU  ^^      dU 
dx  dy 


=  0, 


54 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


where  Z7  and  V  are  functions  of  x  and  y  ;  then  the  condition  of 
the  dependence  of  these  functions  is  expressed  by  the  deter- 
minant dV     dV     ^ 


dV 
dx 

dV 
dy 

dU 

dx 

dU 
dy 

This  leads  us  to  the  consideration  of  what  are  caWed  functional 
determinants ;  and  the  general  proposition  is  that,  when  afunc- 
tional detenninant  of  a  system  of  functions  vanishes,  it  expresses 
the  condition  of  dependence  of  the  functions  ;  that  is,  we  may  test 
the  dependence  of  functions  in  a  manner  analogous  to  that 
which  we  have  employed  to  determine  the  co -existence  of 
linear  equations. 


55 


CHAPTER    III. 


FUNCTIONAL  DETERMINANTS. 


36.  As  this  subject  is  supposed  to  present  some  difficulties, 
and  is  of  the  highest  interest  in  connection  with  geometrical 
researches,  we  shall  seek  in  the  first  place  to  exhibit  some 
of  its  principles  in  a  very  elementary  form,  and  then  proceed 
to  show  the  field  of  application. 

Suppose  we  have  a  series  of  functions  v^,  V2  ...  v,,  of  as  many 
variables  aji,  x^  ...  ot^^  and  by  virtue  of  the  relationship  of  these 
functions  we  are  enabled  to  find 

f(viV.i  ...  Vn)  =  0, 

in  other  words,  that  they  are  connected  by  an  equation  which 
vanishes  identically.  This  relationship  is  expressible  as 
a  determinant*  (Art.  35) 

dvi    dvi  dvi      _  r. 


dxi 

dx2 

dx, 

dv2 
dxi 

dv-j, 
dx2 

dv. 
••■   dx. 

dvn 

dv,. 

dv, 

dxi 

dx-i 

dx, 

Then  we  say  -^i,  v^  ...  v^  are 

To  fix  our  thoughts  by  an  illustration,  suppose 

Vi  =  x  +  2ij-{-z, 

V2  =  x—2y  +  Sz, 

V3  =z  2x1)  —xz  +  4iyz  —  2z^f 


*  On  this  subject,  see  Jacobi,  Crelle,  Vol.  22. 
Vol.  51.     Pierce's  Analytical  Mechanics. 


Spottiswoode,    Crelle^ 


66 

then 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 

0 


dvi 
dx 

dvi 
dy 

dvi 

dz 

dv2 
dx 

dv2 
dy 

dv2 
dz 

dv^ 

.dx 

dvs 
dy 

dvs 

dz 

becomes       xy 


2 
-2 


2y—z     2x  +  4iz     ~-x+4iy  —  4iZ 

reducing,  we  find 

^4,(^^x  +  4^y-4^z)  +  8(2y-z)-2(2x+4z)  =  0, 

wMcb,  vanisHng  identically,  sliows  the  functions  Vi,  ^2,  v-^  to  be 
dependent. 

37.  Let  us  suppose  the  connecting  equation  to  be 

If  now  we  differentiate  this  equation  in  respect  to  any  one  of 
the  functions  Vi,  v^  ..-  v,,  under  consideration,  regarded  as 
functions  of  the  variables  ajj,  X2 . .  aj„,  we  must  have,  in  general,* 

dF_dFdxidFdx2  ^     ^n. 

dvr       dxi     dvr       dx2     dVr    '    ' '  dxn     dv^ ' 

when  F  =  Vr  the  left  member  of  this  equation  =  1.  And,  in 
general,  if  we  replace  F  by  v„  we  shall  have,  when  s  =  r, 


1  = 


dv. 


dxj   .  dVg     dx^ 


dxi     dv^      dx2     dvg 


dv, 
dx,, 


If,  however,  s  is  not  equal  to  r,  we  must  have 
0 


_  dvj^     dxi      dVg 
dxi     dVr      dx2 


dx2 
dvy 


dvs 
dx„ 


dx_„ 
dv. 


dx^ 

dVr 


(!)• 


(2). 


*  Jacobi  in  Crelle,  Vol.  22. 


ELEMENTARY  DETERMINANTS. 

In  the  same  manner, 

dXr       dVi      ,  dXr       dVn  _  ^ 

dVi  '   dXr  dVn       dXr 

dxr      dvi    ,  dXr      dVn Q 

dvi     dxg  dVn     dxg 


57 

(3), 
(4). 


By  means  of  (1),   (2),   (3),   (4),  we  are  enabled  to  solve  a 
system  of  equations  analogous  to  the  following : — 


dv 


dv 


Vdx'^'^'dx, 
dvi  ,  dvi 
dx  dxi 


dVn  I       dVn 

dx       ^  dxi 


y> 


dv 

dXn 

dvi 

dXn 


dx^ 


(5). 


If  we  multiply  these  equations  by 

dx     da;  dx     o       n 

,     ,    (KC.  &c., 

dv     dvi  dVn 

and  add,  we  shall  have,  by  virtue  of  (3)  and  (4), 

dx 


dx   ,        dx 
dv  dVi 


dxi  . 


dxi 
dvi 

CiX„     ,  UXn 

dv  dvi 


dv^ 
dxi 
dv^ 

,  dx^ 

dVn 


(6). 


It  is  evident  that,  if  the  given  functions  v  ...  v^  are  in- 
dependent, and  y  =  .yi  =  y,,  =  0,  then  t^  =  %  =  it„  =  0;  or,  in 
other  words,  if  the  given  functions  are  independent,  then  (5) 
and  (6)  reduce  in  turn  to  0. 

38.  The  question  now  arises,  how  shall  we  express  the 
solution  of  such  systems  as  the  above  in  the  ordinary  language 


58 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


of  determinants  P  If  we  examine  the  solution  of  system  (5) 
of  the  preceding  Art.,  we  shall  see  that  what  might  be 
denominated  the  modulus  of  transformation  is  the  determinant 


A  = 

dv     dv 

dx  '  dx^ 

dv 
dx,. 

dvi     dvi 

dx      dx-i 

dvi 

dx,, 

dVn     dv,, 
dx      dxi 

dVn 
dXn 

or 

^dx     ^  dx^ 

dv          dv 

A  dx„ 

^Tv 

=  A», 

dvi         dvi 

A^* 

dvi 

•••          •• • 

.   dx       .  dxi 
dv^         dv,, 

^dx„ 

dVn 

since,  manifestly,  writing 

dx      dx 
dv  '  dvi 

dx 

dVn 

=  A', 

dxn     dx^ 
dv      dvi 

dx, 

dVn 

we  must  have 

AXA'  = 

1     ... 

(!)• 


Hence  the  notation  to  be  adopted,  which  is  all  that  is  required, 
is  sufficiently  evident.     If  now  we  differentiate  A'  in  respect 

to  any  one  of  its  constituents,  as  --^,  we  shall  have  — 7—=^  ; 

dvj.  ,  dXi 

dvj, 
but,  in  consequence  of  (1),  we  are  enabled  to  write  A  =  A'-—-* 


7  dxi  dxi 

d—- 


ELEMENTAKY  -DETERMINANTS. 

where  ^4=  the  corresponding  minor,  and  therefore 

A' 

dvk 
In  the  same  manner,  in  general, 

dA         .  dxv  ,1       o          dA!       dA         dv^     dxj 

— —  =  A  —\  therefore     —--  .  -— -  =  — ~*  .  -,^ 

ndVi           dVi  jdXi     jdVi       dXi     avi 

d-—^              *  d     ^     d—- 

dxj,  dVk        dxk 


The  same  course   of  reasoning  may  be  applied  to  the  con- 
necting equations.     That  is,  if 

/.  =  o /,.=  o 

connect  the  variables  Xi,  x^...  x,,  with  Vi,  I'a . . .  v,, ;  then,  inversely, 
if  we  find  from  /^  =  0,  &c.,  the  values  of  Vi,  %  . . .  v^^  and 
substitute  these  in  the  same  equations,  these  will  vanish 
identically;  or,  since  we  may  eliminate  n—\  of  the  variables 
from  these  equations,  each  may  be  treated  as  the  function  of 
a  single  variable  and  the  given  functions ;  therefore 

dfk     dvi       dfk     dv2  dfk     dv,^ df\ 

dvi  '  dXk       dV'i  '  dXk  dv^  '  dxj,       dx^ 

If  A;  =  1,  2  ...  w,  we  shall  obtain  n  equations,  from  which, 
eliminating  the  differentials,  a  linear  partial  differential 
equation  will  arise,  which  shall  be  satisfied  by  the  primitive 
equation  under  consideration,  as  f^  =  0. 

Proceeding  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  for  obtaining  (1), 
we  write,  finally, 

\      dvi  dv2  dVnl  \      dxi  dx^  dx,,/' 

The  general  application  of  these  principles  to  the  trans- 


60  ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

formation  of  multiple  integrals,  as 

I    VdvidVi dv„, 

where  tlie  functions  Vi  ...  Vn  are  connected  with  the  same  num- 
ber of  other  variables  Xi  ...  x^  by  equations  similar  to  those 
assumed  above,  will  not  be  considered. 

It  may,  however,  be  remarked  that,  in  transforming  from 
one  set  of  variables  to  another,  the  formula  of  transforma- 
tion 

dx^ 


Ydvi dvr, 

dxi        '    dx„  ' 

dxi 

reduces  at  once  to 

•n 

Ydv^.. 

•n 

. . . .  dvn  =      V.A  dxy  . 

• 

....<&„, 

•n 

and                   Vdxi.. 

• 

•n 

. . . .  dxn  =      V.  A'  dvi  . 

• 

dv^^. 

On  this  subject,  see  Baltzer,  p.  64. 

39.  The  Jacohian. — The  determinant  already  considered, 


dU, 
dxi 

dU, 

dXn 

dUr, 

dU^ 

dxi 

'"    dx. 

which,  after  Jacobi,  is  called  the  Jacobian,  and  generally  de- 
noted by  /,  has  received  considerable  attention  in  the  theory 
of  elimination.  The  principal  proposition  is  that,  if  a  system 
of  homogeneous  equations  be  satisfied  by  a  set  of  values,  these 
values  will  satisfy  both  the  Jacobian  and  its  differential  in 
regard  to  all  the  variables. 

Let  us  take  a  system  of  three  equations 

Ui  =  0,     1*2  =  0,     1^3  =  0 ; 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

/  will  then  be  written 

/Ini.         rill-         rltt^ 


01 


dui     dui     dui 
dx      dy      dz 


du^     du^     du^ 
dx      dy       dz 

and  let  us  assume,  what  is  not  difficult  to  prove,  that 

dui   .       dui   ,       dui 
ax  dy  dz 


du2 
dx 

diu 


+  2/ 


du^ 
dy 


,       du2 
dz 


dx  dy  dz 

Solving  for  x,  we  have.  Art.  12, 

(1)  Aa;  =  Z7i  awi  +  Z/a  ai*2  +  TJ^  au^, 

where  Z7i,  ZJg,  &c.  =  the  minors.    We  see  here  that,  if  Wi,  %>  "^3 
vanish,  the  determinant  vanishes. 

Differentiating  (1)  in  respect  to  x  and  ?/, 


(2) 


.,     dA  dUi  ,         dU2   ,         dUs 

ax  dx  dx  dx 


\dx  ax  dx       J 


(3) 


dA  dUi  ^        dU2   1  dU^ 

dy  dy  dy  dy 


\dv  dv  dv       I 


dy 


But  the  first  parenthesis  =  A,  Art.  12,  and  the  second  paren- 
thesis =  0. 


62 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


Again,    introducing   the   supposition  Ui  =  U2  =  U3=z  0,  we 

dA  dA 

see  that    —  and  —  must  vanish,  since  (2)  and  (3)   in  this 

case,  in  consequence  of  (1),  reduce  to  0. 

The  application  of  this  principle  is  obvious ;   for  if  we  have 
three  equations   homogeneous  in  the   second  degree,  their  / 
will  be  of  the  third,  and  each  of  its  differentials  of  the  second,'^ 
and  these  three  new  equations  will  be  satisfied  by  the  values- 
common  to  the  given  equations.     We  have  then 

wj  =  0,     —  =0, 


u.^  =.  0, 


dA 


A  ^-^  A 


z 


to  eliminate  .t^,  y"^,  z^,  xy,  zy,  xz ;  and  therefore  the   ellminant^ 
that  is,  the  eliminating  determinant,  can  be  formed. 

When  the  given  equations  are  of  the  third  degree  homo- 
geneous, /  is  of  the  sixth,  its  differentials  of  the  fifth ;  and  by 
using  Sylvester's  dialytic  process,  we  can  eliminate  the  twenty- 
one  quantities  of  an  equation  of  the  fifth  degree. 

40.  The  Hessian. — We  will  now  show  how  to  form  this  im-^ 
portant  determinant.  Let  V  be  any  homogeneous  function  of 
71  variables,  analogous  to  (a,  Z/,  c,  d'^x,  yY,  and,  taking  its 
second  differential  coefficients  in  respect  to  each  of  the  variables^ 
we  write,  for  the  special  case. 


H 


ax  +  hy     hx  +  cy 
hx  +  cy      cx-\'  dy 


This  is  called  the   Hessian,  after  the  late  Dr.  Otto  Hesse,  of 
Munich. 

The  degree  of  the   determinant    will  be   w(jd  — 2),    where 
2)  =  the  degree  of  the  function,  and  n  the  number  of  variables^ 


ELEMENTARY  DETERMINANTS.  G3 

If  we  connect  the  variables  x  and  y  witli  two  others  u  and  z 

by  the  equations  x  =  eu  -{-fz, 

y  =  e^u+fiz, 

calling  the  transformed  function  F',  and  taking  its  second  dif- 
ferentials, and  indicating  the  Hessian  thus  formed  by  H'  we 

may  write  H'  =  Hx  A^, 

where  A  =     e    f 

^1  /i 

In  orthogonal  substitutions,  A^  =  I,  and  11=  H\ 
Hesse  has  shown,  in  the  use  of  this  theorem,  that  if  V=  0 
be  an  equation  to  a  plane  curve  of  the  nth.  order,  the  vanish- 
ing of  the  Hessian  indicates  the  condition  by  which  the  curve 
reduces  to  a  pencil  of  n  right  lines ;  and  in  like  manner,  if 
V=  0  be  an  equation  to  a  surface,  this  surface  reduces  to  a 
cone  when  H  vanishes.* 

*  Crelle,  vol.  42,  p.  123. 


04 


CHAPTER  IV. 

SOME    APPLICATIONS. 

41.  In  proceeding  to  the  common  applications  of  what  has 
been  explained,  it  will  be  necessary  to  introduce  some  of  the 
terms  of  higher  algebra ;  thus, 

(a,  h,  cjo;,  yY 

is  called  a  binary  quadratic,  which,  written  fully,  is  simply 

ax^  +  2hx7j  +  cy'^, 

and  since  it  is  a  homogeneous  function  it  is  called  also  a 
quantic.  If  any  quantic  is  to  be  considered  apart  from  nu- 
merical coefficients,  it  is  written 

(a,  h,  c'^x,  yy. 
Let  us  now  take  the  first  "expression,  and  linearly  trans- 
form it,  substituting        x  =  Ix  -j-my, 
y  =  l'x  +  m'y, 
and  we  shall  have  Ax"^  +  2Bxy  +  Cy^ 

as  the  transformed  function.  If,  now,  we  compare  the  Hessian 
of  the  given  and  the  transformed  expression,  we  shall  find  the 
relation  given  in  the  last  Art.  to  be  true,  viz., 

or,  in  full,  AC-B'  =  (ac-b')  (Im-  I'my. 

Now  H  and  H'  are  called  respectively  the  discriminants  of  the 
given  and  transformed  quadratic. 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


65 


42.  When  a  qnantic  has  been  transformed  as  above,  any 
function  of  its  coefficients  is  called  an  invariant.  Hence  ac—b^ 
is  also,  by  definition,  an  invariant ;  and,  in  general,  a  quantic 
of  the  quadratic  class,  irrespective  of  its  variables,  has  no 
other  invariant  than  its  own  discriminant,  and  in  such  cases 
the  two  terms  indicate  identical  functions.  Now,  when  we 
take  the  Hessian  of  any  quantic,  or  what  is  sometimes  called 
the  second  emanant,  we  obtain  the  covariant  of  the  quantic, 
that  is,  a  function  of  the  coefficients  involving  the  variables  of 
the  given  quantic. 

43.  Study  first. — Let  us  write  the  quadric  surface 

ax^  +  hy^  +  cz^  +  2exy  +  2fxz  -f  2hyz  -\-2gx-{-2iy  +  2hz-^d  =  0  ; 

the  discriminant  will  then  be 

a  e  f  g     =0 (1), 

e  b  h  i 

f  h  c  h 

g  i  k  d 

which  may  be  formed  in  the  manner  already  described,  or  we 
may  transform  to  any  parallel  a^es  drawn  through  xy'z'  by 
writing  x  +  x'  for  x,  &c.,  and  we  shall  find  certain  relations 
connecting  the  coefficients  a,  b,  &c.  with  a,  b',  &c. ;  in  other 
words,  that  there  are  functions  of  the  given  coefficients  equal 
to  the  same  functions  of  the  transformed  coefficients. 

By  taking  the  difierentials  in  respect  to  each  of  the  variables, 
we  shall  find  the  new  coefficient  of  x  to  be 

2(ax-{-ey-^fz+g), 

and  the  condition  that  this  general  equation  shall  represent  a 
cone  will  be  the  determinant  of  the  following  equations. 


ax  +  ey'  -\- fz  +  g  =  0 
ex  -\- by  -\- hz  -\- i  =0 
fx  -{•  hy  -{- cz  -\- h  =  0 
gx  +  iy  -\-hz  ■\-d=.  0  ^ 


(2). 


65 


ELEMENTARY    DETERMINANTS. 


The  determinant  of  whicli  is  the  same  as  (1)  ;  the  coordinates 
of  the  new  vertex  satisfying  each  of  the  above  equations. 

Forming  now  the  first  minors  of  this  determinant,  we  have 


h  h  i 

—  e 

h  i   e 

+  f 

i   e  h 

-9 

e  h  h 

h  c    k 

0  k  f 

k  f  h 

f  h  c 

i   k  d 

k  d  g 

d  g  i 

g  i   k 

and  the  second  minors 

ah  \  c   k      -{-ah 
I  k  d 


k  h 

d  i 


+  ai 


h  c 
i   k 


&c. 


Considering  the  first  and  second  minors,  we  see  that 


I  h  i 

h  c  k 
i   k  d 

Xh  = 

h   i 
i    d 

X 

h  h 
h  c 

h  h 
i   k 

since 


b  h  i 
h  c  k 
i   k  d 


X   h  +  hH''-  hH'  =  (hc-li')  {bd^i")  -  (hk-hiy  ; 


and  we  shall  find,  in  general,  that  any  first  minor,  multiplied 
by  a  constituent,  is  expressible  in  terms  of  the  second  minors, 
formed  from  this  first  minor. 

Thus  we  shall  find  E ;  i.  e.,  second  first  minor,  or 

hie      X  c  +fhk'^  —fMc^ 
c  kf 
k  d  g 

Also  A^  or 


=     ef 

c   k 

— 

h  c 

. 

/" 

h  c 

k  d 

i   k 

yk 

h     h     i 

.  d  = 

c    k 

. 

h  I 

— 

h  k  1 

h  c   k 

k  d 

i   d 

i   d\ 

i  k  d 

(3), 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


67 


and 


e 

c  kf 
k  d  g 


.  d  +  *  —  *  = 


e  g 

. 

c  k 

— 

h  k 

.     /^ 

I  d 

k  d 

i   d 

g  d 

If,  now,  A  and  ^  =  0,  (4)  becomes 


h  k 

. 

/^ 

= 

e 

1 

, 

c  k 

i  d 

g  d 

i  d 

k  d 

and  (3)  reduces  to 

c   k 

.     b  i 

h  k 

1 

k  d 

i 

d 

i   d 

.  fk 

= 

e  g 

. 

h  k 

g  d 

i  d 

i  d 

(4). 


h  i 

fh  - 

e  g 

, 

h  k 

i  d 

g  d 

i  d 

I  d 

And  these,  multiplied  together,  give 

I  b  i 
I  i   d 

but  minor  F^  i.  e., 

e  b  i      .c24-*  —  *  = 
f  hk 
g  i    d 

hence,  on  the  supposition  that  J.  =  ^  =  0,  we  have  F  =0. 
Continuing  our  analysis,  we  find  that,  when  ^  =  0  =  J^,  or 

^  =  i^=0,  wehave  A  =  0.* 

In  general,  we  write  the  following,  analogous  to  (2)  and  (3), 

dA      d^^     d'^ 


da  db     da  dd 


/  d'A  y 

XdadiJ  * 


d^A        d'A 


d'A       d'A 


da 

dA  _ 

de        dd  de     da  db       da  di     db  dg 

d_A  ^  _^  ^    d'A_  _   d^  ^    d'A 
df        dd  df     da  dc       da  dk     dc  dg 


*  For  an  extension  of  the  geometrical  applications,  herein  considered, 
to  tangential  coordinates,  and  the  determination  of  circular  sections,  see 
Philosophical  May.,  vol.  xiv.,  4th  series,  p.  393. 


68 
Assume 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


eE-fF-\-gG  =  0 
hE-cF  +  W  =  0 
iE  -JcF+dG  =  0 


(5), 


which  gives  the  determinant  for  the  elimination  of  G  and  F^ 


e  -/  9 
h  — c  k 
i    —k    d 


F  =  F.E=0;  i.e.,  F=0; 


therefore  F=0  and  G  =  0. 

By  equations  similar  to  (5),  as 

aA-\-fF-gG  =  0, 

&c.         &c., 

we  may  show  that  AB  =  0,  from  which  it  follows  that,  if  5  =  0, 
H=I=0',  or,  when  A  =  0,  F  =  G  =  0. 

It  can  be  shown  that  equations  (5)  are  true  when  A  =  0 
and  ^  =  0  in  all  cases. 

Let  us  now,  in  view  of  these  suppositions  and  results,  con- 
sider the  nature  of  the  surface  given  at  the  head  of  this  Article. 


Suppose 


(fA 
da  dd 


0, 


dbdd 


=  0,    and 


dcdd 


=  0, 


and  consequently 


d'A 
dddh 


0  ;   and  suppose  also  a  to  be  nega- 


tive ;  then,  multiplying  the  surface  by  a,  subtract  {ey  -^fz  +  gY, 
and  finally  let  ax  =  ax-{-  ey  +fz  +  g,  and  we  shall  have 


dc  di  db  dk 


z-\- 


d'A 
db  dc 


=  0, 


an  equation  to  a  parabolic  cylinder. 

The  three  latter  suppositions  applied  to  the  surface  reduce 
it  to 

dc  dd 


a^^-  +  -^4^^f  +  2[ 


dddh         dcdil  dbdd 


db  dk         db  dc 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS.  69 

(Pa 

This  equation,  multiplied  by  ,    adding  and   subtracting 

CiC  CtCu 

{^Jh^-^idS^    and  finally  making 

d'A     ,^    d'A        ^     d?A  ^  ^    d?A 
dc  dd  do  dd  dd  dh         dc  di* 

we  obtain 

If,  now,  we  multiply  this  by   — ,  add  and  subtract   *  (  tt  )  » 

J       ,    dA       n       dA      ,   dA  1 

and  put   -~  z    tor  --  25  +  — - ,  we  nave 

dd  dd  dh 

2  d'^A    dA    ,2  ,   /  d'^A  y  dA    ,2  ,      fdA^  ,2  ,        ^'A    .        ^ 


dcdd  dd 

which  is  the  equation  to  an  ellipsoid  when  A  is  negative,  and 

dA      d'A     ,    ,,         ... 
—7,    -, — r-,  both  positive. 
da      dc  ad 

When  A  is  positive,  and  ^-,  — — -  either  one  or  both  negative, 
^  dd    dc  dd 

this  equation  represents  a  hyperholoid  of  one  sheet.     If  A  be 

negative  it  represents  a  hyperholoid  of  tivo  sheets^  if  it  vanishes 

a  cone.     Also,  if  -7-,  =  0,  it  is  the  equation  to  an  ellijptic  or 
dd 

d^A 

hyperbolic  paraboloid,  according  as  ^^-^  is  positive  or  negative. 

In  the  same  manner  it  represents  an  elliptic  or  hyperbolic  cylinder 

when    4^  =  ^  =  0,  and   -f|.  is  positive  or  negative. 
dd        dk  dc  dd 

To  find  the  plane  perpendicular  to  the  chord  to  which  it  is 
conjugate;  i.e.,  the  diametral  plane. 


70 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


Let  Ij  m,  n  be  the  direction  cosines  of  the  chord,  the  plane 
in  question  will  be,  from  equations  (1), 

l{ax-\-ey -\-fz-{-g)  -\-m{ex-\-'by -\-hz-\-i)  +n{fx-{-hij -)rcz  +  lc)  =  0, 

provided   Z,  m,  n  are  proportional  to  the  coefficients  of  thfe 
variables  x,  y^  z ;  and  we  shall  have,  in  that  case, 

^  la  +  7ne-[-nf  =pl  ^ 

•  U-\-7nb-jrnh=  2'>in> (6); 

Ic  -h  mh  -\-nc  =  pn  ) 

therefore,  to  find  p,  we  have  the  determinant 


a—p  e  f 
e  b—p  h 
c         h     c—p 


The  value  of  p  being  found  and  substituted  in  equations  (6), 
we  shall  obtain  the  values  of  I,  m,  »i,  and  thus  be  able  to  find 
the  three  diametral  planes  of  the  surface. 

We  conclude  this  study  with  the  simple  remark  that  we  are 
not  here  concerned  with  teaching  Modern  Geometry,  but  with 
an  exercise  for  the  practice  of  Determinants,  and  to  indicate 
their  use  in  the  investigation  of  loci. 

44.  The  Jacobian,  which  has  already  been  described,  de- 
serves, on  account  of  its  importance,  a  special  consideration. 

Study  second. — (a)  Let  V  and  Vi  be  two  functions,  homo- 
geneous in  the  second  degree,  /  is  then 

=  0, 


dV 

dV 

dx 

dy 

dV, 

dV, 

dx 

dy 

which,  under  the  conditions  mentioned,  determines  the  foci  of 
involution  of  two  pairs  of  points. 


ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 


71 


(5)  Let  8i  =  0,  S'2  =  0,  /S3  =  0  be  three  circles,  and  w  =  0  the 
equation  to  the  circle  orthotomic.  The  polar  of  any  point  on 
u  (^?/;3),  with  regard  to  each  of  the  given  circles,  will  pass 
through  a  single  point.  Let  zt^,  U2,  %,  &c.  represent  the  dif- 
ferentials -7-,  &c.,  then 
da: 

lui  -\-mu2  +WW3  =  0, 
Ivi  -\-mV2,  -\-nVi  =  0, 
Iwi  +  mwa  +  nw^  =  0. 

The  determinant  of  which  is  a  Jacobian  and  =  u,  the  equa- 
tion of  the  circle  orthotomic  required. 

(c)  If  we  proceed  to  the  conicoids,  as  F,  Fi,  F2,   the  equa- 
tions of  the  three  polars  will  be 

v^x  +  v;'y  +  v;"z  =  0; 


therefore 


=  /, 


dr  dv"  dv" 

dx  dy  dz 

dY[  dV^  dVT 

dx  dy  dz 

dv;  dv;  dv;' 

dx  f*'i  dz 


and  is  a  curve  of  the  third  order,  in  other  words,  the  locus  of 
a  point  whose  polars,  in  regard  to  F,  Fi,  F2,  meet  in  a  point. 

{db)  It  is  easily  shown  that  two  conies  always  intersect  in 
four  points. 

Let  Fand  Ft  intersect,  and  through  these  points  draw  F2. 
Then  the  /  of  the  three  conies  is  the  equation  to  the  curve 
which  cuts  F2  in  six  'points. 

(e)  If  we  form  the  Hessian  of  lV-\-mVx-^nVi\  then,  if  we 


72  ELEMENTARY   DETERMINANTS. 

examine  the  coefficients  of  I,  m,  n,  we  shall  find  them  invariants 
of  F,  Fi,  F2,  one  of  which  vanishes  whenever  ZF+mFiH-wF2 
represents  two  planes  ;  the  other  vanishes  (as  shown  by  Prof. 
Cayley)  when  any  two  of  the  eight  points  of  intersection  co- 
incide, and  their  /  is  a  curve  of  the  sixth  order,  when  F,  Fi,  V2 
represent  quadrics,  and  this  curve  is  the  locus  of  a  point  whose 
polar  planes  meet  in  a  line. 


London!  Printed  by  C.  F.  Hodgson  &  Son,  Gough  tqiiare,  Fleet  Street,  E.C. 


i 


^^4^/-^  ^^ct^ct:^^^ 


%: 


MATHEMATICAL  TRACTS. 


isv..  n. 
TRILINEAR    COORDINATF^. 


I 


TEACTS 


RELATING    TO    THE 


MODERN  HIGHER  MATHEMATICS. 


TRACT  No.  2. 
TRILINEAR    COORDINATES. 


BT 

Eev.  W.  J.  WEIGHT,  Ph.D., 

MEMBER   OF  THK  LONDON  MATHEMATICAL  SOCIETY. 


'E06Aa>  aoi  flirelv  Sxrirep  ol  yeufxerpai.'* 

'     Plato  :  Gorgias. 


LONDON : 
C.  F.  HODGSON  &  SON,  GOUGH  SQUARE, 

FLEET   STREET* 
1877. 


My  acknowledgments  are  due  to  R.  Tucker,  Esq.,  M.A.,  Honorary 
Secretary  of  the  London  Mathematical  Society,  for  valuable  assistance 
rendered  in  passing  these  sheets  through  the  press. — W.  J.  W. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I.  Page 

Condition  of  Concurrence 9 

„             Parallelism 10 

„            collinearity 14 

„             Perpendicularity 16 

Straight  Line  THROUGH  A  Given  Point 20 

Distance  between  Two  Points      ...  22 

Perpendicular  Distance  of  A  Point  FROM  A  Line         24 

CHAPTER  n. 

Tangential  Equation  to  Intersection  of  Two  Right  Lines    ...  29 

Tangential  Equation  to  Point  at  Infinity     30 

Triangular  Coordinates      ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  31 

Excursus  on  Imaginaries 37 

CHAPTER  III. 

Transformations  of  Coordinates  ... ...  42 

Concurrence  of  Straight  Line  and  Conic        44 

Excursus          45 

Self-Conjugate  Triangle 48 

Directed  Line  upon  the  Curve    ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  49 

Inscribed  Triangle 54 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Inscribed  Conic         59^ 

Brianchon's  Theorem           61 

Polar  of  a  Point  in  respect  to  a  Conic          64 

Coordinates  of  Pole            ...         ...         ...         ...         ...         ...  65 

Conic  breaks  up  into  Eight  Lines          67 

Equation  to  the  Asymptotes          68 

Nene-Point  Circle     71 

Polar  Reciprocals 74 

Reciprocal  of  a  Conic         76 


PREFACE  TO  TRACT  NO.  II. 


Ministerial  and  other  duties  have  prevented  the  earlier 
appearance  of  this  Tract.  The  delay  has  afforded  an 
opportunity  to  those  persons  who  have  become  acquainted 
with  the  proposed  plan  of  this  Series  of  expressing  their 
opinion  upon  the  merits  of  such  an  undertaking. 

A  considerable  number  of  Professors  and  Amateurs 
have  been  pleased  to  signify  their  approval  of  this  effort, 
and  to  give  me  more  than  deserved  commendations.  I 
have  no  object  in  referring  to  this,  except  so  far  as  to 
certify  that  the  purpose  in  view  is  a  good  one,  and  that 
the  means  adopted,  while  novel,  are  likely  to  prove  in  a 
fair  measure  successful.  I  take  this  opportunity  of  again 
urging  upon  those  to  whom  these  Tracts  may  come  the 
great  importance  of  the  study  of  the  Modern  Mathe- 
matics, not  only  in  their  various  subjects  as  educative 
instruments,  but  also  as  the  best  media  of  investigation. 
The  extent  and  value  of  the  new  methods,  together  with 
the  duties  of  those  capable  of  teaching  them,  are  happily 
expressed  in  a  letter  to  me  from  M.  Hermite,  dated  Paris, 
October  28,  1876,  who  will  probably  pardon  the  liberty  I 
take  with  his  communication,  on  the  ground  that  the  fol- 
lowing extract  is  of  public  importance : — 


IV  PREFACE. 

^^  Les  vues  exposees  par  vous,  Monsieur,  dans  la  pre- 
face de  cet  ouvrage  [Tract  No.  I.]  sur  les  obligations 
qu^imposent  a  I'enseignement  les  grands  progres  de  la 
science  de  notre  temps,  je  les  adopte  pleinement,  et, 
autant  qu'il  m'a  etc  possible,  j'ai  essay e  de  m'y  con- 
former  dans  mon  Cours  d' Analyse  de  PEcole  Poly  tech- 
nique. Une  grande  transformation  s'est  deja  faite  et 
continue  encore  de  se  faire  dans  le  domaine  de  F Analyse ; 
des  voies  nouvelles  plus  fecondes  et  je  crois  aussi  plus 
faciles  ont  ete  ouvertes,  et  c'est  Toeuvre  de  ceux  qui 
veulent  servir  la  science  et  leur  pays  de  discern er  ce 
que  les  elements  peuvent  recevoir  de  Pimmense  ela- 
boration qui  s'est  accomplie  depuis  Gauss  jusqu'a  Kie- 
mann.*' 

I  am  also  indebted  to  Prof.  Benj.  Peirce,  of  Harvard, 
for  a  communication  in  reference  to  tlie  form  of  Laplace's 
equation  for  secular  perturbations,  referred  to  on  p.  41  of 
Tract  No.  I. 

Without  detracting  from  the  value  of  the  Ancient  Geo- 
metry, it  is  believed  that  a  considerable  portion  might 
be  omitted,  if  necessary,  to  give  place  to  the  Modern, 
and  that  our  regular  college  curriculum  would  be  greatly 
enriched  by  such  substitution. 

In  any  event,  I  hold  it  to  be  the  duty  of  every  teacher 
of  Geometry,  whether  in  the  form  of  analysis  or  synthesis, 
to  incorporate  in  his  instructions  large  masses  of  the  New 
Geometry,  unless,  indeed,  there  happens  to  be  a  Chair 
devoted  to  this  especial  science. 

In  presenting  Trilinear  Coordinates,  it  is  not  proposed 
to  supersede  the  Cartesian,  nor  even  to  regard  them  as 
inseparable  from  them ;  but  to  show  (as  Dr.  Salmon  has 


PREFACE.  V 

shown)  the  peculiar  province  and  power  of  each.  In  this 
Tract  it  has  not  been  thought  necessary  to  advance  far 
in  this  comparison.  The  student  will  quickly  see  where 
he  can  most  advantageously  employ  the  one  or  the  other, 
'„or,  leaving  both^  press  into  his  service  the  Triangular  or 
Tangential  Coordinates, 

All  that  could  be  attempted  in  a  work  of  this  size  is 
to  give  a  syllabus  of  the  more  common  equational  forms, 
and  to  exhibit,  in  as  simple  a  manner  as  possible,  their 
genesis. 

There  are  other  systems  of  Coordinates  which  space  did 
not  allow  me  to  exhibit ;  the  quadrilinearj  which  involves 
four  straight  lines  as  lines  of  reference,  is  one  of  some 
importance. 

Another  form  of  Coordinates  I  will  just  mention,  the 
'description  of  which  has  been  communicated  to  me  by 
Rev.  Thos.  Hill,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  late  President  of  Harvard. 
These  Coordinates  consist  in  defining  a  curve  by  express- 
ing the  length  of  a  perpendicular  let  fall  from  the  origin 
■upon  a  normal  as  the  function  of  its  direction.  Thus,  if 
6  represent  the  angle  contained  by  the  perpendicular  and 
the  axis  of  X,  then  p  =f{d).  These  are  known  in  this 
/orm  as  Watson's  Coordinates.  Dr.  Hill  has  modified 
[this  system,  and  succeeded  in  achieving  some  very  in- 
teresting results.  (See  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  1873 — 75.) 

For  my  first  interest  in  the  subject  of  this  Tract  I  am 
indebted  to  a  paper  read  before  the  Royal  Society  of 
Edinburgh  in  1865,  and  pubHshed  in  the  Messenger  of 
Mathematics  of  the  year  following,  the  author  of  which. 
Rev.  Hugh  Martin,  D.D.,  has  exhibited  in  that  paper 


VI  PEEPACE. 

mucli  of  the  power  and  originality  whicli  characterise  his 
well-known  treatise  upon  "  The  Atonement.^' 

It  may  be  said,  however,  that  works  upon  Modern 
Geometry  do  in  general  suggest  the  treatment  of  their 
subjects  by  the  method  of  Trilinear  Coordinates.  They 
do,  indeed,  suggest  far  more  than  has  been  attempted 
here.  In  the  works  of  Mulcahy,  Townsend,  Salmon, 
Ferrers,  Whitworth,  the  recent  volumes  of  Dr.  Booth, 
Carnot,  Steiner,  Serret,  Eouche  and  Comberousse, 
Bobillier,  Cremona,  Briot  and  Bouquet,  Chasles, 
together  with  the  journals  Annali  di  Matematica 
jpura  ed  applicata  (of  which  Cremona  is  co-editor), 
Comptes  Bendus  des  Seances,  that  of  Crelle  and  Bor- 
chardt,  Nouvelles  Annales  de  MatJiematiques,  may  be 
found  much  that  leads  to,  and  much  more  that  leads 
beyond,  that  which  now  follows. 

Books,  at  best,  are  but  poor  substitutes  for  the  living 
teacher.  Under  familiar,  oral  teaching  the  difficulties 
which  otherwise  too  frequently  envelope  the  student 
rapidly  disappear.  Hence  I  would  again  emphasize  the 
importance  of  admitting  these  subjects  to  our  colleges  as 
parts  of  the  regular  course. 

Since  the  publication  of  Tract  No.  I.,  the  heads  of  two 
of  our  leading  Universities  have  made  haste  to  inform  me 
that  some  parts  of  the  Modern  Mathematics  I  am  endea- 
vouring to  enforce  and  popularise  are  taught  in  their  col- 
leges. I  profoundly  wish  that  these  exceptions  were  made 
the  rule. 

W.  J.  W. 

Chambersbtjrg,  Pa.;  1877. 


TRILINEAR  COORDINATES. 


CHAPTER   I. 

FUNDAMENTAL  EQUATIONS. 

1.  The   fundamental   equation  of  tlie  straight  line  in  Tri- 

linear  Coordinates  is 

la  +  mfj  +  ny  =  0.  ^ 

2.  The  apparatus  for  expressing  this  conception  consists  of 
a  triangle  of  reference,  whose  sides  are  called  the  three  lines 
of  reference. 

3.  The  angular  points  of  this  triangle  are  indicated  by  A  at 
the  vertex,  B  at  the  left,  and  G  at  the  right ;  the  lengths  of 
the  sides  opposite  these  angles  by  a,  h,  c ;  and  the  perpen- 
dicular distances  of  any  point  from  BG,  GA,  AB  by  a,  /3,  y. 

The  distance  a  may  be  described  as  reckoned  downward  or 
upward  from  the  given  point,  /3  to  the  right,  and  y  to  the 
left. 

4.  We  may  say,  in  general ,  that  the  position  of  a  point  in  a 
plane  is  known  implicitly  when  its  perpendicular  distances 
from  any  two  sides  of  the  proposed  triangle  are  given.  Its 
perpendicular  distance  from  the  third  side  is  then  given  by 
these  data,  for  manifestly 

2A-(/36  +  cy)_ 

u, 

a 
where  A  =  area  of  given  triangle. 


8  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

6.  By  attention  to  tlie  figure,  which  scarcely  need  be  drawn, 
We  are  clearly  presented  with  the  equation 

aa  +  6/3-l-cy  =  2A  (1), 

which  is  found  by  taking  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  three 
triangles  APG,  APB,  BPG,   %  %  '^  respectively. 

Z  ^  ii 

Observing  that     -—  =  r  sin  J.,    77  =  '*  sin  B,    ^  =  r  sin  (7, 

z  z  z 

(1)  may  be  written 

a  sin  J.  +  /3  sin  5  +  y  sin  (7  =  —  =  V, 

r 

where  r  =  radius  of  the  circumscribing  circle.  These  equa- 
tions hold,  whether  the  point  is  situated  below  BG,  within  the 
triangle,  or  above  the  vertex. 

In  the  first  case,  by  convention,  aa  is  regarded  as  negative ; 
in  the  second,  each  term  as  positive ;  while  in  the  last  aa  is 
alone  positive. 

6.  It  will  be  observed  also  that  the  point  is  equally  deter- 
mined if  the  ratios  of  the  three  perpendiculars  are  given,  for 
we  see  at  once  that  each  ratio  determines  a  locus,  which  is  a 
line  drawn  through  the  angle  upon  which  the  point  is  situated. 
The  point  sought  is  at  the  intersection  of  these  lines. 

7.  Before  proceeding  further,  it  may  be  well  to  exhibit  in 
full  the  process  for  deriving  the  equation  of  the  straight  line 
(Art.  1). 

Let  Pi,  P2  be  the  given  points  ;  a^ljiyi^  ('■2P272  their  coordi- 
nates ;  and  Pi  P2  the  straight  line  whose  equation  is  to  be 
determined.  Take  any  point  P  on  this  line,  and  let  its  co- 
ordinates be  a,  (^j  y  ;  then,  by  similar  triangles, 

PPi  :  PP2  ::  ai-a  :  a— 02  :  ft— /3  :  /3— ft  :  yi— y  :  y-yz; 

or,  taking  the  last  two  ratios,  we  are  immediately  presented 
with  the  two  determinants  (D.  2;  i,e.,  Tract  No.  I.,  Art.  2) 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


Pi  n 

A      72 



7           /3 
71—72    A— A 

7i    «i 

= 

a             y 

1    72      "2 

«i  — «2    71  —  72  1 

«2      A 

= 

A  — /^2       «!  — 02 

likewise 


If  now  we  multiply  these  equations  respectively  by  a,  /5,  y, 
and  add,  we  shall  have  at  once 


A  71 

+  /3 

7i  «i 

+  7 

"1  A 

A    72 

72    "2 

"2  A 

0 


(1)- 


Let  now  these  determinants  in  this  last  result  be  repre- 
sented by  Z,  m,  n  respectively,  and  we  have 

Za  +  m/3  +  WY  =  0 (2). 

And  gince  Z,  w,  n  represent  constants,  and  since  also  a,  /3,  y 
are  the  coordinates  of  any  point  of  the  line,  this  equation  ex- 
presses, as  before  stated  in  (Art.  1),  the  conception  of  the 
general  equation  of  the  straight  line  in  trilinear  coordinates. 

Cor.  1. — This  is  also  plainly  the  equation  of  a  straight  line 
through  two  given  points. 

Cor.  2. — The  ratios  represented  by  Z,  m,  n  are  manifestly 
constant  whatever  the  position  of  P  on  the  locus,  which  in- 
volves also  the  deduction  that  this  locus  must  be  a  straight 
line. 

8.  The  condition  of  concurrence. — Let  the  straight  lines  be 

Zia  +  Wi/34-%y  =  0 (1), 

l^a-^-m^P  +  n^y  =  0  (2). 

These  equations,  regarded  as  simultaneous,  must  have  a,  /3,  y 
as  the  coordinates  of  a  common  point.  To  obtain  the  ratios, 
we  are  presented  with  the  determinants  (D.,  Arts.  10,  12) 


1  1  1 

= 

Ml    fli 

+ 

%  ^i 

+ 

Zi  mi 

Ix    mi    ny 

m2  n^ 

n.2  h 

k    1^2 

k    niz   n-i 

b2 


10 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


otherwise 

a 

:  /3  :  y  :: 

^2    ^2 

; 

^1  ^1 

^2     ^2 

• 

^2    ^2 

Hence  the  trilinear  ratios  of  the  point  of  intersection  are  de- 
termined. 

Cor. — The  general  equation  of  a  straight  line  passing 
through  their  point  of  intersection  may  be  written 

Za  +  m/3  +  wy  =  fc  (Zia-f  Wi/3  +  %y)     (3), 

where  h  is  any  constant;  for  the  locus  of  (3)  must  pass  through 
every  point  common  to  the  loci  of  (1)  and  (2). 

^ .  9.  Three  straight  lines,  as 

Zia  +  mi/3  +  %y  =  0, 

ZjO+ma/S  +  War  =  0, 

Zga  +  Wa/S  +  JZay  =  0, 
present  the  determinant  (D.  6) 

li  nil  Ui     =0 

Z2   TYli    712 

as  the  condition  that  three  straight  lines  shall  have  a  point  in 
common. 

10.  The  condition  of  parallelism. — Let  the  two  straight  lines  be 
la  +  mp-^ny  =  0, 
Zia  +  Wi/S  +  ^iy  =  0. 

Let  us  find  the  condition  of  parallelism. 

Suppose  a,  /3,  y,  /,  g,  h  the  coordinates  of  two  points  in  the 
former  ;  ai,  ft,  yi,  /i,  ^1,  hi  the  coordinates  of  any  two  points  in 
the  latter. 

If  these  lines  are  parallel,  the  geometry  of  the  figure  requires 

a-/  :  fi-g  :  y-h  ::  cii—fi  :  /3,-^i  :  yi-^. 

Let  us  seek  an  expression  for  this  in  terms  of  the  constants 
of  the  given  equations  and  the  triangle  of  reference. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


11 


Remembering  (Art.  5)  that 

aa  +  5/3  +  cy  =  2A, 
and  consequently  af  •\-l:)g  +  ch  =■  2A, 
we  have  a{a—f)-\-h(^io—g)  +  c{y—K)  =  0  .... 

Also,  since  la-\-m(i-\-ny  =  0, 

and  If  ■]-mg  +  nh  =  0, 

we  obtain  I  (a—f)  +'m  (P  -g)  +n  (y—h) 

Equations  (1)  and  (2)  give  the  eliminant  (D.  39) 


(1). 


(2). 


1 

1    ] 

u 

= 

0, 

I   m  n 

a  h    c 

from  which  we  derive  the  ratios 

likewise 

m  n  1 
h    c 

• 

n  I 

c  a 

• 

I   m 
a  b 

y 

hence 

Ml  Hi 

b     c 

• 

rii  li 
c    a 

* 

li  mi 
a  b 

> 

m  n 
h    c 

' 

n  I 
c  a 

• 

a 

m 
b 

'- 

7} 
b 

C 

• 

f 
c 

^1 

a, 

- 

a 

mi 
b 

Multiplying  each  of  these  ratios  by  Zi,  t^i,  Wi,  and  remember- 
ing how  they  were  derived,  we  have,  by  restoring, 


?i 


These  are  (D.  6)  the  expanded  determinants  for 


m  n 

+  Wi 

n  I 

+  ni 

I   m 

b    c 

c   a 

a  b 

"M 

mi  til 

-\-mi 

Ui    li 

+  % 

1 

b     c 

c    a 

li  mi 
a  b 


h 

mi 

Ui 

:: 

li 

mi 

I 

m 

n 

i> 

mi 

a 

b 

G 

a 

b 

12  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

By  (D.  7)  the  riglit-liand  determinant  vanishes,  and  hence 


Zl       lUi       Til 

I      m      n 
a      h       c 


=  0* 


is  the  condition  of  parallelism  ;  or,  by  reverting  this  determi- 
nant, it  can  be  written  (D.  12) 

aA  +  hB  +  cC  =  0 (3), 

and  in  this  form  is  easily  remembered. 

11.  Excursus  on  the  straight  line. — We  have  obtained  (Art.  5) 
the  equation 

a  sin  J.  +  /3  sin  B-\-y  sin  0  =  —  =  a  constant ; 

r 

and  therefore  we  may  write 

la-{-m(j-\-ny-\-k  (a  sin  J.+/3  sini^  +  ysin  C)  =  0 

as  the  parallel  of  the  line 

la  -j-  wz/3  -|-  ny. 

This  follows  from  the  analogy  of  the  Cartesian  coordinates, 
where,  it  will  be  remembered,  two  lines  differing  by  only  a 
constant  are  parallel.  Also,  if  two  equations  are  so  connected 
that  their  difference  is  ever  a  constant,  their  sum  represents 
their  parallel  and  is  situated  half-way  between  them. 

In  the  last  Art.,  equation  (3)  is  the  result,  in  fact,  of  elimi- 
nation between  three  equations,  one  of  which  is  the  impossible 

equation  aa-\-hj3  +  cy  =  0 ; 

impossible  at  least  in  any  finite  conception,   since  we  have 


*  That  this  determinant  may  rigorously  be  equated  to  0  is  evident  from 
ths  consideration  of  the  ratios,  when  it  will  be  seen  we  have  been,  in  fact, 
concerned  with  only  one  equation. 


TRILINEAU-  COORDINATES. 


13 


proved  it  equal,  in  every  position  of  the  origin,  to  the  area  of 
the  triangle  of  reference.  Here  again,  after  the  analogy  of 
the  Cartesian,  of  which  trilinear  coordinates  may  be  regarded 
as  a  particular  case,*  we  may  interpret 

aa  +  hP-\-cy  =  0 

as  a  line  situated  at  an  infinite  distance  from  the  origin,  or  we 
may  say  that  every  straight  line  may  be  regarded  as  parallel 
to  the  straight  line  at  infinity. 

Thus,  analytically : 

The  ratios  (Art.  8)  a  :  j3  :  y  express  the  relations  of  the 
coordinates  of  the  point  of  intersection  of  two  straight  lines. 
The  actual  values  are  evidently  given  by  the  three  equations, 

aa  -\-  bP  +   cy  =  2A, 

Zla  +  ^l/3  +  »^ly  =  0, 
Zatt+WaiS  +  Way  =  0, 


where 


2A 


mi 

ni 

a    b      c 

^2 

n. 

li    mi    ni 
I2    m^    n2 

Writing  A  for  the  minor  in  the  one  case,  and  Ai  for  the 
determinant  in  the  latter,  we  have 

2AA 

When  a  becomes  infinite,  Ai  becomes  zero.  But  this  ex- 
presses the  condition  of  the  straight  line  at  infinity  ;  that  is, 
the  point  of  intersection  lies  at  an  infinite  distance. 

But  this  is  also  the  condition  of  parallelism  of  two  straight 
lines. 


*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  64. 


14 


TRILINEAE   COORDINATES. 


The  determinant,  therefore,  to  represent  parallel  straight 
lines,  may  be  written 


A  = 


=  0, 


h      c 

h      c 

ma    ^2 

which  identically  vanishes,  and  where  it  will  be  seen  the  ratios 
I  :  m  :  n    are   merged  in,    and  have   become   identical  with. 


a 


b  :  c. 


12.  The  condition  of  coUinearity .  —  Let  the  three  points 
"lAyi)  "2/32725  "aft 73  be  determined  in  the  same  straight  line. 
We  see  it  is  only  necessary  to  accent  the  a,  /3,  y  of  equation  (1), 
(Art.  7),  change  Qi  to  ag,  ft  to  ft,  &c.,  and  we  can  write  the 
condition  at  once 


Ol 


^2     72 

+   ft 

72    "2 

+ 

71 

"2    ft 

/33     73 

73    "3 

"3    ft 

), 

«!       ft        71         =0, 

«2        /^2        72 

«3        ft 

73 

0. 


By  (D.  6) 


which  is  the  condition  determining  three  points  in  a  straight 
line. 

The  following  well-known  theorem  will  illustrate  this  : — 

Let  P  be  a  point  within  the  triangle  of  reference.  Through 
this  point  let  straight  lines  be  drawn  from  A,  B,  G  to  meet  the 
opposite  sides  respectively  in  Ai,  j^i,  Gy ;  these  are  the  angular 
points  of  a  triangle  whose  sides,  when  produced,  will  meet  the 
corresponding  sides  of  the  first  triangle  in  three  points  which 
lie  in  a  straight  line. 

Suppose  /,  g,  h  the  coordinates  of  the  point  P ;  a,  /3,  y  those 
of  any  point,  as  ^i.  Then  a  =  0  ;  and,  by  similar  triangles, 
g  and  li  will  be  the  ratios. 

Ai  will  therefore  be  represented  by  0,  g,  h. 

For  Pi,  g  of  course  is  0,  /  and  h  its  ratios,  since  (o '.  y  '.'.  g  '.  h. 
Hence,  in  the  same  manner,  B^  is  represented  by 

/,  0,  h. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


15 


1.9  A 

+  fi 

h  0 

+  7 

1  0  h 

hf 

[ence  the  line  joining  Ai,  Bi  is  (Art.  7,  Cor.  1) 

0  3  I  =  0. 

/ol 

Otherwise  agh  +  phf—yfy  =  0   (1), 

which  may  be  written,  the  line 

ising  the  coefficients  only  to  represent  the  line. 

Recurring  again  to  equation  (1),  (Art.  7),  we  see  that,  if 
'ij  72  are  each  =  0,  we  must  have,  for  (2)  of  the  same  Article, 

Oa+O/3  +  wy  =  0 (2). 

But  this  condition  attaches  to  the  line  AB,  which  is  there- 
fore represented  by  0,    0,    1. 

The  intersection  of  A^  7?i  and  AB  is  therefore  the  concur- 
rence of  (1)  and  (2),  which  (Art.  8)  is  the  point 

fh,   -gh,    0; 
)r,  by  ratios,  /,    —^,0. 

|-    BG  and  Bi  Ci  will  intersect,  similarly,  in 

0,     g,   —7i; 
-/,     0,       h. 


md  AC,  A^Ci  in 
[ence,  since 


f-9      0 

-/      0      h 

0      9  -h 


=  0, 


bhe  lines  (AB,  A,B,),  (BC,  B,G{),  (AC,  A^Ci)  meet  in  points 
'^hich  are  collinear. 

13.  Another  illustration  of  the  use  of  these  coordinates  is 
Found  in  the  proof  that  the  straight  line  joining  the  middle 
)oiuts  of  two  sides  of  the  triangle  of  reference  is  parallel  to 
ihe  third  side.     If  the  points  be  taken  on  BC  and  AC,  then 


16  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

equations  (1)  and  (2)  of  fhe  last  Article  will  represent  the  lines 
to  be  considered,  remembering  only  to  accent  two  of  tte  co- 
ordinates, when  (1)  becomes 

gK  ¥h  —fig) 

and  (2)  0        0         1. 

Substituting  these  in  the  determinant  of  parallelism  (Art.  10), 
we  find  the  required  expression 

am— hi  =  ahfi—hghif 


a 

h 

c 

I 

m 

n 

0 

0 

1 

by  giving  m  and  I  their  values  ;  and  since,  if  the  given  lines 
are  parallel,  h  =  hi,  we  may  write 

afi  =  hg, 
which  accords  with  the  geometry  of  the  figure. 

14  The  condition  of  perjoendicularity. — The  more  common 
method  of  determining  this  condition  is  by  establishing,  in  the 
first  place,  the  angular  relation  of  a  given  straight  line  to  two 
of  the  sides  of  the  triangle  of  reference.  For  this  purpose  the 
internal  bisector  of  one  of  the  angles  may  be  used  as  an  axis. 
A  line  drawn  through  the  vertex  A,  for  instance,  may  be  re- 
garded as  known  when  its  inclination  to  the  bisector  of  this 
angle  is  determined.  The  equation  of  such  a  line  evidently  is 
concerned  with  but  the  two  coordinates  /3,  y. 

Two  lines  thus  drawn  may  be  represented  by 

t(^  =  sy (1), 

and  /i/3  =  Sjy  (2), 

and  their  angular  relations  to  the   internal  bisector  of  the 
angle  Ahj  0  and  di. 

If  now  these  lines  be  conceived  as  drawn  parallel  respec- 
tively to  the  given  lines, 

la-\-m(D-\-ny  =  0, 
lia-\-mi(i-j-n^y  =  0, 


TRILINEAR   COOEDINATES. 


17 


Those  condition  of  perpendicularity  is  sought,  we  may  write, 
'regarding  only  tlie  ratios  of /3  and  y, 

(ma  —  lb)  /3  +  {na  —  Ic)  y  =  0, 
(mia—lib)  /3  -j-  (n^a—\G)  y  =  0, 
which  are  of  the  form  of  (1)  and  (2). 

Equation  (1)  may  be  treated  as  follows : — 

sin(y+0)  :  sin(l^-f^)   \:  t:  s. 

This,  by  composition,  division,  alternation,  and  reducing,  be- 


comes 


tan  Q  :  tan  —  ::  t—s  :  ^  +  . 

Li 


tan  di  :  tan—  ::  t^—S]^  :  ti-\-Si. 


Similarly, 

But  the  condition  of  perpendicularity  in  general  is 

tan  0  tan  01  +  1  =  0; 

therefore,  by  reduction  and  supplying  values,  we  get 

mmia^-^-nnia^  +  Ui^  (&^  +  c^— 26c  cos  J.) 

—  (nli-\-nil)  (ao—ah  cos^)  —  (Imi-j-l^m)  (ah  —  ac  cos  J^) 

—  (mni+min)  {o?  cos  J.)  =  0, 
rhich,  remembering  that 

Z>^-|-c^— 2&C  cos  J.  =  a^,         c—h  cos  A  =  a  cos  B, 

h—c  cos  A  =  a  cos  G, 
)ecomes 

III — (jnui  +  miTi)  cos  A  +  mwi  —  {nli  -\- n^)  cos  B  ♦ 

+  nni—(lmi-\-lim)  cos  0  =  0, 
Ihe  condition  necessary. 


General  Exercises. 

1.  To  prove  whether  perpendiculars  upon  the  opposite  sides 
leet. 
We  perceive  that  the  perpendicular  divides  any  angle  of  the 


18  TRILINEAR   COOEDTNATES. 

triangle  into  parts  wtich  are  the  complements  of  the  remain- 
ing two  angles. 

Therefore  the  equation  of  AD  is 

cos  B  .p  =  cos  C .  y, 
or,  more  fully, 

/3  :  y  : :  sin  CAD  :  sin  BAD  ::  cos  (7  :  cos  B. 
Similarly,  cos  J. .  a  :=  cos  B .  /3, 

and  cos  0 .  y  =  cos  A  .  a. 

If  we  write  the  equations  of  these  perpendiculars  in  order, 
we  see  that  a  does  not  appear  in  the  first  or  AD,  13  in  the 
second  or  BE,  and  y  is  wanting  in  the  last  or  CF-,  and  re- 
membering that  these  are  the  coefficients  of  a  linear  equation, 
as,  Oa  +  cos  B  .jj  —  cos  (7 .  y  =  0, 

&c.  &c., 

and  remembering  also  that,  by  Art.  8,  the  problem  is  simply 
elimination  between  these  three  equations,  the  condition  of 
concurrence,  as  we  have  already  seen,  is  presented  by  the 
determinant 

0. 


0 

cosi? 

—COS  G 

COS  J. 

0 

cos  G 

cos^ 

— cos  jB 

0 

2.  On  the  sides  of  the  triangle  of  reference,  as  bases,  are 
constructed  three  triangles,  similar  and  so  placed  that  the 
adjacent  base  angles  are  equal,  and  each  base  angle  respec- 
tively equal  to  the  vertex  most  remote ;  thus  : 

A,BG  =  AB^G  =  ABG,,        B,GA  =  BC^A  =  BGA„ 
and  G,AB  =  GA,B  =  GAB^ ; 

then  will  AAi,  BBi,  GGi  cointersect. 

Since  the  point  A^  falls  without  the  triangle  of  reference, 
but  within  the  angle  A,  the  ordinate  a  must  be  negative.  The 
same  applies  to  /3  at  the  point  Bi,  &c. 

We  first  seek  the  perpendiculars  on  a,  &,  c  from  Ai,  which 
are,  in  order, 

S.sinG,,       /S.sin(O+(70,       S, .  sin  (B-\-BO, 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


19 


where 


8 


^^i^^i,     and     s,-^^^^ 


sm  J.1 


sin  A 


Dividing  these  by  the  first  to  obtain  the  ratios,  we  have  for 
the  coordinates 


of^i, 
of  A, 
ofOi, 

where  /  represents 


— 1,       h       9, 
h  -1,       /, 

sin  {A  +  ^i) 
sin  Ay 

sin  (B  +  B{) 
sin  Bi      ' 


>J     ^        » 

sin((7+O0 
sin  Oi 

The  ratios  of  A  are 

1,    0,    0, 

»           ^    j> 

0,    1,    0, 

3J                      ^       J) 

0,    0,    1. 

Hence  the  equation  of  the  line  joining  the  two  points  A  and 
Ui  is  (Art.  7) 

0.a  +  g.j3-h.yz=0] 


[for  BBi, 

for  GO,, 


-/.a  +  0./3  +  A.7  =  0: 
f.a-g. (^  +  0.y  =  0. 


By  (Art.  9)  the  determinant  of  concurrence  is  formed  from 
■these  three  lines ;  that  is, 


0  g  -h 
-f  0  h 
f  -9       0 


=  0. 


3.  In  the  same  manner,  from  the  same  figure,  prove  that 
(BG,  B,Gi),    {GA,  G,A,),   (AB,  A,B,)    respectively  meet  in 
;  points  which  are  collinear. 


20 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


15.  A  straigTit  line  through  a  given  point  and  parallel  to  a 
given  straight  line. 

Let  (I,  m,  n)  be  the  given  straight  line,  (/,  y,  h)  the  given 
point,   (Zi,  mi,  %)  the  required  straight  line. 

The  condition  of  parallelism  of 

Zia  +  mi/3  +  niy  =  0 (1), 

and  la-\-m  jj-\-ny  =  0   (2), 

by  (Art.  10),  is 


that  is, 


ll       'W2^       7li 

=  0 

> 

I      m      n 

a     h       c 

m  n 

+  Wll 

n   I 

+  % 

I    m 

b    c 

c   a 

a  h 

=  0 


(3). 


If  the  locus  passes  through  /,  g,  h,  we  must  have 

lif+'mig  +  nih=0    (4). 

We  are  now  furnished  with  three   equations  to  eliminate 
ZiWi^i ;  viz.,  (1),  (3),  and  (4). 


Hence 


a     /3     7 

/     9     1i 
ABO 


0 


16.  To  show  that 

h    c 

B  S 

where                   B  = 

y    a 

7i   "i 

is  the  equation  sought,  where  A,  B,  C  stand  for  the  minors 
of  (3). 

=  2A(a-«0, 

,      ^=     a    /3 

are  the  second  and  first  determinants  formed  from  the  coordi- 
nates of  two  points   (a,  /3,  y),    (aj,  ft,  yj), 

h    c     =      0  —c     b 
B  8  a      P     y 

"1     A    7i 

0-10         =2A(a-ai). 

a       /3    2A 

ai     A    2A 


Similarly,  if 


8  Q 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

Q  = 


21 


/3    y 

A  n 

2A(/3-A),     and 


a    b 
Q  B 


2A(r-yi). 


^  V?.  Deduced  coordinates  of  the  triangle  of  reference. 
1st.  Of  the  angular  points. 


2A 


WMA, 

/3  =  0,     y  =  0 

Hence 

aa  =  2a,     a  = 

At  B,  similarly, 

.,     'f.    0. 

At  (7, 

0.      0,        2A 

c 

2nd.  0/  ^^e  middle  point  of  JBG. 
Evidently  Z//3  =  area  of  triangle  =  cy, 

and  a  =  0, 

Hence     0,   --,    —     are  the  coordinates. 
0        c 

3rd,   Of  the  foot  of  the  perpendicular  from,  A  upon  BO. 

2A 
The  perpendicular  =  — ,    by  1st  case. 


Hence 
and 


2A        ^       p       2A         ^ 
—  cos  u  =  p,      —  COS  5  =  y ; 
a  Ob 


2A 


2A 


0,      —  cos  C,      —  cos  B 


are  the  required  coordinates. 

4th.   Of  the  centre  of  the  inscribed  circle. 

The  point   being   equally  distant  from  the  three  lines  of 
reference,  we  must  have 

n  2A 

«  =  p  =  y  =  ---  -. 

a-\-b-\-c 


22 


TRTLINEAR    COORDINATES. 


Ex.— Prove  that 

a  =  r  cos  A,      /3  =  r  cos  B,      y  =  r  cos  G, 
r  being  radius  of  circumscribed  circle. 

18.   Distance  between  two  points. 

Various  expressions  may  be  deduced.  One  only  is  here 
given  ;  others  will  be  given  hereafter. 

Let  BiCi,  BiAi,  drawn  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  triangle 
of  reference  BG,  BA  respectively,  be  two  sides  of  a  quadrilateral 
BiGiPAi  inscribed  in  a  circle  whose  diameter  is  BiP ; 
(a,  /3,  y),  (ai,  P^,  yi)  the  coordinates  of  Bi,  P  ;  r  =  the  dis- 
tance between  them.  Through  Gi  draw  a  diameter  G^D. 
Join  AiGi,  DAi. 

A,  Gl  =  PGl  +  PA\  -  2PGi .  PA,  cos  G.PA, 

=  PGl  +  PAl  +  2P(7i .  PA,  cos  B  (1). 

The  angle  at  D  =  the  angle  GiBiA,  =  B, 

AiGi  =  GiD  sin  B  =  PB,  sin  B  =  r  sin  B, 

PG,  =  a-a„    PA  =  y-ri. 

Substituting  these  values  in  (1), 

r"  sin^  B  =  (a-ai)H  (y-yi)'  +  2  (a-n,)  (y-yO  cos  B, 
which  is  the  required  equation. 

This,  however,  may  be  made  symmetrical  with  the  deter- 
minants formed  from  the  coordinates  of  the  points  B,,  P. 
These  determinants  are  represented  in  (Art.  16)  by  Q,  B^  8; 
also  in  the  same  Article  it  was  shown  that 


h     c 
B   8 


Hence 
where 


2A 

4AV'sin2  5 
X  = 


a  — a,,     and 


a     h 
Q  B 


h     c 
B  8 


2A 
X'+Y'  +  2XYcosB, 

Y=    a     h  \. 
Q  b\ 


y-yi. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  23 

Developing  the  values  of  X  and  Y,  we  find 

4AV  sin^^  =  h\Q'  +  B'  +  S'-2B8  coaA-2SQ  coaB 

-2QB  cos  G). 

By  (Art.  5),  2A  sin  B  =  Vh, 

Therefore 


T  =  y  ^(Q'+B'-^ S'-2BS  COS  A-'28Q  COS  B-'2QB  COS  G). 


19.  The  area  of  a  triangle  from  the  trilinear  coordinates  of  the 
angular  points. 

The  area  of  a  triangle  expressed  as  a  determinant  in  Car- 
tesian coordinates,  the  axes  being  rectangular,  is  (Art.  10,  D.) 

Ill 

Vi    2/2    2/3 

M/i  tVn        tVo 


rhich,  referred  to  oblique  axes,  becomes 


•^  cosec  (o 


1 

1 

1 

Vi 

2/2 

2/3 

X, 

X, 

a^3 

F 

F   F 

A 

ft  (h 

"i 

"2     "8 

Let  (oj,  ag,  Og),  (/3i,  /32,  i^s)  take  the  places  of  x  and  y,  and 
lultiply  and  divide  by  F,  and  we  shall  have 


cosec^ 

2F 


Multiply  the  last  row  by  sin  A  and  the  second  by  sin  B^  and 
then  take  the  sum  of  these  new  rows  from  the  first. 
Observing  (Art.  5)  that 

a  sin  ^  +  /3  sin  ^  +  y  sin  (7  =  F, 
C 


24 


TRILINEAE   COORDINATES. 


we  are  enabled  to  write 


Ar 


ea 


cosec  G 

Yi  sin  0 

2V 

A\ 

"i 

1 

71     72     73 

2V 

/^\     1%     f\ 

"i 

«2        O3I 

72  sin  G     yg  sin  (7 


ft 


A 


or,  more  symmetrically, 

=  -L 

2F 


1% 


It  will  be  observed  that  the  angle  w,  between  the  axes,  is 
changed  to  one  of  the  angles  of  the  triangle  of  reference  in 
passing  from  the  Cartesian  to  the  trilinear  system. 

20.  Ferjjendicular  distance  of  a  point  from  a  line. 

Let  the  coordinates  of  the  point  be  (a^,  ft?  72)  j  ("5  /^j  7)5 
(«i5  Pi^  7i)  ^^^  coordinates  of  two  points  in  the  line ;  r  the 
distance  between  these  last-named  points ;  and  jp  the  perpen- 
dicular sought. 

Then  pr  =  twice  the  area  of  the  triangle  of  which  the  three 
points  are  the  vertices. 

By  the  preceding  Article, 


F  = 

-1.1- D. 

r       Y 

But,  by  (Art.  18),       r  =^  j^  Z, 

where  Z  =  the  radical  part  in  the  final  value  of  r. 

«2       ft        72 

a       /3       y 

Hence              P  =  -77  = 

«i     ft      7i 

Z 

__    0^0+  . 

nH+Sy, 

z 


(1). 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


25 


We  have  already  seen  (Art.  7)  that  the  equatioD  to  a  line 
joining  two  points  is 

la+mp-^-ny  =  0. 

But  the  numerator  of  (1)  is,  in  fact,  the  same  expression 
under  another  form.  As  general  equations  of  a  straight  line 
joining  two  points  they  must  be  identical. 

Hence  we  may  write 

la  +  mft  +  ny 
*  (l^+m^-\-  n^ — 2mn  cos  A  —  2nl  cos  B  —  2lm  cos  0)* 


C2 


26 


CHAPTER  11. 

THE  EQUATION  IN  TERMS  OF  PERPENDICULAES— TANGEN- 
TIAL AND  TRIANGULAR  COORDINATES— IMAGINARIES. 

21.  It  is  necessary,  as  we  proceed,  to  introduce  the  equation 
of  the  straight  line  under  somewhat  different  forms.  We  have 
considered  a  point  as  determined  by  its  perpendicular  distances 
from  the  three  sides  of  the  triangle  of  reference.  A  line  join- 
ing two  of  these  points  has  thus  far  occupied  our  attention. 

Let  now  the  perpendicular  distances  of  the  three  angular 
points  A,  B,  C  from  a  straight  line  be  jp,  q,  r,  and  let  it  be 
required  to  find  the  equation  to  this  straight  line  in  terms  of 
these  quantities. 

We  will  assume  two  points  on  this  straight  line,  one  upon 
each  side  of  the  perpendicular  ^  ;  d  =  the  distance  between 
them. 

•^  =  area  of  the  triangle  formed  by  these  two  points  and 
the  point  A. 

For  the  coordinates  of  the  point  A  we  have  (Art.  17) 


(■ 

^,     0,     0. 

a 

1 

Let    (a,  /3,  y),   (a^,  /B^,  yj    be  the   coordinates  of  the  two      ' 

given  points. 

Hence  (Art.  19)                                                                                j 

i'^^  7 

2^   0    0 
a 

a     ^      y 
«i    A     71 

TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


27 


Mand 


qd  = 


rd  = 


1 

V 

0    \^  0 

0 

a      /3     y 

«!  /3i  ri 

1 

F 

0     0    ?^ 

c 

a      /3      y 

"i    /5i    yi 

Multiplying  these  equations  by  aa,  &/3,  cy  respectively,  and 
Iding,  we  have  (D.  7) 


{ajpa  -f  hq^^  -f-  cry)  d  = 


2A 


a     /3     y 

a     /3     y 


=  0, 


«!    /^i    7i 
j that  is,  ajpa-\-'bc[^-\-cry  =-0. 

This  is  only  another  form,  or  a  special  case,  of 

la-\-mf^-\-ny  =  0, 

[in  which  Z,  w,  w  are  proportional  to  op,  Sg^,  cr,  or  to  the  de- 
[terminants  of  (Art.  7,  eq.  1). 

22.  The  ]^erpendicular  distance  of  a  point  from  the  line 

wpa-\-hq(i-}-cry  =  0  (1). 

Let  the  given  point  be  (/,  g,  h),  through  which  a  parallel  is 
[drawn ;  d  the  perpendicular  distance  required. 

Then  the  distances  from  A,  B,  0  to  this  parallel  will  be 
^represented  by  the  perpendiculars  dzhp,  dzkq,  dzkr^  which, 
mbstituted  in  (1),  give 

a(d±p)a  +  b(d±q)fi  +  c(d±r)y  =  0. 

But,  by  hypothesis,  this  line  passes  through  (/,  g,  h). 

Hence     a  (d±p)f  +  b  {d±q)  g  +  c  (d±r)  h  =  0, 

(af+bg-\-ch)d  =  ^(apf-\rbqg-\-crh), 


28 


TEILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


which  gives  <i  =  ±  <ml±^99+^\ 

an  equation  for  the  perpendicular  distance. 
23.  The  equation 

2A 

evidently  gives  the  altitude  of  a  triangle  whose  vertex  is  /,  g,  h, 
and  the  equation  of  the  base 

ap/+  hqg  -f  crh  =  0. 

The  equations  of  the  sides  will  differ  only  in  the  perpen- 
dicular ;  hence  these  may  be  written 

a:Pifi-hq^g  +  crih  =  0, 
apj-^lg^g  +  cr^h^  0. 
With  these  two  equations,  and 

a/+5^  +  c/i  =  2A, 
the  values  of  /,  g,  h  may  be  determined ;  that  is, 
af :  hg  :  ch  :  2 A  : : 


qi  n 

: 

npi 

: 

Pi  <li 

: 

1    1    1 

23    ^2 

ni>^ 

P2    22 

Pi  2i  n 

Pi     22     ^2 

af  __ 

92   r. 

1 

1 

1 

Pi 

2l 

n 

P2 

22 

^2 

2A 


Multiplying  this  equality  by  j9,  and  the  second  and  third 
equations  formed  from  the  above  proportion  by  q  and  r  respec- 
tively, and  adding,  we  have 


,  _  apf-\rhqg-j~crh  _ 
2A 


p 

2 

r 

Pi 

2i 

n 

P2 

22 

^2 

1 

1 

1 

Pi 

2i 

n 

Pi 

22 

n 

TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


29 


24.  We  will  now  show  the  method  of  expressing  the  posi- 
tion of  a  right  line  by  coordinates,  and  that  of  a  point  by  an 
equation.* 

Let  p,  2,  ^  be  the  unknown,  a,  /3,  y  the  known,  coordinates  ; 
then,  by  the  equation  we  have  just  considered,  we  are  enabled  to 
determine  a  relation  between  p,  q,  r  which  will  be  true  for  any 
right  line  drawn  through  the  fixed  point  of  which  o,  /3,  y  are 
the  coordinates  ;  that  is, 

aa2)-\rh(jq-\-cyr  =  0, 

which  is  called  an  equation,  in  tangential  coordinates,  of  the 
point  whose  trilinear  coordinates  are  a,  /3,  y. 

25.  To  find  the  tangential  equation  to  the  point  of  intersection 
of  two  right  lines. 

Let  (pi,  ^1,  r^),  (2^25  5^2?  ^2)  ^^  ^^o  tangential  coordinates  of 
the  two  lines ;  (a,  /3,  y)  the  trilinear  coordinates  of  their  point 
of  intersection.  Evidently,  then,  (a,  (3,  y)  is  a  point  on  each 
of  two  lines  whose  perpendicular  distances  from  A,  B,  C  are 

Pl»   ^V  n  ;  T'2^   ^2,  ^2- 

We  first  determine  the  ratios  of  the  trilinear  coordinates  of 
the  point. 

We  have  (Art.  21) 

ap^a  +  hq^P-^-cr^y  =  0, 

ap^a-\-hq2(j  +  cr^y  =  0; 


and 

hence        aa  :  hjS 


cy 


^1  r. 

n   Pi 

; 

Pl^l 

22    h 

^2^2 

P2  g.2 

Multiply  each  of  these  ratios  by  p,  g,  r  respectively,  and 
add ;  then  each  of  these  ratios 

aap  +  hftq  +  cyr 

p     q     r 

Pi    9.1    ^1 
P'i     ^2     ^2 


*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  65. 


30 


TRILINEAR  COORDINATES. 


V 

q     r 

Pi 

g.1  n 

P2 

22      ^3 

=  0 


The  numerator  expresses  a  relation  between  p,  q,  r  by  the 
preceding  Article;  but  the  denominator  evidently  expresses 
the  same  relation. 

Hence 

is  the  equation  required. 

Otherwise,  suppose 

aap  +  hftq-^-cyr  =  0   (1) 

the  equation  of  the  point  of  intersection,  which  must  be 
satisfied  by  the  coordinates  of  any  line  drawn  through  that 
point ;  but  (pi,  q^,  rj,  (jjg,  g^i  ^2)  by  hypothesis  are  perpen- 
diculars from  the  points  of  reference  upon  lines  drawn  through 
the  point  of  intersection. 

Hence  aap^  +  hPqi  + cyr^  =  0  (2), 

aap^-\-hPq^-\-cyr^  =  0 (3); 

that  is,  (1),  (2),  (3)  furnish  the  determinant 


P 
Pi 


=  0, 


P2      22      ^2 

the  same  relation  and  equation  as  before. 

26.  Tangential  equation  of  a  point  at  infinity. 
The  point  is  clearly  the  intersection  of  two  parallels. 
Let  (pi,  51,  rj)  and  {pi  +  t,  qi  +  t^  ^i  +  O  t>6  ^^^  parallels. 
But  the  condition  of  parallelism  (Art.  10)  is 


P 

Pi 

Pi-^i 


q  r 

qi       n 

qi  +  t    n  +  t 


which  may  be  written 


p     q     r 

=    p     q     r 

Pi  gi  n 

Pi    ?i    n 

t      t      t 

1     1     1 

=  0, 


=  0. 


TRILINEAR  COORDINATES.  31 

The  last  determinant  identically  vanishes,  as  will  be  seen, 
|if  a  common  factor  can  be  taken  so  as  to  make  the  first  row 
mity ;  in  other  words,  if  jc>=zq=zr.     That  is,  points  at  infinity 
[•e  comprised  upon  the  line 

p  =  q  =  r; 

?and  equation  (1)  of  last  Article  reduces  to 

aa  +  i^/S  +  cy  =  0, 

relation  which  has  already  been  interpreted  (Art.  11). 

27.  Since  we  define  the  equation  to  a  point  in  these  coordi- 
nates as  an  equation  satisfied  by  the  coordinates  of  all  right 
lines  drawn  through  the  point,  it  follows  that,  if 

i  =  0, 
F=0, 

^be  two  equations  representing  two  points  in  tangential  coordi- 
lates,  then  the  equation 

L  +  hV=:0 

'being  satisfied,  as  it  evidently  is,  by  the  coordinates  of  L  and 
F,  must  express  a  point  on  the  line  joining  the  given  points. 

28.  Reserving  for  the  present  the  further  development  and 
the  application  of  tangential  coordinates,  we  will  just  mention 
a  system  of  coordinates  known  by  the  term  triangular. 

Instead  of  the  trilinear  equation 

aa  -f-  fc/3  +  cy  =  2  A, 

and,  denoting  the  ratios  of  the  left  member  by  x,  y,  Zj  we  have 

x-\-y  +  z  =  1. 

The  ratios  — -,  -^,  -^  evidently  represent  the  ratios  of  the 
triangles  BPGy  AFC^  APB  to  the  triangle  of  reference. 


32  TRILINEAR  COORDINATES 

It  is  clear  how  the  trilinear  coordinates  ",  /3,  y  are  related 
to  x,y,z'j  for,  if  we  divide  a;  by  a  a,  we  have  ^.     In  the  same 

manner,  y  divided  by  &/3  =  —  ;  so  that 
^  _  y  _  ^ _1_ 

aa       1(3       cy       2A' 


29.  The  coordinates  of  the  middle  point  of  BO  are,  in  tri- 
angular coordinates,  0,     ^,     y. 

This  appears,  since  5/3  =  A. 

But  b(3  =  2Ay ; 
hence  2/  =  i  ; 

similarly,  ^  =  i  ; 

while  X  =  0. 

30.  We  have  seen  (Art.  17)  that  the  coordinates  of  the  foot 
of  the  perpendicular  from  A  upon  BG  are 

^       2A        ^       2A        -r. 

0,      —  cos  C,      —  cos  B. 

a  a 

These  expressions,  transformed  as  above,  become 

^       h  cos  G       G  cos  B 

a  a 

Referring  again  to  (Art.  17),  we  find  the  coordinates  of  the 
centre  of  the  inscribed  circle,  which,  transferred  into  the 
triangular  system,  become 

X  _  y  z  _        1 

a        b        c       a-^b-\-c 

Transforming  the  area  of  a  triangle  (Art,  19),  we  have 


JL  .M 

2V  '  abc 


x^     2/i     ^1 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


33 


=  (Art.  5) 

8A^ 1_ 

ahc     2(a8in  J.-+-/3sin5  +  y  sinO) 


The  equation  to  a  straight  line  joining  two  points  is,  in  a 
similar  manner,  found  to  be  (Art.  7) 

0. 


x^   2/i    «i 

=  A 

^1   2/1   2^1 

^2     2/2     % 

«2     2/2     ^2 

^8     2/8     2^3 

«8     2/8     ^3 

a; 

2/ 

z 

«i 

2/1 

^1 

«2 

2/2 

^2 

The  condition  of  concurrence  is  the  same  for  both  systems. 
The  equation  to  the  right  line  at  infinity  (Art.  11)  becomes 
in  triangular  coordinates 

x-\-y-\-z  =  0\ 

and  consequently  the  condition  of  parallelism    (Art.  10)    is 
'easily  transformed  to 

=  0. 


I 

m 

n 

k 

^1 

n. 

1 

1 

1 

The  equation  to  the  perpendicular  (Art.  14,  Ex.  1) 
/3  cos  B  =  y  cos  0, 
[transformed  from  trilinear  to  triangular  coordinates,  is 
y  cot  B  =  z  cot  0. 

Thus  a  great  number  of  similar  transformations  might  be 
written  out. 

These,  however,  must  suffice  for  the  present,  and  these  are 
probably  sufficient  to  give  the  reader  a  correct  idea  of  such 
changes  when  they  become  necessary.  The  useful  applica- 
tions of  these  several  systems  of  coordinates  must  be  learned 
chiefly  from  a  study  of  lines  of  a  higher  order  than  the  first. 

31.  The  principle  detailed  by  Dr.  Salmon*  is  equally  ap- 
♦  Conies,  p.  33. 


34  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

plicable  to  trilinear  or  triangular  coordinates,  or  any  system 
in  which  a  point  is  determined  by  coordinates ;  that  is,  if 

u  =  la-{-  mf^  +  ny  =:  Of 

and  V  =  Zia  +  m^/3+Wiy  =  0, 

then  will  u-\-hv  =  0    (1) 

represent  a  line  passing  through  the  intersection  of  u  and  v, 
which  line,  it  is  evident,  can  be  made  to  represent  any  parti- 
cular line  by  giving  particular  values  to  the  arbitrary  con- 
stant h. 

Let  us  try  a  simple  application. 

Suppose  the  triangle  of  reference  circumscribed  by  lines 
whose  equations  are 

u=Of     v  =  0,     w  =  0; 

that  is,  representing  A^Bi^  By^G^,  C-^A^.  Let  A^B^  be  produced 
to  some  point  JBg,  and  from  B^  let  B^  G^  be  drawn,  and  let  B^  G^ 
be  the  line  whose  equation  is  to  be  determined.  Join  B^  G^. 
But  Gi  is  the  point  of  intersection  of  v=0  and  w=0.  Hence, 
from  what  has  just  preceded,  B2  G^  will  be  represented  by 

Also,  since  B^G^  and  A-^B^  (produced)  meet  in  B^^  the  line 

B^  O2,  which  is  drawn  through  their  intersection,  will,  by  the 

same  considerations,  be  represented  by 

7c-^u-\-v-\-Jcw  =  0, 

which,  written  symmetrically  and  in  the  usual  form,  becomes 

\u -\- fxv -\- yw  =  0. 

It  is  manifest  that  this  proof  is  not  restricted  to  lines  form- 
ing a  triangle.  It  is  equally  plain  that  they  should  not  be 
parallel. 

32.  In  order  that  a  point  may  be  determined  upon  the  line 
la  -\-  m/3  -j-  ny  =  0, 
its  coordinates  must  simultaneously  satisfy  the  relation 


TEILINEAR   COORDINATES.  35 


I 


If  such  values  prove  to  be  irrational,  they  are,  by  conven- 
tion, said  to  be  the  coordinates  of  an  imaginary  point.  Since 
quadratics  involve  two  roots — sometimes  imaginary — there 
will  be  the  same  number  of  intersections,  if  the  question  is  one 
of  intersection,  real  or  imaginary, — or,  more  exactly,  real,  co- 
incident, or  imaginary.  But  as  this  truth  is  so  well  known 
and  so  fully  exhibited  in  Cartesian  Geometry,  we  shall  here 
consider  only  what  is  peculiar  to  our  subject. 

33.  It  is  evident  that  the  imaginary  roots  of  a  trilinear 
equation  of  the  second  degree  must  be  of  the  form 

a  +  a,y~l,     /3+/3,x/^,     y  +  y^Hl  (a). 

Suppose  these  roots  to  be  the  coordinates  of  an  imaginary 
point.  Then,  by  the  last  Article,  these  must  satisfy  the  relation 

ao  +  &/3-fcy  =  2A. 
Making  the  substitution,  we  have 

(aa  +  hfi  +  cy)  +  (aa^-{-h(i^  +  cyO  ^^  =  2A (1); 

wherefore  aa^  +  &/3i  +  cyi  =  0    (2), 

and  aa+hP  +  cy=z2\    (3). 

From  which  we  see  that  (1)  is  made  up  of  both  real  and 
imaginary  parts  ;  the  imaginary  parts  satisfying  (2)  the 
equation  to  the  line  at  infinity  (Art.  11)  ;  while  (3)  is 
of  course  satisfied  by  its  own  coordinates.  The  reader 
will  learn  to  distinguish  between  the  coordinates  of  an 
imaginary  point  and  those  of  an  imaginary  point  at  infinity ; 
that  is,  if  the  coordinates  (a)  had  been  regarded  as  the  co- 
ordinates of  an  imaginary  point  (or  proportional  to  them)  at 
infinity,  both  (2)  and  (3)  must  have  been  written  =  0. 

34.  The  equation  to  an  imaginary  right  line  may  be  written 


36  TRILINEAE   COORDINATES. 

35.  Writers  upon  equations  of  the  second  degree  represent- 
ing right  lines  in  Cartesian  coordinates  are  accustomed  to 
dispose  of  the  contingency  of  two  imaginary  roots  by  referring 
both  to  two  imaginary  lines  drawn  through  the  origin,  thus 
determining  a  real  point.  So  now  we  say  that  every  imagi- 
nary right  line  passes  through  one  real  point,  and  but  one. 

If  we  consider  the  equation  of  (Art.  34),  we  see  that  the 
real  and  imaginary  parts  are  not  coincident,  and  consequently 
j^the  factor  v  —  1  does  not  divide  out ;  hence  the  equation  may 

be  expressed  w  +  vx/— 1=0  (1), 

in  which  u  and  v  are  functions  of  the  coordinates  of  the  given 
straight  line.  This  equation  is  manifestly  entirely  similar  to 
equation  (1),  (Art.  31). 

It  is  also  to  be  observed  that  u  and  v  are  of  the  first  degree, 
and  hence  u  ■=  0 

and  v  =  0 

are  satisfied  by  real  values,  which  values  satisfy  (1),  which 
passes  through  the  point  of  intersection  of  w  and  v,  and  there- 
fore each  straight  line  passes  through  a  real  'point. 

36.  Suppose  the  equation  to  a  straight  line 

lf-\-mg  +  nh  =  0 

to  pass  through  an  imaginary  point  whose  coordinates  are 
given  in  [Art.  33  (a)]  ;  then 

la  -\-  mft  +  ny  -f-  (la^  -f-  mft^  -\-  yiy^  \/ —  1  =  0  ; 

and  consequently         Za  -|-  mp  -\-ny  =0, 

Zai  +  m/3i  +  ^yi  =  0, 

which  equations  determine  the  ratios  of  Z,  m,  n ;  or  we  may 
determine  them  fully  by  the  determinant 

=  0, 


/ 

9 

h 

a 

/3 

7 

"i 

ft 

7i 

TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


37 


rhich  is  the  equation  to  the  straight  line  drawn  through  the 
^imaginary  point  whose  coordinates  are 

a•^a,^/^     /3+A  x/^,      y  +  yi^^l 

id  consequently 

a_a^yZa,      p-p^^/^      y-y^^^. 

Therefore,  since  imaginary  roots  enter  by  pairs  into  an 
equation,  the  imaginary  points  of  intersection  of  two  lines 
(curves)  will  bo  found  upon  real  straight  lilies  hij  twos. 

37.  If  we  have  an  equation  of  the  form 

Z/3'-m/3y  +  %y'  =  0   (1), 

we  can  evidently  subject  it  to  the   same  reasoning  which  is 
^  applied  to  the  quadratic 

x^  —px])  +  qif  =  0.  * 
Each  equation  is  reducible  to  the  form 
(/3-5y)(/3-.,y)  =  0; 
that  is,  the  two  straight  lines 

^-sr  =  0 (2), 

/3-s,y  =  0.. (3), 

are  real  or  imaginary  according  as  we  find,  by  the  resolution 

of  (1)  for  the  ratio  /3  :  y,  that  4k  is  less  or  greater  than  m^.f 

Examining  (2)  and  (3)  in  the  light  of  (Art.  31),  we  see  that 

these  lines  intersect  in  the  point  A  of  the  triangle  of  refernece. 

38.   Excursus  on  imaginary  right  lines  and  points. 

It  is  evident,  from  what  has  immediately  preceded,  that  this 
portion  of  the  subject  is  capable  of  considerable  expansion, 
and  that  this  system  of  coordinates  is  eminently  fitted  to  deal 
with  the  Infinite  and  Imaginary.  From  what  has  already 
been    said   in    reference   to  the  adaptation  of  the  reasoning 

*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  69. 
t  Algebra,  Bourdon,  p.  159. 


38  TBILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

employed  in  Cartesian  methods  to  trilinear  coordinates,  the 
views  of  high  authorities  upon  these  results  are  interesting. 

Poncelet*  has  discovered  and  illustrated  geometrically  the 
rationale  of  the  principles  which,  upon  purely  analytical 
grounds,  we  are  enabled  to  re-discover,  apply,  and  extend ;  he 
has  pointed  out  the  correspondence  of  points,  some  real  and 
some  imaginary,  and  taught  that  theorems  concerning  imagi- 
nary points  and  lines  may  be  extended  to  real  points  and  lines, 
and  hence  shown  how  to  indicate  the  properties  of  a  figure 
when  some  of  the  lines  and  points  are  real  and  some  imagi- 
nary. By  the  method  of  trilinear  coordinates  we  are  enabled 
quickly  to  generalize  all  those  theorems  which  are  concerned 
with  the  line  at  infinity.  For  example,  if  four  points  on  a 
conic,  or  four  tangents  to  a  conic,  are  given,  and  it  is  required 
to  find  the  locus  of  the  centre  of  the  conic,  we  proceed  to  find 
the  locus  of  the  pole  of  the  line 

a  sin  J.  -j-  /3  sin  5  +  7  sin  0  =  0, 

which  also  gives  us,  the  conditions  being  the  same,  the  locus 
of  the  pole  of  any  line 

\a-f/i|(3-|-vy  =  0. 

In  applying  the  method  of  projections,  the  analytic  shows 
its  superiority  over  the  synthetic  method,  by  proving  the 
general  theorem  at  once,  rather  than  by  inferring  it  by  the 
projection  from  a  more  elementary  state  of  the  figure. 

As  to  the  results  reached  in  our  discussion  of  parallelism, 
and  what  we  have  said  upon  the  theory  and  use  of  the  line 

a  sin  J.  +  /5  sin  5  +  y  sin  0  =  0, 

nothing  is  affirmed  beyond  what  has  been  received,  almost 
without  dissent,  from  the  first,  both  upon  geometrical  and 
analytical  considerations.  See  Chasles  (Geom.  Sup.),  Town- 
send  (Vol.  I.,  p.  16,  Art.  136),  Salmon  (Conies,  pp.  64,  318), 
Poncelet  (Proj.  Persp.,  p.  53),  Hamilton  (Quaternions,  p.  90). 

*  Traite  des  Proprietes  Projectives  des  Figures. 


TBILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


39 


38.  Tangent  of  angle  betvwen  two  lines. 
Let  la  +  ml3  +  ny  =  0, 

lia-\-m^P~\-njy  =  0, 
be  the  given  lines. 

P''  !  If  0,  01  be  their  respective  inclinations  to  one  of  the  lines  of 
reference,  then,  by  the  reasoning  in  Art.  14,  we  must  have  as 
the  tangent  of  the  difference  of  the  two  angles,  that  is,  the 
tangent  of  the  required  angle, 

tan  (d-d,)  =   tan  0-tan  d, 
^        '^       1  +  tana  tan(^i' 

*    which  becomes,  by  a  laborious  reduction, 


I 

m 

n 

sin  J. 

sin  5 

n, 
sin  G 

P 

where  P  is  the  sinister  member  of  the  equation  of  perpen- 
dicularity given  on  page  17. 

This  is  probably  the  simplest   form   possible   in  trilinear 
coordinates. 


Examples  under  Chapters  I.  and  II. 

1.  Express  the  parallelism  of 

la-\-m(^-\-ny  =  0, 
with  AG  in  the  triangle  of  reference. 


Ans. 


a 

h 

c 

I 

m 

n 

0 

1 

0 

0. 


2.  The  same  line  with  BG  -j  with  AB. 

D 


40  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

3.  What  relation  of  two  lines  is  expressed  by  the  determinant 

=  0; 


ah         c 
1     0     cos  5 
0     1     cos  J. 


and  what  are  the  lines  ? 


4.  What  condition  is  expressed  by 


a  b  c 
I  m  n 
0-11 


=  0? 


5.  Find  the  angle  between  the  lines 

^.     a  =  7  cos  J?, 
and  j3  =  y  cos  A. 

6.  If  -zA+vv/— 1  =  0,  it'-f  ^^''Z— 1  =  0  are  imaginary 
straight  lines  having  a  real  point  of  intersection,  then  the  four 
real  straight  lines  u=-Of  -17=0,  -^.'=0,  v=^0  are  concurrent. 

7.  What  is  the  determinant  expressing  the  equation  of  the 
right  line  drawn  through  the  intersections  of  the  pairs  of  lines 

2au-\-'bv-\-cw  :=0,     &v  +  ci<;  =  0; 
26w-|-av  +  cw  =  0,     av— cm;  =  0? 


41 


I 


CHAPTER  III. 
THE  TRILINEAE  METHOD  APPLIED  TO  CONICS. 

39.  We  will  now  call  attention  to  the  fact,  wliich  may  not 
have  escaped  the  notice  of  the  reader,  that  trilinear  equations 
are  always  homogeneous.  If  not  so  in  form,  they  can  be  made 
so  by  a  very  simple  process.     Since 

aa  +  6/3  +  cy  =  2A, 

aa-^hP  +  cy 


we  may  write 


1; 


and  therefore  any  term  of  an  equation  may  be  multiplied  by 
this  fraction  without  affecting  the  pre-existing  relation  of 
equality.     Thus,  if  we  have 

a2-2a/3  +  r=2, 

we  may  proceed  to  raise  each  non-homogeneous  term  to  the 
i  second  order,  as 


40.  Another  consideration,  which  has  been  referred  to,  may 
'be  here  emphasized  ;  viz.,  that  we  are  not  concerned  with  the 
absolute  values  of  the  coordinates,  but  with  their  ratios ;  and 
this  advantage  we  derive  from  the  principle  of  homogeneity 
'^which  belongs  to  every  trilinear  equation  ;  thus, 

a2-2a/3  +  7'  =  0 


is,  in  fact,  (~)~^(~") 


^  +  1=0, 


d2 


42 


TEILINEAR  COORDINATES. 


in  whicli  only  the  ratios  —  and  —  appear.  Beyond  these  ratios 
it  is  not  necessary  for  us  to  inquire. 

41.  It  may  be  desirable  to  find  tbe  equation  to  the  same 
locus,  but  referred  to  another  triangle  of  reference. 

First  Transformation^ 
when  the  equations  of  the  sides  of  the  new  triangle  are  given. 
These  sides  being  represented  by  equations  in  terms  of  the 
perpendiculars  from  the  angular  points  of  the  original  triangle, 
we  have  (Art.  21) 

coordinates  of  J.,  (^,  jp-^,  p^)  ; 
B,  (q,  q„  q,y  ; 
0,     (r,  r^,  r^)  ; 

that  is,  ap  f  -{-hq  g  +  cr  h  =  0 (1), 

apJ+hq,g  +  cr^Ji  =  0 (2), 

apj+bq.2g  +  cr^h  =  0 (3), 

where  (/,  g,  li)  are  the  old  coordinates  of  any  point  P. 
To  find  the  locus  of  the  homogeneoas  equation 

When  referred  to  (1),  (2),  (3),  we  observe  that  /  represents 
the  perpendicular  from  (/j,  g^,  h^) — these  being  the  new  co- 
ordinates of  P — on  the  line  joining  P  and  G.     Therefore 

(/i,  9i^  K),    (9^  9i^  22),    (^,  n,  ^2) 
indicate  the  angular  points  of  a  triangle  whose  area  is  found 
by  Art.  19, 


double  area 

=./.i 

/i     9i     K 
9     9x     92 
r     ri     ra 

' 

Similarly,     hg  = 

^1 

/i    9i     K 
r     r,      r, 
p    p,    p. 

,         1 

/i     9i     h 
P    Pi    V^ 
9     9i    9i 

TRILINEAR  COORDINATES.  43 

from  which  the  values  of  /",  y,  Ti  are  readily  determined. 
Hence,  representing  these  determinants  by  Q,  22,  8  respec- 
tively, we  may  write 

F  f  ^,  I-,  -^)  =  0 
\  a      0      c  / 

as  the  equation  with  new  lines  of  reference,  the  degree  not 
being  changed  by  transformation. 

42.  Second  Transformation, 
coordinates  of  the  new  points  of  reference  being  given. 

A  triangle  drawn  within  or  without  the  original  triangle 
will  sufficiently  represent  the  construction. 

Let  the  perpendiculars  from  A-^,  B^,  O^,,  the  new  points  of 
reference,  upon  BC  be  denoted  by  p,  pi,  p^ ;  on  AG  by  q,  q^,  q^ ; 
on  AB  by  r,  r^,  r^ ;  a^,  &i,  Cj  the  sides  of  the  new  triangle  ; 
/i,  ^1,  hi  the  new  coordinates,  and  /,  g,  h  the  old  coordinates, 
of  any  point  P.     Then,  by  Art.  21,  we  find 

a^pfi  +  hp^g^  +  Cip.2\  =  0, 

«i  ^/i  +  K'^i9i  +  <^inh  =  0. 

Representing  these  equations  by  Q,  B,  S  respectively,  we 
have,  by  Art.  22,  the  distance  of  P  from  each  of  the  sides  of 
the  original  triangle  expressed  in  a  simple  form ;  that  is, 

/. Q         B      7  t) 

the  old  coordinates  expressed  in  terms  of  the  new. 

43.  We  shall  now  pass  on  to  the  consideration  of  curves  of 
the  second  degree.  An  important  property  of  these  curves 
was  conceived  by  the  early  geometers ;  viz.,  that  every  curve 
of  this  degree  might  be  regarded  as  a  conic  section.  What 
then  can  be  easily  shown  may  be  stated  here,  that  the  section 
of  a  right  circular  cone  by  any  plane  can  be  expressed  by  a 


44 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


homogeneous  equation  of  the  second  degree  in  trilinear  co- 
ordinates. This  can  be  readily  proved  by  selecting  particular 
lines  of  reference ;  and  since,  by  the  preceding  Articles,  we 
may  transform  to  any  other  lines  without  affecting  the  degree 
of  the  equation,  we  may  regard  this  as  a  general  truth  irre- 
spective of  the  lines  of  reference. 

Let  us  write 

ua^  +  i;/32  +  wy^  +  2u,  fty  -f  2v^  ya  +  2w^  a/3  =  0 
as  the  general  equation  of  the  second  degree  in  trilinear  co- 
ordinates. 

This  equation,  it  will  be  seen,  contains  six  terms  ;  but  as 
the  nature  of  the  curve  does  not  depend  upon  the  independent 
magnitude  of  these  coefficients,  we  may  simply  regard  their 
mutual  ratios,  or,  in  other  words,  assign  a  particular  value  to 
one  of  the  coefficients,  varying  the  Values  of  the  others. 

Here,  then,  as  in  the  Cartesian  coordinates,  we  can  find  the 
equation  to  the  conic  described  through  five  points.  There 
are,  in  other  words,  five  constants  to  be  determined  whose 
values  substituted  in  the  general  equation  will  give  the  equa- 
tion of  the  conic  through  five  points ;  that  is, 


a'     {3'     y'      ^y       ya        a/3 

«i    R    y\    ftiYx    yi"!    "A 


ftl    y\    Ays    y5«8  "5/35 


=  0. 


44.   Concurrence  of  the  straight  line  and  conic. 

The  well-known  property  that  every  right  line  meets  a 
curve  of  the  second  degree  in  two  real,  coincident,  or  imagi- 
nary points*  is  readily  exhibited. 

Writing  the  general  equations  of  the  conic  and  straight  line, 

la  +  m./3  -{■  ny  =  0, 
W  +  ^;i8H^^yH2?^l/3y^-2v^ya  +  2w;^a/3  =  0, 


*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  132. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


45 


and  the  simultaneous  relation 

aa  +  &/3-fcy  =  2A, 
we  see  from  these  three  equations  that  we  are  enabled  first  to 
express  /3  and  y  as  functions  of  a  of  the  first  degree,  which 
substituted  gives  us  a  quadratic,  and  this  in  turn  furnishes 
two  roots,  determining  two  points  of  intersection. 

45.  Excursus  upon  the  fundamental  form  of  the  equation  to  a 
conic  section  in  trilinear  coordinates. 

Conceive  the  vertex  of  a  right  circular  cone  placed  at  the 
origin  0  of  x,  y,  z  coordinates  ;  XYZ  the  plane  of  section,  and 
also  the  triangle  of  reference  in  trilinear  coordinates  ;  Oj,  02,  9^ 
the  angles  which  the  perpendicular  upon  this  plane  makes 
with  OX,  OY,  OZ ;  OX  and  OY  supposed  to  be  at  right  angles 
to  the  axis  of  the  cone  OZ  and  to  one  another ;  P  a  point  on 
the  curve  and  the  origin  of  a,  /3,  y. 

Let  a,  h,  c  be  the  perpendicular  distances  of  P  from  the 
coordinate  planes,  and  d  the  diagonal  from  0  in  the  lower 
face  of  the  parallelepipedon. 

Then  the  perpendiculars  from  P  on  XY  =  a,  on  XZ  =  /3, 
on  r^=y. 

By  the  geometry  of  the  figure,  a  (the  perpendicular  distance 
of  P  from  the  plane  OYZ)  =  a  sin  6^,  &  =  /3  sin  0^,  and  c  (the 
distance  of  P  from  the  plane  OXY)  =  y  sin  6^, 

d'  =  a'-{-b\ 
c  =  d  tan  0, 
where  6  ■=.  semi- vertical  angle  of  the  cone. 

Hence  c^  =  ((^H  &')  tan^  a  ; 

that  is,         y^  sin^  d^  =  (a^  sin^  d^  +  fi^  sin^  d,)  tan^  6, 
or         a^  sin^  6^  tan^  0  +  /3^  sin^  02  tan^  0  -  y^  ^^^2  q^  _  q^ 
which  also  may  be  written 

W  +  mlj^  +  ny^  =  0, 
where  it  is  understood  that  the  signs  are  not  all  the  same. 


46  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

We  have,  therefore,  derived  an  equation  to  a  conic  section 
homogeneous  and  of  the  second  degree  in  trilinear  coordinates ; 
and  in  turn  it  may  easily  be  shown  that  the  general  equation 

ua^  H- 1'/32  +  wy^  +  2u^Py  +  2v^ya  +  2w^al3  =  0 

may  be  made  to  take  the  form 

and  hence  every  equation  of  the  second  degree  may  be  said  to 
express  some  section  of  a  right  circular  cone. 

In  tbe  genesis  of  this  equation  it  is  evident  how  we  might 
proceed  to  make  some  applications  in  tri-dimensional  Geo- 
metry. For  instance,  let  us  take  some  function  of  x^  y,  z  as 
an  equation  to  a  surface  in  three  rectangular  coordinates,  as, 

and  let  x  cos  d^-j-y  cos  6^-\-  z  cos  ^3=1? 

be  the  equation  to  any  plane  ;  also  let  the  traces  of  the  coordi- 
nate planes  upon  the  plane  of  section  be  the  lines  of  reference ; 
then,  if  x,  y,  z  be  the  coordinates  of  any  point  P  upon  the 
given  surface,  and  if  Q^,  6^,  6^  be  the  angles  which  the  proposed 
plane  makes  with  the  original  plane,  we  must  have 

X  •=  a  sinO^,     y  =  p  sin  6^^     z  =  y  sin  6^ ; 

and  consequently,  by  substituting  in  the  given  surface,  we 
obtain  the  trilinear  equation  to  the  section,  that  is, 

/(a  sin  d^,  J3  sin  Og,  y  sin  63)  =  0. 

In  the   same  manner,   the  equation   to  the  section  of  the 

Q?      y^      ^ 
ellipsoid  ~2  +  tT  +  "2  =  -^ 

by  the  same  plane  would  evidently  become 

g^  sin^  e,   ,  (5'  sin^2  .  rl^n^  ^3  _  1  r^^ 

a'        "^        h'        ^        c^        ~       ^  ^' 

which  is  easily  rendered  homogeneous  by   first  finding  the 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  47 

identical  relation  among  a,  /3,  y  in  the  given  plane ;  that  is, 
by  substituting  the  values  of  x^  y,  z  as  above  when 

a  sin  2^1 +  /3  sin  20^+  7  sin  208  _  -, 
-'    -  2p  -'' 

and  consequently  (1)  becomes 

g^  sin^  e,      fy"  sin^  0^      y^  sin^  ^3 
a^        "^        &^        "''         c' 

—  r«  sin  201  +  /3  sin  2(92  +  y  sin  2a8T_  ^ 

46.  By  the  last  Article  we  are  enabled  at  once  to  interpret 
such  an  equation  as 

a/3-^ya;  =  0    (1), 

where,  by  ordinary  abridged  notation,  a  =  0,  /3  =  0,  y  =  0, 
ic  =  0  are  the  equations  to  four  straight  lines,  and  k  is  any 
constant. 

In  considering  the  given  equation,  we  see  that  it  is  of  the 
second  degree,  and  satisfied  when  a  =  0  and  y  =  0  are  at  the 
same  time  satisfied ;  and  hence  we  infer  that  the  conic  repre- 
sented by  the  equation  passes  through  the  intersection  of  these 
lines.  In  the  same  manner,  another  point  is  determined  by 
the  intersection  of  /3  =  0  and  ic  =  0,  and  so  on  for  the  four 
sets  of  lines  determining  four  points  through  which  the  conic 
must  pass  ;  that  is,  (1)  represents  a  conic  circumscribing  a 
quadrilateral  whose  sides  are  a,  /3,  y,  and  x. 

From  this  we  readily  pass  to  the  interpretation  of  the  similar 

equation  a/3  — Z;y^  =  0   (2), 

which  indicates  that  two  of  the  opposite  sides,  y  and  x,  are 
coincident.  And  as  each  of  the  lines  a  =  0  and  (3  =  0  can 
meet  the  conic  in  but  two  points,  they  must  be  conceived  as 
drawn  from  a  point  without,  and  hence  as  tangents  to  the 
conic  at  the  points  respectively  where  the  coinciding  lines 
meet  the  conic* 

*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  223. 


48  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

47.  The  triangle  of  reference  self -conjugate  with  regard  to  the 
conic. 

B/eturning  to  tlie  equation 

la'  +  mfi'i-ny^  =  0, 
we  see  tliat  it  expresses  no  possible  locus  while  Z,  m,  n  are 
regarded  as  all  positive  or  all  negative  ;  but,  as  we  saw  in 
Art.  45,  these  are  not  all  of  the  same  sign. 

Let  I,  m  be  positive,  n  negative,  and  for  tbem  write  n'^,  v^,  w^ 

respectively ;  then 

u'a^^v'p.^-m'y^  =  0 (1), 

or  y?a^-\-{v^  +  wy)  (yij  —  y)  =  0. 

After  the  analogy  of  equation  (2)  of  Art.  46,  the  lines 

vj3  +  wy  =  0, 

v(i  —  ioy  —  0, 

must  be  tangents,  and  a  their  chord  of  contact  ;  in  other 
words,  the  line  a  =  0,  which  is  the  equation  of  BG,  a  side 
of  the  triangle  of  reference,  is  the  chord  of  contact  of  a  pair 
of  tangents  from  the  vertex  A. 

It  is  equally  admissible  to  write  (1) 

whence  we  see,  as  before,  /3  =  0,  which  is  the  equation  of  AG, 

a  side  of  the  triangle  of  reference,  is  the  chord  of  contact  of  the 

lines  ua  +  wy  =  0, 

and  ua — wy  =  0, 

which  are  tangents  from  the  vertex  B ;  or,  still  further,  (1) 

may  take  the  form 

or  (ua-\-vl3\/'^)  (ua  —  v(3\/  —  l)—wy  =  0; 

whence  2fca  +  ?;/3  \/ — 1  =0, 

ua—vjj  \/— 1  =  0, 

are  the  imaginary  tangents  from  the  vertex  (7,  and  y  =  0  their 
chord  of  contact,  which  is  also  the  equation  of  AB. 


TRILINEAR  COORDINATES.  49 

Therefore,  as  we  see,  eacli  side  of  the  triangle  of  reference 
becomes  in  turn  the  chord  of  contact  of  tangents  from  the 
opposite  angle,  that  is,  the  jpolar  of  that  point  with  respect  to 
the  conic  ;  and,  conversely,  each  vertex  is  seen  to  be  the  pole 
of  the  opposite  side,  or  the  triangle  may  be  described  as  self- 
conjugate  with  respect  to  the  conic ;  which  was  to  be  shown.* 

48.  Intercepts  of  a  directed  line  upon  the  curve 

Za2  +  m/3Hn7^  =  0  (1). 

Let  («!,  j.\,  Yi)  be  the  point  from  which  the  directed  line  h 
is  drawn  to  meet  the  conic  ;  s^,  s,^,  s^  sines  of  the  given  direc- 
tion all  measured  in  the  same  direction,  the  first  from  h  to  the 
parallel  of  BG,  the  second  measured  from  the  same  point  to 
the  parallel  of  AG,  and  the  third  in  the  same  direction  round 
to  the  parallel  of  AB,  of  the  sides,  respectively,  of  the  triangle 
of  reference. 

Then,  evidently,  a  =  a^-\-sJi, 

^  ^  =  Pi  +  s^h,       * 

These  values  substituted  in  (1)  give  a  quadratic  in  h ;  that  is, 

h^  (Isi  +  ms2  +  nss )  +  2^  (Is-^a^  +  rns^p^  +  ns^y^) 

+  (lal  +  mPl  -\-  nyl)  =  0, 

The  two  values  of  h  obtained  from  this  equation  will  be  the 
lengths  of  the  intercepts  from  the  given  point. 

Suppose  this  point  to  be  on  the  curve,  we  shall  then  have 

lal  +  mj^l  +  nyl  =  0, 

and  consequently  but  one  value  to  h  (one  intercept  becoming 

zero),  which  is  manifestly  the  length  of  a  chord  in  the  given 

direction. 

49.  Locus  of  middle  points  of  parallel  chords. 

Let  the  curve  be  the  same  as  in  the  last  Article ;  (aj,  /3i,  y^) 

*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  227. 


50  TRIUNE AR   COORDINATES. 

a  point  on  tbe  locus,  and  the  cTiord  from  this  point  repre- 
sented by  h,  whose  direction  is  given  by  its  sines,  Sj,  Sg?  ^3- 
Then,  as  before. 

Hence  the  intercepts  of  the  curve  are  given  by 

which,  by  the  supposition,  are  equal ;  that  is,  the  two  values  of  h 
will  appear  with  opposite  signs  ;  and  since  they  must  be  equal, 
their  sum,  or  the  coefficient  of  Ji,  will  be  equal  to  0,  and  conse- 
quently* ZsiaiH-mSgA  +  w^gyi  =  0, 

a  straight  line  giving  the  relation,  in  fact,  of  any  point  on  the 
locus,  and  hence  the  equation  required. 

60.  Tangent  to  a  pomt  on  the  conic. 

Let  now  the  point   (a^,  ft,  yj  be  on  the  conic.     We  have 
seen,  by  Art.  48,  that  when  this  point  lies  on  the  conic, 

lal  +  m0l  i-  nyl  =  0; 

and  therefore  the  quadratic  in  h  of  that  Article  reduces  to 

(Isi  +  ms2  -\-  ns^)  h  +  2  (ls-^a^  +  ms2fy^-\-ns^y^)  =  0, 

which  gives  the  length  of  the  chord. 

When,  now,  the  direction  becomes  that  of  the  tangent,  the 
length  of  this  chord,  that  is  h,  becomes  zero,  and  we  have 

l\a^-^ms2fyi  +  7is^y^  =  0  (1). 

But  if  (a,  jS,  7)  be  any  point  on  this  tangent,  we  must  have 


h  '    '      h  '    '      h  ' 

which  values  substituted  in  (1)  give 

la^a-{-mj3^l3-\-ny^y  =  Za^  +  m/3j  +  nyl  =  0. 

*  Bourdon's  Algebra,  p.  160. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  51 

Hence  Z.aj  a  -|-  m/3i  (3  +  ny^  y  =  0 

expresses  the  required  relation,  and  is  therefore  the  equation 

sought. 

51.  Coordinates  of  centre. 

The  reasoning  is  similar  to  that  of  Art.  49.  The  direction 
of  a  diameter  being  s-^,  s^,  s^,  the  lengths  of  intercepts  by  the 
curve  in  this  direction,  measured  from  the  centre  (a^,  /S^,  yj), 
will  be  given  by  the  same  equation  as  in  that  Article ;  and 
since  the  quadratic  must,  by  the  premises,  give  equal  roots 
with  opposite  signs,  the  coefficient  of  h  will  =  0 ;  that  is, 

^^i^i  +  ^^a/^i  +  ^^syi  ==  ^   (!)• 

For  the  actual  determination  of  a^,  /3i,  y^  we  have 

aa,  +  hl3,  +  cy,  =  2A  (2); 

^ut  since  aa  +  hjj  +  cy  =  2 A, 

id  a  =  a^  +  s^7i,     P  =  p^  +  s^h,     y  =  yi  +  s^hf 

fe  have  as^-\-hs^-j-cs^  =  0 (3). 

Comparing  (1)  and  (3),  we  get 

la^ ■m/3i nyj 

a         h  c  ' 

These  ratios  will  enable  us  to  find  the  values  of  a^,  jSj,  y^ ; 
ins,  by  dividing  (2)  by  — -  or  its  equals,  we  have 

CO 

^  +  ^'  +  ^'  =  —  =  ?^  =  —  • 

I       m      n         Zttj         wz/3i        ny^  ' 

and  therefore  the  coordinates  of  the  centre  are  determined. 

It  will  be  observed  that  these  coordinates  enable  us  to  de- 
termine the  condition  that  the  conic  may  be  a  parabola  ;  the 
centre  of  a  parabola  being  infinitely  distant,  its  coordinates 
mast  satisfy  the  relation 

aai  +  6/3i  +  cyi  =  0. 


52  TRILINEAE   COORDINATES. 

Making  the  substitution,  we  have  the  required  condition, 

n^         h^  e^ 

that  is,  ^-i-JL  +;^  =  0. 


62.  Equation  of  circle  with  respect  to  which  the  triangle  of 
reference  is  self-conjugate. 

It  may  be  inferred  from  Art.  47  that  when  an  equation  of 
the  second  degree  does  not  involve  /Sy,  ya,  ajo,  the  conic,  in 
such  case,  is  so  related  to  the  triangle  of  reference  that  each 
side  is  the  polar,  with  respect  to  this  conic,  of  the  opposite 
vertex. 

Let  one  side,  as  CJ.,  cut  this  conic  in  two  points  (/"i,  0,  /i^), 
(/a,  0,  7^2),  and  let  this  chord  be  bisected.  Then  the  equation 
of  the  straight  line  from  the  vertex  to  the  point  of  bisection 

is,evidently,  /^^^  =  ^  W. 

which  line  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  conic. 

We  have  seen  (Art.  47)  that  the  conic  may  be  written 

where,  in  this  case,  nothing  is  assumed  as  to  which  of  the  co- 
efficients I,  m,  n  should  be  attributed  the  negative  sign. 

Now  /i  and  f^  are  identical  with  the  values  of  a  given  byl 
this  equation. 

We  can  eliminate  /3  and  y  by  the  relation 

aa  +  6/3  +  cy  =  2A, 
remembering  that  /3  =  0  ;  and  we  have  the  quadratic 

2  _     4:^10^ a        _|_  _^^L__  _  0  . 
u^c^  4-  w^a^         uh^  +  w^a^  ~     ' 


and  therefore  /i+/2  =  -^2^T^^~^> 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  53 

since  this  coefficient  is  the  sum  of  the  roots  of  a  ;  by  the  same 
reasoning  we  have 


id  consequently  (1)  becomes 


line  on  which  the  centre  lies,  which  may  be  written 


u^a w^y 


limilarly,  ^  ^v^^ 

a  h 

Now  it  is  a  property  of  the  circle  that  a  line  joining  any 
^point  to  the  centre  is  perpendicular  to  the  polar ;  therefore  the 

line  !!l?_!^  =  0, 

a  c 

which  is  drawn  from  the  centre  to  the  vertex  i?,   is  perpen- 
dicular to  /3  =  0. 
But,  by  the  figure,  we  have 


a 

= 

y 

cos 

G 

cos  A ' 

u' 

w" 

a  cos 

A 

c  COS  0 

u' 

v' 

therefore 

similarly, 

a  cos  A       h  cos  B ' 

and  the  equation  of  the  circle  becomes 

a  co^Aa^-\-h  cos5/3^  +  c  cos  Oy^  =  0, 
or  sin  2 A  a'  +  sin  2B  (^'  +  sin  2(7  y'  =  0. 

The  circle  thus  represented  will  be  imaginary  unless  the 
triangle  of  reference  have  an  obtuse  angle. 


54  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

53.   The  inscribed  triangle. 

Returning  now  to  the  general  equation  of  the  second  degree, 

^a2-|-v/3'  +  w;y'  +  2wi/3y  +  22;i7a  +  2wia/3  =  0, 
we  see  that  if  /3  =  0, 

r  =  o, 

the  equation  reduces  to         u  =  0. 

But  this  is  the  condition  that  the  curve  should  pass  through 
the  vertex  A.  In  the  same  manner,  it  may  be  shown  that  when 
i;  =  0  and  w  =  0  it  will  pass  through  B  and  G. 

Under  these  conditions  the  equation  reduces  to 

u^(^y-\-v^ya-\-u\afi  —  0   (1), 

which  also  may  now  be  written  without  the  subscripts.  We 
may  therefore  write  it 

ul^y  -h  a  (yy  +  wJd)  =  0  ; 
and  since  every  straight  line  cuts  the  curve  in  two  points, 
the  line  vy-\-ivl3  =  0 

must  pass  through  the  point  where  a  =  0  and  /3  =  0,  since 
these  values  alone  will  satisfy  the  equation  ;  but  these  points 
are  coincident,  and  determine  the  vertex  A.  This  line  could 
not  therefore  be  drawn  within  the  curve,  for  it  would  then 
meet  it  in  three  points  ;  it  must  be  drawn  without,  and  there- 
fore is  the  tangent  at  A. 

Equation  (1)  is  an  equation  of  the  second  degree,  and  re- 
presents evidently,  from  what  has  been  said,  a  curve  circum- 
scribing the  triangle  of  reference,  satisfied  when  any  two  co- 
ordinates =  0,  in  which  case  each  vertex  lies  upon  the  locus. 

54  The  conic        ul3y-\-vya-\-wal3  =  0 

will  give  values  for  the  intercepts  by  the  curve  upon  a  straight 
line  from  a  given  point ;  the  equation  to  the  tangent  at  any 
point ;  the  locus  of  middle  points  of  parallel  chords,  in  pre- 
cisely the  same  manner  as  has  already  been  shown  in  preced- 
ing Articles. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  55 

Let  US  here  seek  the  condition  that  any  straight  line  should 
be  a  tangent  to  the  conic.  ' 

Since  ufoy-^-vya  +  wap  =  0 

represents  a  conic  described  about  the  triangle  of  reference,  it 
passes  through  the  point,  as  we  have  seen,  where  /3  =  0  and 
y  =  0. 

Let  /a-f^/5  +  /iy  =  0 

be  the  straight  line.    If  by  means  of  this  equation  we  eliminate 
a  from  the  equation  to  the  given  conic,  we  must  have,  evi- 
dently, coincident  values  for  /3  :  y. 
Now  the  quadratic  which  results, 

y^        y    \  gw         I      gw 

will  give  equal  values  for  —  when  the  value  of  the  radical  is 
zero ;  that  is,  when 

4ihgviv  —  {gv  -f  Jiw—fuY  =  0, 
or  u^f+vY  +  w%'-2vwgh-2uwhf—2uvgf  =  0, 

This  may  also  be  written  in  the  form 

±  \/uf  dz  "^vg  ±  vwh  =  0, 

which  can  be  verified  by  clearing  of  radicals ;  and  this  is  the 
condition  that  the  straight  line 

fa+g/5  +  hy  =  0 
may  touch  the  curve 

u(3y-\-vya-\-wa(^  =  0. 

Dr.  Salmon  has  called  this  the  tangential  equation  of  the 
curve. 

E 


56  TRl LINEAR   COORDINATES. 

55.  Pascal's  hexagon  :  the  opposite  sides  of  a  hexagon 
inscribed  in  a  conic  meet,  if  produced,  in  collinear  points. 

Let  the  triangle  of  reference  be  inscribed  in  the  curve, 
and  let  Ax^,  Bx^,  Gx^  be  three  of  the  sides  of  the  inscribed 
hexagon . 

Since,  if  (/,  g^,  h^),  (f^,  g^,  hc^),  (/g,  g^,  \)  be  the  coordi- 
nates of  x^,  x^,  a?3  respectively,  we  shall  have,  by  the  figure, 

/3  :  y  ::  ^1  :  Zz, ; 

Ax^  will  therefore  be  represented  by 

and  x,G  by  g„   -f^,      0. 

Hence  (Art.  12)  the  point  of  intersection  of  these,  sides  is 

9iA,     91921     K92- 

The  side  Bx.2  will  be  subject  to  the  coordinates  f^  and  h^ ; 
the  side  x^A  to  li^  and  g^ ;  hence  these  sides  will  intersect  in 
the  point 

f^K     h93i     hK 

The  sides  Cx^  and  x^B  will,  in  like  manner,  intersect  in  the 

point  /3/1,    /i^3,     hj^. 

Hence  we  have,  by  the  determinant  of  collinearity,  the 
condition 


^1/2  9x92  K92 
fih  h9&  hh 
/3/1     /i  9s     Kfz 


0  (1). 


which,   as  is  evident,  is  also  the   condition  ■  that  the    three 
points  cTj,  a^a,  x^  lie  on  one  conic  with  the  vertices  of  reference. 


TRILINEAR   COO"RDINATES. 


57 


For  let  (/i,  g^y  h^),  (/g,  g^,  h),  (/a,  .^3»  h)  be  the  three  given 
points  on  the  conic,  and  let  the  conic  be  represented  by 

ugh-\-vhf-\-wfg  =  0. 

Then  will  the  three  vertices  of  reference  lie  on  this  conic ; 
and  if  the  curve  pass  through  the  given  points  we  must  have 

ug^h^  +  vhj,  ■j-wf^g^  =  0^ 
ug^\ + 'vlij^i  +  wf^  g^  =  0, 
y'giK+'vhJ^  +  wf^g^  =  0 ; 

and  the  determinant  by  which  u,  v,  and  w  are  eliminated  is 

9x\     KA    fi9i     =  0, 

g^K    Kt\  hQ't 

g^h     hA    A9z 


which  is  identical  in  result  with  the  condition  given  in  (1). 


Exercises. 

1.  A  triangle  being  inscribed  in  a  conic,  are  the  points 
coUinear  in  which  each  side  intersects  the  tangents  at  the 
opposite  vertex  ? 

2.  Prove  the  theorem  of  Hermes,  that  if  (a^,  p^,  y^),  (og,  jSj,  y^) 
be  two  points  on  the  conic 

uPy-\-vya-^tvap  =  Of 

then  the  equation  to  the  straight  line  joining  them  is 

"iQa       PA       7x72 

e2 


68  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

3.  When  does         ul3y-\-v'ya-\-wa(3  =  0 
represent  an  hyperbola  ? 

4.  What  is  the  chord  of  contact  of  the  tangents 

^  (/3+y)  +  (^/v±  ywy  a  =  0  ? 

5.  What  is'the  condition  of  concurrence  of  the  normals  at 
the  vertices  of  the  triangle  of  reference  to  the  above  conic  ? 


59 


CHAPTER  IV. 

POLE  AND  POLAR— RECIPEOCATION. 

56.  Inscribed  Conic. 

Any  conic  inscribed  in  the  triangle   of  reference  may  be 

represented  by  _         

via -|-  \/m/3  +  V7iy  =  0, 

which,  cleared  of  radicals,  is 

l'a'-^m'l3'-h7iy-2mn(ir-2nlya-2lmaP  =  0, 

as  we  have  seen  (Art.  54),  where  it  expressed  a  particular 
condition. 

If  we  examine  this  equation,  we  shall  find  that  it  may  be 
written  in  each  of  the  three  following  forms  : 

4w%/3y— (m/3  +  ny-Za)2  =  0   (1), 

47ilay-(ny  +  la^mfDy  =  0  (2), 

4mZa/3-(Za  +  wi/3-n7)2  =  0  (3), 

from  which,  as  they  differ  only  by  a  constant  from  the  equa- 
tion interpreted  in  Art.  54,  we  conclude  from  parallel  reason- 
ing that  each  represents  a  conic  section  in  which  the  factors  of 
the  first  terms  equated  separately  to  zero  are  tangents  to  the 
curve  in  whose  equation  they  respectively  appear,  and  the  second 
terms  are  the  squares  of  their  respective  chords  of  contact. 

Hence  the  lines  of  reference  are  tangents,  and  the  conic  is 
an  inscribed  conic. 

57.  Conversely,  every  conic  ivhose  lines  of  reference  are  the  sides 
of  a  circumscribed  triangle  will  have  an  equation  of  the  form, 


60  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

since  every  conic  may  be  represented  by 

If  the  triangle  of  reference  be  circamscribed,  the  side  BC 
will  be  a  tangent  and  be  represented  by  a  =  0.  This  value 
substituted  in  the  general  equation  gives 

which,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  must  have  equal  roots, 
that  is,  the  left-hand  member  of  the  equation  must  be  a  perfect 

square ;  hence  u^  =vw; 

that  is,  ^1  =  db  \^vw  ; 

and  similarly  v^  =  ^  s/wu, 

w^  =  ±  vuv, 

are  the  necessary  and  sufficient  conditions  that  the  conic  should 
touch  the  lines  /3  =  0  and  y  =  0. 

Substituting  these  values  in  the  general  equation,  and  re- 
membering to  write  ?^,  m^,  71^  for  u,  v,  w,  we  have 

db  v"^  ±  N/m/3  ±  y 71^  =  0 (1), 

which  was  to  be  proved. 

68.  Four  conies  may  be  inscribed  in  the  triangle  of  reference 
so  related  that  the  points  of  contact  shall  lie  on  the  lines  re- 
presented by  ±  iJa  ±  m/3  ±  wy  =  0. 
Eor  it  is  evident  that  (1)  of  the  last  Article  may  be  written 
ZV  +  m2|32  +  7i2y2  ±  2mw/3y  ±  2nlya  ±  2Zwa|S  =  0, 

which,  writing  all  the  doubtful  signs  negative,  or  one  negative 
only  at  a  time,  breaks  up  into  the  equations  to  four  conies,  and 
we  are  presented  with  four  interpretations  similar  to  (1),  (2), 
(8)  of  Art.  56.  If  the  double  signs  be  taken  otherwise,  the 
locus  will  become  simply  two  coincident  straight  lines. 

These   equations   therefore,    as   representing   conies,    have 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


61 


twelve  points  of  contact  lying  three  and  three  on  the  above 
four  straight  lines.  It  may  be  observed  that  the  actual  sign 
of  the  quantities  under  the  radicals  in  equation  (1)  of  the  last 
Article  depends  upon  which  sign  is  taken  with  the  coeflB.cients 
of  /3y,  ya,  a/3. 

The  process  for  finding  tangent,  intercepts,  centre  of  conic, 
&c.  is  similar  to  that  already  exhibited  in  the  last  Chapter, 
and  need  not  be  repeated. 

59.  Brianclion' s  Hexagon  :  the  three  opposite  diagonals  of 
\every  hexagon  described  about  a  conic  concur. 

The  method  of  proof  is  quite  similar  to  that  already  ex- 
hibited. Let  three  sides  be  produced  for  the  triangle  of 
^reference ;  ABCDEF  the  hexagon ;  AB,  CD,  EF  the  sides 
■produced. 

If  \a-^m^Py  +  n^y:=0 

be  the  equation  io  AF, 

Zga  +  ma/B-frigy  =  0 
[to  that  of  BC,  and 

^3a^-m3/3  +  ^^37  =  0 

to  that  of  DE;  then  the  diagonals  AD  and  FC  will  be  repre- 
Jsented  as  follows  : — 


The  point  A, 

»      A 

(AD), 
(FG), 
{BE\ 


y  =  0,     and      Zja-f-mi/S  =  0  ; 

a  =  0,     and     W3/3-r??3y  =  0  ; 
\m^a  +  m-^^m^(^-\-m-^n^y  =  0  ; 
l^n^a  +  n^m,^(^  -f-  thn^y  =.  0  ; 


Hence,  (Art.  8), 


liTYi^  'tn^^m^  m-^n^ 


n,  m.    n-,  n. 


=  0. 


62 


TEILINEAR   COOEDINATES. 


The  condition  that  the  three  lines  AF,  BC,  and  DE  shall 
touch  the  conic 

via  -f  Vmjj  -\-  Vny  =  0 

is  found  by  first  finding  the  condition  of  tangencj  of  each  of 
these  lines,  which  is,  for  AF, 


^ 

T- 

m 

=  0; 

for  BO, 

i- 

m 

^2 

for  BE, 

i- 

W3 

and  therefore 

1 
h 

^1 

2 

^1 

=  0, 

1 

J_ 

1 

k 

nu^ 

W^2 

1 

1_ 

2. 

k 

m. 

% 

■which,  it  is  seen,  is  the  same  condition  as  above. 

From  what  follows  on  reciprocation  it  will  be  evident  that, 
by  reciprocating  Pascal's  Theorem,  Brianchon's  Theorem  may 
be  obtained. 


60.  It  is  proper  here  to  notice  a  dijfferent  form  of  notation 
which  is  frequently  employed  in  this  subject. 

Suppose  /  (a,  /3,  y)  =  0  to  represent  the  equation  to  the 
curve,  and  s-^,  s^,  s^  the  direction- sines  of  the  tangent  at  the 
point  (ttj,  /3j,  y^)  ;  (a,  /3,  y)  any  point  on  the  tangent ;  and  h 
the  distance  between  these  two  points.  Then,  following  the 
reasoning  of  Art.  48,  the  intercepts  on  h  will  be  given  by 
substituting  the  new  values, 

a  =  Oj  -f  s^h,     /3  =  /3i  +  sji,     y  ^  yi  +  ^"^3^, 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  63 

in  the  above  equation  ;  that  is,  by 

f(a^  +  sji,  fi^  +  s^h,  Yi  +  sji)  =  0, 

which,  when  expanded  as  we  have  already  seen  in  the  Article 
referred  to,  will  consist  of  some  function  of  (a^,  /Sj,  yj,  a  co- 
efficient of  hy  and  a  coefficient  of  Jv^  which  is  some  function  of 
the  direction-sines,  or 

If  now  (aj,  /Gj,  y^)  lie  on  the  curve,  we  must  have 

Ik-  /(«!,  A,  70  =  0; 

also  one  of  the  intercepts  becomes  zero,  and  since  the  line  is  a 
tangent  the  length  of  the  chord  is  zero,  that  is,  the  coefficient 
of  h  vanishes,  and  we  have 

By  substituting  for  s^,  s^,  s^  their  values,   we  shall   obtain 
twice  the  function  in  (oj,  p^,  y^)  which  =  0,  that  is, 

as  may  be  shown  by  taking  the  differential  coefficients  of 
ual  +  v(dI  +  wyl  +  2ujD^y^-{-2v-^y^a^  +  2w^a^f^^  =  0, 

in  respect  to  a^,  /3j,  y^  respectively,  multiplying  the  differential 
coefficients  by  each  of  these  coordinates  and  adding,  when  we 

shall  find  that  2/ (a,,  f3„  y,)  =  0, 

since  (a^,  /3j,  y^)  is  supposed  to  be  on  the  curve.  There  will 
remain,  therefore, 

da^  d(iy  tf,yi 


64  TEILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

the  equation  to  the  tangent  at  (a^,  (3^,  yj,  since  it  expresses  a 
relation  among  the  coordinates  of  any  point  in  the  line. 

61.  Polar  of  a  point  in  respect  to  the  conic. 

Let  the  fixed  point  be  (a^,  ft,  y^)  ;  (og,  ft,  y^,  (a^,  ft,  y^)  the 
coordinates  of  points  of  contact  of  tangents  from  the  given 
point.  Then  we  can  show,  by  an  extension  of  the  reasoning 
of  the  last  Article,  that 

«#  +  Af  +  7.f  =  0 
da^  cla^  aaj 

is  the  tangent  from  (a^,  j3^,  y^)  to  the  point  of  contact  (og,  /Sg,  y^) ; 

and  likewise  «3  -/-  +  A  -7^7-  +  73  7     =  ^ 

da^  dp^  dy^ 

is  the  equation  to  the  tangent  at  (og,  /Gg,  y^.     Therefore  these 
equations  express  the  fact  that  the  line  joining  these  points  of  \ 
contact  is  a  locus  whose  equation  is 

da^  fltpi  dy^ 

that  is,  the  polar  with  respect  to  the  conic 

/(a,fty)=0; 

or  we  may  proceed  otherwise.  Defining  the  polar  of  a  given 
point  as  the  locus  of  the  intersection  of  tangents  drawn  to  the 
points  of  section  by  a  straight  line  through  the  given  point, 
we  should  have  for  the  equation  through  the  three  points  in 
the  same  straight  line 

« (Ay2-ftyi)  +  /5(yi"2-y2«i)  +  y  («ift-"2ft)  =  0  ...(i), 

where  (a,  /3,  y)  is  the  given  point,  (og,  /S^,  y^),  (a^,  ft,  yj  the 
points  of  section  in  which  any  straight  line  cuts  the  conic. 


TEILINEAE   COORDINATES.  65 

The  intersection  of  tangents, 

d£                  3f_                  ^ 
will  be  .-^V  =  -^—  =  -P^   (2). 

PiTa— P2T1      ri«2— y2«i      «iP2— «2Pi 

Equation  (1)  with  (2)  gives 

i?/"  4.  /3  ^  J-     ^f  _  0 
c?a  <ij(3  c?y 

This  equation  being  independent  of  a^,  /3j,  yj ;  Oj,  ft,  yg  is 
the  relation  at  the  intersection  of  the  tangents  ;  it  is  therefore 
the  locus  required,  and,  bj  definition,  the  polar  of  (a,  /3,  y). 

62.  Coordinates  of  the  pole  of  a  straight  line  in  respect  to  a 
conic. 

Let  /a+^/3  +  7iy  =  0 

be  the  equation  to  the  straight  line,  and 

0  (a,  A  y)  =  0 

to  that  of  the  conic.     If  (a,  (i,  y)  be  the  coordinates  of  the 
required  point,  then  its  polar,  by  the  last  Article,  is 

da         djj         dy 

and  since  this  is  the  same  as  the  given  line,  we  have 

d(p        d0        d(f) 
da  ___  d(3  _  dy  ^ 

7"  9  ^  ~f^'' 

that  is, 

ua-\-w^l3-\-v^y  _  vl3-\-u^y  +  W-ia  _  wy-[-v^a-\-u^l3 

f  ~  g  ~  h  • 


6Q  TRILINEAR  COORDINATES. 

Patting  eacli  member  =  —s,  we  have 

ua'\-Wi(i-j-v^y-\-sf=  0, 


and  consequently 


p 


f 

9 

h 

Vx 

u^ 

w 

w^ 

V 

u^ 

f     9       h 


V,      u.      w 


y 

f 

9 

h 

^1 

V 

u^ 

u 

w. 

'^l 

wbicli,  with  aa  +  &/3  +  cy  =  2 A, 

determine  the  coordinates  required. 

63.  Centre  of  conic. 

If  the  equation  be       <p  (a,  /3,  y)  =  0, 

and  (oi,  /3i,  y^)  be  the  centre  ;  then  the  roots  of 

0  (aj  +  Si/i,  ft  +  V^  71  + VO  =  ^ 
will  be  equal  and  opposite  in  sign. 

Hence,  since  the  coefficient  of  h  must  vanish  in  the  quadratic, 


therefore 


da^  dpj^  dy^ 


Bearing  in  mind  the  proportionality  of  ^i,  Sg? 
relation  as^  +  hs^  -\-  cs^  =  0, 


that  is,  tbe 


we  have 


c?0         d(^         dip 
da^  __  dfD^  dy^ 


which,  fully  written  out,  will  give  determinants  similar  in 
form  to  those  of  the  last  Article,  with  «,  &,  c  in  place  of 
/,  Qj  hj  and  a^,  /3i,  y^  in  place  of  a,  ft  y. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  67 

64,  The  conic  will  hreah  wp  into  two  right   lines  wlien  we 
have  the  condition 


u       W^     Vj 

v.     u,     w 


0. 


Eor  suppose  the  two  lines  into  which 

0  («,  ^,  y)  =  0 
breaks  np  to  be  represented  by 

/a  +  ^/3  +  ^y  =0, 

Then  will 

0  («,ft  y)  =  {fa  +  gP  +  hy)  (Aa+g,P  +  \y), 

and  g  =f(Aa+g,fi  +  Ky)  +  f^(fa  +  g[i  +  hy), 

with  corresponding  values  for  -^  and  -^.     Hence,  reverting 
to  a  principle  already  explained  (Art.  31), 

da  ^     d(3         ^     dy 

are  straight  lines  which  pass  through  the  intersection  of  the 
given  lines  ;  that  is,  the  lines 

u  a  -{■  w^fi  +  v-^y  =:  0, 
w^a  -\-  V  (3  -\-  u^y  =  0, 
v^a  +  u^P  -\-  wy  ==  0, 

concur,  and  give  the  above  determinant. 

65.  When  some  of  the  four  points  of  intersection  of  two 
conies  become  coincidejit,  some  of  the  common  chords  will 


68 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


coincide ;  others  will  toach.  at  a  common  point,  that  is,  be- 
come tangents.  There  will,  in  general,  be  three  pairs  of 
common  chords  ;  if  two  points  coincide,  the  conies  touch  ;  if 
the  two  remaining  points  also  coincide,  the  conies  have  double 
contact  and  a  chord  of  contact. 


66.  Equation  to  the  asymjptoies. 

From  Art.  64  we  can  easily  form  the  equation  to  any  pair 
of  common  chords.     Thus,  if 

0  («,ft  y)  =  Qa2  +  E/3H^y'  +  2Qi/3y  +  2E,ya-f  2;Sia/3  =  0 
and 
0i(a,/3,y)  =  ua^  ^viD'^wy^-\-2u^(Dy  +  2v^ya-\-2w^ai^  =  0 

represent  the  two  conies,  the  locus  in  question  will  have  the 
equation  (Art.  31), 

^(«,Ay)  +  %(a,/3,y)  =0  (1), 

which  must  be  so  conditioned  in  h  as  to  represent  two  straight 
lines,  hence  (Art.  64)  * 


Rx  +  kv^      Qi  +  hu^     8  +  hw 


=  0. 


If  now    0  (a,  /3,  y)  =  0    breaks   up   into   two   coincident 
straight  lines,  as, 

(fa  +  gft  +  hyy  =  0, 
we  shall  find 


k  = 


u      w^ 


f 


^1 

f 

u. 

9 

w 

h 

h 

0 

(=U), 


W 


i=W), 


*  Ferrers,  p.  85. 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES.  69 

which,  substituted  in  (1),  gives 

^(a,/3,y)Tr+  Cr<^i(a,/3,y)=0, 

or  (fa  +  gP  +  hyyW+  Ucl>,(a,  fi,y)==0    (2). 

This  equation  now  represents,  under  the  above  condition, 
not  a  pair  of  common  chords,  but  a  pair  of  common  tangents 
whose  chord  of  contact  is 

fa  +  gl3  +  hy=zO. 

We  have  now  only  to  introduce  the  condition  that  the  chord 
of  contact  is  at  infinity  ;  that  is,  that 

aa+fe/3  +  cy  =  0; 
;  wherefore  (2)  becomes 


Jaai-hP  +  cyy 


+  fi  (a,  /3,  y) 

u     w^    v^     a 

u\   V     i»i    h 

v^     U-^    w     c 

a     h      c     0 

=  0, 


rhich  is  the  equation  of  the  asymptotes. 


I 

^B  Cor.  1. — Since  every  parabola  has  one  tangent  altogether  at 
an  infinite  distance,  the  vanishing  of  the  second  determinant 
in  the  above  equation  expresses  the  condition  that  the  conic 
may  be  a  parabola.* 

Cor.  2. — The  conic  will  be  a  rectangular  hyperbola  when 
the  asymptotes  are  at  right  angles  to  one  another ;  that  is, 
when  (Art.  14)  the  two  straight  lines  into  which  the  conic 
breaks  are  subject  to  the  condition  of  perpendicularity, 

11^  — (mn^ -{- m^n)  cos  A  +  mm-i^—(nli  +  n^l)  cos  B 

+  ^Wj— (Zm^  +  Zim)  cos  G. 
In  other  words,  if  the  conic  be 

01  («,  ft  y)  =  0, 
*  Salmon's  Conies,  p.  224. 


70  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

the  required  condition  becomes 

u-\-v-\-w—2ui  cos  A  —  2vi  cos  B—^w^  cos  (7  =  0. 

Def.  —  TF  is  called  tlie  discriminant  of  the  function 
^j  (a,  /3,  y),  and  U  the  bordered  discriminant  of  the  same 
function  (D.  43),  where  f,  g,  h,  as  the  coefficients  of  a,  /3,  y, 

are  =  tt--,    -— -,    r— -  respectively.     For  the  conic, 
2A     2A     2A        ^  -^ 

W  =  ?m?^, 

Z7  =  —  (a^mw  +  &^wZ  +  c^ Zm)  -— ^  . 

4A^ 

Numerous  other  functions  may  be  determined. 

67.  Space  does  not  permit  extended  illustration  of  the  use 
of  the  abridged  notation  thus  far  exhibited.  The  reader  can 
easily  apply  it.  For  instance,  if  the  function  be  (p^  (a,  |(3,  y), 
and  we  wish  to  express  the  equation  of  the  straight  line  at 
infinity  in  terms  of  the  derived  functions,  the  required  equa- 
tion might  be  written 

and  since  aa  +  h^  +  cy  =  0  (1) 

represents  the  straight  line  at  infinity,  we  have 

iif+  w^g-^- vji  _  Wif-\- vg  +  '^Ji '^i/'+  % 9  +  ^^^ 

a     ,  b  c  * 

These  equivalents  represented  hj  —Tc  give  us 

uf-^-  w^g  +  v-^Ji  -\-  ah  =■  0 (2),j 

w^f  ■{■  V  g  ■\-  u^h  +  hh  =  0 (3), 

■^iZ+^i^  +  wh-\-ch  =  0 (4)^ 


TEILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


71 


Eliminating  now  between  (1),  (2),  (3),  (4),  we  obtain 
the  condition  that  the  minors  of  the  bordered  discriminant  in 
respect  to  its  f^  g,  Ji  are  proportional  to  jT,  ^,  Ti  of  the  given 
equation,  which  minors  being  represented  by  A^  JB,  0,  the 
equation  becomes 

da  djo  dy 

as  the  straight  line  at  infinity. 


68.  The  equation  of  the  nine-point  circle. 
We  first  find  the  condition  that  the  conic 

ly  represent  a  circle.     If  the  conic  be  a  circle,  /  (^j,  ^g,  53) 
constant,  that  is,  all  diameters  will  be  equal ;  and  since,  in 
le  equation  for  finding  the  lengths  of  the  intercepts, 

/(«,  A  r)  +  ^  («i  f  + «.  J  +  h  J)  +  V/(«i,  h,  s,)  =  0, 

le  coefficient  of  h  vanishes,  we  have 

rhich  gives  the  radius  in  the  given  direction.    To  reduce  this, 
re  may  express  the  condition  that  diameters  in  three  direc- 
ions  (that  is,  directions  of  the  lines  of  reference)  are  equal. 
We  have,  therefore,  to  express  this, 

^,  ^/(«.fty)  _/(«,fty)_/(«,/3,y) 

/(<»)  f(y)  fi")    ' 

'herefore  /(*)  =/(y)  =/(«)  ; 

)r,  for  direction  of  BO, 

«,  =  0,     82  =  81110,     85  =  — sin  B. 
Lence  /W  =/(0,  c, -i). 


72  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

Similarly,  for  OA  and  AB^ 

f(y)=f(.-c,    0,  a), 

from  the  proportionality  of  sin  A,  sin  B,  sin  G. 
Hence  we  have  the  two  conditions, 

v('^-\-wh'^—2u^bc  =  wa?  +  uc^—2vj^ca  =  uh'^+va^^2w^ah. 

In  the  second  place,  we  see  that,  if  the  curve  pass  through 
the  middle  points  of  the  sides  of  reference,  a,  ^,  y  must  in 
succession  be  taken  =  0  ;  whence 

VG'^+wh^  +  2u^hcz=  0  ^ 

wa?-\-uc^  +  2v^ca  =  0   \    (1), 

uh^-]-va^-\-2w^ah  =  0  J 

which  follows  from  the  condition  involved,  that 

ip  =  cy  =  aa. 

Comparing  the  two  sets  of  equations,  we  find 

w\ab  =:ViGa  =■  u-J}c. 

Hence,  if  equations  (1)  are  true,  they  will  hold  whatever  the 
value  of -Wj.     Let  u-^=l  —a. 

The  resolution  of  these  equations  gives 

w  =  2a  cos  A, 

V  =  2b  cos  J5, 

w  =  2c  cos  C. 

Hence  the  circle  which  passes  through  the  middle  points  of 
the  sides  of  reference  (tJie  nine-point  circle)  becomes 

a^  sin  A  cos  A  +  /3^  sin  B  cosB  -{-  y  ■  sin  C  cos  G 

—  (jy  sin  ^  —  ya  sin  5  —  a/3  sin  (7  =  0, 

or     a^  sin  2A  +  (S^  sin  2B  +  y^  sin  2(7 

-  2i3y  sin  J.  ~  2ya  sin  ^  -  2a/3  sin  (7  =  0.        ■ 


TRILINEAR   COORPINATES.  73 

COE.  1. — If  now   a  =  0, 

(P  sin  2B  +  y'  sin  2(7  -  2/3y  sin  ^  =  0. 
But  since  2  sin  J.  =  2  sin  (1?-|-  (7), 

/32  sin  25  +  y2  sin  2(7  -  2/3y  (sin  5  cos  (7  +  sin  0  cos  5)  =  0. 
This  breaks  up  into  tlie  factors 

(/3  sin  5  —  y  sin  (7)  (/3  cos  5  —  y  cos  (7)  =  0. 
The  circle  therefore  meets  BG  in  two  points. 
The  one  when,  by  the  hypothesis, 

a  =  0,     biJ  =■  cy,     i.  e.,  /3  sin  5  =  y  sin  G, 
which  determines  the  middle  of  BG. 
The  other  is  evidently  when 

a  =  0,     /3  cos  B  =  y  cos  (7, 

the  foot  of  the  perpendicular  from  A.     Similarly  for  the  other 
sides. 

Cor.  2. — The  last  equation  of  this  Article  shows  that  the 
nine-point  circle  passes  through  the  points  of  intersection  of 
the  circumscribed  circle  and  the  circle  in  respect  to  which  the 
triangle  of  reference  is  self-conjugate. 

Cor.  3. — The  difference  between  the  equations  of  the  cir- 
cumscribed circle  and  the  circle  through  the  middle  points  of 
the  sides  of  the  triangle  is 

a  cos  A  -\-  3  cos  J5  +  y  cos  (7  =  0    multiplied  by  a  constant, 

since  a^  sin  2A  +  /3^  sin  2B  +  y"  sin  2(7 

=  (a  COS  A-\-  p>  cos  -B  -f  y  COS  (7)  (a  sin  J.  +  /3  sin  5  +  y  sin  (7). 

But  a  sin  A  ■\-  pt  sin  -B  +  y  sin  (7  is  a  constant,  and  there- 
fore a  cos  J  +  /3  cos  B  •\-  y  cos  (7  =  0  is  their  radical  axis, 
or  the  homological  axis  of  the  triangle  of  reference  and  that 
formed  by  joining  the  feet  of  the  perpendiculars. 

Cor.  4.  —  By  similar  reasoning  we  find  that  the  same 
circle  passes  through  the  middle  points  of  the  sides  of  the 


74 


TRILINEAR  COORDINATES. 


triangles  of  which  the  point  of  intersection  of  perpendictdars 
is  the  vertex.     Nine  points  are  therefore  determined. 


POLAR  RECIPROCALS. 

69.  Reciprocation — the  principle  of  duality,  or  that  analysis 
(or  synthesis)  which,  while  determining  the  distribution  of 
points,  coordinately  fixes  the  position  of  lines — though  of  great 
interest,  is  altogether  too  large  a  subject  for  this  Tract.  Some 
theorems  may  be  introduced.  In  general,  we  may  say  that 
to  reciprocate  involves  interchanging  "angular  points"  for 
"sides,"  "inscribing"  for  "circumscribing,"  "join"  for  "in- 
tersect," &G.  &G. 

For  instance,  if  the  well-known  theorem,  that  "  If  two 
triangles  be  inscribed  in  a  conic,  their  sides  will  be  tangent  to 
a  conic,"  be  reciprocated,  we  may  write,  "  If  two  triangles  cir- 
cumscribe one  conic,  their  vertices  will  lie  on  a  conic." 

This  proof  and  its  reciprocal  may  be  exhibited  by  a  common 
process  in  triangular  and  tangential  coordinates  (Arts.  24,  27). 
Let  vertices  of  one  triangle  (sides  of  the  same)  be  represented 
Ijy  (Pi^  ?i»  n),  (P25  ^2,  ^2):  (P&,  ^35  ^'3)  ;  let  the  other  be  the 
triangle  of  reference,  and  suppose 

/(_p,  q,r)=0 

the  tangential  equation  of  the  conic  passing  through  the  points 
of  reference;   or  the  equation   may  be  represented  in  both 

systems  by  Iqr -\- mpr -\- npq  =  0. 

Then  the  equations  to  the  one  triangle  will  be 

Ip         mq    .    nr   __  ^ 
r^Ps       g'2  23      ''2  ^^3 
Ip    ^  mq    ^    nr   ^  ^^ 


g'3?i 

mq 


ly>     ^    mq    ^    nr  _  ^^ 


TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 


75 


By  comparing  (Arts.  56,  57),  we  see  that  by  this  form  of 
representation  the  inscribed  conic  (circumscribing)  may  be 
expressed  by 

\/^+  v/%+  ^Nr  =  0 ; 

that  is,  this  conic  will  be  inscribed  in  (circumscribe)  both 
triangles  provided  the  conditions  of  tangency  be  satisfied, 


Lp^^  +  -^^2^3  _|_  NTYh 


0 


I  m  n 

^VxVi  ^  -^^19^2  ^_  -^^n^2  _  Q 
I  m  n 


(!)• 


But  since  the  given  points  (pi,  q-^^  r^,  &c.),  (vertices), 
lie  by  hypothesis  on  the  conic,  the  condition  must  be  ex- 
pressed by 

1       1       1     =0, 


I 


Pi 

^1 

n 

1 

1 

1 

B 

^2 

ra 

1 

1 

1 

B 

^3 

^3 

which  condition  satisfies  equations  (1),  and  proves  the  theorem 
and  its  reciprocal.  The  determinant  follows,  it  is  evident,  as 
the  eliminant  of  the  equations. 


l^ 

+ 

in 

+ 

n 

.— 

o> 

Vx 

^1 

r. 

^ 

+ 

m 

+ 

n 

— 

0, 

P2 

^2 

'^2 

l_ 

+ 

m 

+ 

n 



0. 

B 

^3 

n 

76  TRILINEAR   COORDINATES. 

70.  If  m,  w,  p,  q  are  the  poles  of  the  sides  of  a  polygon 
abed,  then  the  points  a,  6,  c,  d  are  the  poles  of  the  sides  of 
the  polygon  mnpq. 

The  conic  with  respect  to  which  the  poles  and  polars  are 
taken  is  the  auxiliary  conic. 

TJie  7'eciprocal  of  a  conic  is  a  conic. 

By  Art.  60,  the  polar  is  given  by 

da         d(i         ay 

If  therefore  (/,  g,  h)  be  any  point  on  the  reciprocal  curve, 
its  polar  with  respect  to  the  auxiliary  conic, 

Ua'+Vfi'+Wy'  =  0 (1), 

will  be  given  by  the  equation 

Ufa  +  VgP-^Why  =  0 (2). 

Let  the  conic  to  be  reciprocated  be 

la^  +  ml^'  +  ny^  =  0     (3). 

To  find  the  condition  that  (2)  may  touch  (3),  we  eliminate 
a  between  the  equation  of  the  conic  and  the  line  ;  and  if  the 
line  be  a  tangent,  the  values  of  /3  :  y  must  be  equal  (Art.  57), 
and  we  obtain 

I  m  n  ' 

This  being  of  the  second  degree,  giving  two  points  of  intersec- 
tion of  the  straight  line,  is  a  conic,  and  is  the  reciprocal  of  (3) 
with  respect  to  (1). 

71.  Two  straight  lines  are  conjugate  when  each  passes 
through  the  pole  of  the  other.  Required  to  express  this  con- 
dition.    Let  fi^  +  g3  +  Ky  =  ^, 

f^a-^g^fj  +  h^y  =  0, 


TRILINEAB  COORDINATES. 


11 


the  two  lines.     Then  (Art.  62)  we  may  express  the  condi- 
)n  by  the  equation 


da^ 

d^ 
dud(3 

d^(l> 
dady 

d\ 
dp  da 

dF(f> 

d\ 
dpdy 

d'(p 

d^<p 

d^ 

/l 


91 


dyda     dydft        dy^ 

it        92       K      0 


=  0, 


^here 


0  («j  A  y)  =  ua^+v^^  +  ivy^-^  &c. 


London :  Printed  by  C.  F.  Hodgson  &  Son,  Gough  Square,  Fleet  Street  B.C. 


ICAL    TEACTS, 


No.  III. 


INVARIANTS. 


4:* 


'-^^t-i^         '7^    C 


^. 


!%n. 


^  C- 


TEAOTS 


Al^. 


/<P3^^ 


RELATING   TO    THE 


MODEM  HIGHER  MATHEMATICS. 


TRACT  No,  3. 
INVARIANTS. 


BY 


Rev.  W.  J.  WRIGHT,  Ph.D., 

MEMBER  OF  THE  LONDON  MATHEMATICAL  SOCIETY. 


Plato,  Rep.  VII.,  527,  *. 


LONDON: 
0.  F.  HODGSON  &  SON,  GOUGH  SQUARE, 

FLEET    STREET. 
1879. 


My  acknowledgments  are  due  to  R.  Tucker,  Esq.,  M.A.,  Honorary 
Secretary  of  the  London  Mathematical  Society,  for  valuable  assistance 
rendered  in  passing  these  sheets  through  the  press. — W.  J.  W. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Symmetric  Functions  of  the  Differences  of  Eoots 

Eliminant  by  Symmetric  Functions         

Discriminants 


PAGB 

7 

12 
16. 


CHAPTER  II. 

Invariant  of  the  Binary  Cubic 

covariants        -        

Emanants         

contravariants  

CHAPTER  III. 

Canonical  Forms 
Canonizants 
Combinants 
Tact-Invariants 
Absolute  Invariants 
Series  of  Covariants 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Computation  of  Invariants 

Self-Conjugate  Triangle 

Locus  of  the  Intersection  of  Normals.... 
Equation  of  the  Four  Common  Tangents 
Theory  of  Foci  


21 

24 

25 

28 

39 

41 

44 

46 

48 

50 

56 

57 

60 

67 

74 

PREFACE  TO  TEACT  NO.  III. 


This  Tract  takes  up  the  general  Theory  of  Invariants. 

It  is  published  in  pursuance  of  a  purpose,  announced  in 
the  first  number  of  this  series,  to  give  an  account  of  the 
principal  new  methods,  processes,  and  extensions  which, 
since  1841,  have  been  introduced  into  the  study  of  Ma- 
thematics. The  chief  requisite  to  this  undertaking,  which 
undoubtedly  is  one  of  considerable  magnitude,  is  evidently 
a  sufficiently  comprehensive  reading  upon  these  various 
subjects.    • 

The  English,  German,  French,  and  Italian  Mathema- 
ticians have  contributed  to  their  journals  and  learned 
societies  innumerable  memoirs  and  treatises,  whose  value 
and  bearing  upon  the  matter  in  hand  the  reader  cannot 
determine  without  some  degree  of  careful  examination. 
It  also  frequently  happens  that  the  time  consumed  in 
tracing  a  fugitive  paper  is  in  inverse  ratio  to  its  impor- 
tance. 

The  reader  who  wishes  to  read  fully  upon  this  Theory 
may  adopt  one  of  two  methods.  He  may  begin  at  the  be- 
ginning, reading  in  order  of  time  the  papers  of  its  chief 
authors  and  expounders,  commencing  with  the  essay  of 
the  late  Dr.  Boole  in  the  Cambridge  Mathematical  Jour- 


VI  PREFACE. 

nal  for  18il,  and  follow  this  with  the  numerous  papers  of 
living  authors — Sylvester,  Cayley,  Hermite^  and  Salmon — 
papers  extending  through  the  subsequent  volumes  of  the 
Cambridge  and  the  Cambridge  and  Dublin  Mathematical 
Journals,  and  the  Philosophical  Magazine,  together  with 
the  various  contributions  of  Clebsch  and  Aronhold,  and 
others,  in  Crelle,  from  Vol.  39  to  Vol.  69.  Or  he  may  take 
a  reverse  course^  beginning  with  the  Lessons  of  Salmon^ 
and  those  of  Serret,  on  Modern  Higher  Algebra,  which, 
as  compends  of  this  and  connecting  Theories,  are  in  the 
main  works  of  great  excellence,  though  oftentimes  not  as 
clear  and  satisfactory  as  could  be  desired,  or  as  full  and 
explicit  as  may  be  found  elsewhere ;  and  then  he  may 
extend  his  reading  to  the  Journals  above  mentioned, 
together  with  the  proceedings  of  the  contemporaneous 
societies  —  as  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  Comptes 
Rendus,  &c.  But,  whatever  course  he  may  take,  he  will 
doubtless  never  be  able  clearly  to  determine  to  what 
authorship  he  is  to  ascribe  some  parts  and  illustrations  of 
the  Theory. 

The  best  reading-room  for  this  work,  so  far  as  I  can 
judge,  after  an  experience  of  nearly  two  years  in  European 
libraries,  is  that  of  the  British  Museum. 

In  view  of  the  extensive  literature  upon  this  subject, 
it  may  be  asked,  what  can  be  accomplished  by  a  work  of 
the  size  of  this  Tract  ?  Its  actual  value,  evidently,  remains 
to  be  seen;  but  I  believe  that  within  these  pages  the 
reader  wiU  find  such  an  account  of  the  Theory  as  will 
enable  him  to  gain  a  knowledge  of  its  principal  proposi- 
tions, and  also  to  judge,  from  the  explained  applications. 


PfiXFAd.  yn 

of  its  real  valae  in  Greometry.  The  compntalions  of  In- 
variants, Chapter  IV.,  will  afford  snch  a  gnide  in  the 
arioos  applications  that  he  will  probably  be  at  litlle  loss 
in  extending  them  at  his  pleasure.  I  have  been  desiroos 
of  making  these  calculations  so  foUy^  that  no  one  wiUi  a 
fair  geometrical  knowledge  need  fail  of  understanding 
how  each  result  was  obtained.  Nowhere  else  can  sndi 
work  be  found  in  so  elementary  a  form,  and  for  this 
reason  I  hope  it  may  proYe  acceptable  to  those  persons 
whose  time  and  opporkmities  <^  stud^  are  somewh^ 
limited,  and  to  those  also  who  are  unwilling  to  obtain  and 
"0  read  the  larger  works. 

In  reviewing  the  notes  whidi  I  had  taken  of  the  prin- 
cipal contributions  to  this  Theoiy,  I  found  that  I  had  fre- 
quently omitted  the  proper  credits,  either  through  sheer 
n^l»;t^  or  want  of  sufficient  knowledge;  and  hence,  with- 
out attempting  to  supply  these  omissions^  as  could  not 
weQ  be  done  in  the  absence  of  the  books  and  journals,  it 
was  concluded  to  omit  them  nearly  altogether. 

The  number  of  persons  who  have  obtained  the  preced- 
ing  Tracts  of  this  series,  and  who  have  expressed  them- 
s^es  in  terms  highty  &yorable  to  thdr  publication,  is 
deemed  sufficient  evidence  that  they  are  meeting  a  public 
want.  One  thing  which  was  e^qiected  has  certainly  fol- 
lowed,— a  goodly  number  of  my  countiymen  have  been 
awakfflied  to  look,  for  the  first  time,  upon  a  Tsst  on- 
traveraed  domain  of  mathematical  knowledge.  To  tiiese 
persons,  at  leasts  tiieare  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  tlie  direction 
of  thegoaL  It  is  now  deartyand  definitely  fixed  that 
maUiematical  researdies  wiD^  fiur  a  k»g  time  to  come;,  be 


Vlll 


PREFACE. 


mainly  conducted  through  the  media  of  methods  and 
processes,  to  whose  exposition  these  Tracts  are  devoted. 
The  time  is  not  far  distant,  if  it  has  nob  already  arrived, 
when  a  knowledge  of  these  subjects  will  be  considered  as 
necessary  to  the  equipment  of  a  mathematician  as  the 
Calculus.  It  is  not  meant  by  this,  that  it  is  the  duty  of 
every  mathematician  to  make  a  specialty  of  algebraic 
forms,  either  with  or  without  their  geometrical  interpre- 
tation. But  it  is  meant  that  the  modern  treatment  of  the 
Higher  Geometry  should  be  studied  as  a  part  of  the  general 
preparation  necessary  to  a  student  of  Physical  Science. 


Cape  May  Point,  N.J.: 
April,  1879. 


W.  J.  w. 


INVARIANTS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

PROLEGOMENA. 

1.  The  Theory  of  Invariants,  as  will  appear,  is  based  upon  a 
knowledge  of  the  General  Theory  of  Equations  and  several  of 
its  later  important  extensions.  Some  of  these  extensions  must 
be  stated,  because,  although  perhaps  familiar  to  the  reader  as 
commonly  or  formerly  expressed,  they  may  not  be  easily 
recognised  in  their  modern  dress  or  terminology;  others, 
because  they  have  no  existence  outside  of  their  present  form. 

2.  Symmetric  Functions, — If  the  general  equation  be 

the  Newtonian  formulas  give  us 

Si  =  —cLi,     S2=al  —  2ai, 

8^  =  — %  +  Ba^a^  —  Sag,  &c., 
or,  as  they  are  written  by  Hirsch,  Cayley,  and  others, 

Sa       =-«!, 

2a2     =      a? -2%;       2a/3  =  a^, 

Sa'     =— «!  +3aia2— Saj, 

Sa^/3  =—^1^2  + 3%, 

Sa/3y=— ag,  &c. ; 

in  which  we  have  expressed  the  sum  of  the  roots  and  the  sum 
of  their  products  by  twos,  by  threes,  &c. 

3.  If  we  consider  any  one  of  these  products,  as  a-^a^,  we  say 
that  its  weight  is  1  +  2,  or,  in  general,  that  the  weight  of  any 
term  is  the  sum  of  the  suffixes.    Looking  at  these  functions, 

B 


8  INVARIANTS. 

however  far  we  may  extend  them,  we  see  that  they  are  sym- 
metrical as  to  weight.  The  order  is  estimated  by  the  number 
of  factors  in  each  term.  Hence  a^a^a^  is  of  the  third  order, 
and  its  weight  is  1  +  2  +  3.  This  being  stated,  it  is  easy  to 
see,  by  inspection  of  the  several  functions  written  above,  that 
the  weight  of  Sa^/3"  is  t  +  u,  and  the  order  the  greater  of  t,  u. 
The  order  of  Sa/3y  (being  the  sum  of  the  products  in  threes) 
can  evidently  be,  so  far  as  the  coefficients  of  the  given  equa- 
tion are  concerned,  only  unity.  If,  therefore,  we  regard  a  as 
the  leading  root,  appearing  in  every  function,  we  might  predi- 
cate the  degree  of  the  function  upon  the  degree  of  a.  In  this 
case  any  symmetric  function  of  the  p**^  order  must  contain 
more  or  less  terms  involving  a^.  There  will  then  be  p  factors 
each  including  a.  Hence  2a^,  Sa^/^y  are  each  of  the  third 
order  in  the  coefficients  of  the  given  equation;  that  is,  the 
highest  order  in  any  term  is  three.  In  general,  then,  the 
order  of  any  symmetric  function  is  determined  by  the  highest 
degree  in  any  one  root,  while  the  weight  is  estimated  by  the 
total  degree  of  the  roots  as  factors.  The  literal  part,  then,  of 
any  symmetric  function  can  thus  be  at  once  written  out.  For 
the  sake  of  clearness,  it  is  necessary  to  notice  that  the  functions 
of  roots  in  this  manner  may  be  expressed  in  terms  of  the 
coefficients  of  the  given  equation,  as  will  be  seen  by  solving 
the  linear  equations  just  written  for  /S^,  8^,  &c. ;  and,  con- 
sequently, any  function  of  the  differences  of  roots  can  be> 
expressed  in  the  same  terms. 

3.  8ym7netric  functions  of  the  differences  of  roots. — These  we 
shall  see  are  invariants.  For  the  present  let  us  consider  what 
relation  such  functions  ought  to  satisfy.  We  begin  by  observ- 
ing the  effect  upon  the  coefficients  of  the  given  equation  of 
increasing  or  diminishing  all  the  roots  by  the  same  quantity. 
There  will  plainly  be  no  change  in  the  resulting  functions  of 
the  differences  of  roots.  Let  then  x  +  l  he  substituted  for  a?, 
and  we^have 

«'>  +  («i  +  wO  ^'*'^ 

tla,+  (n-l)la,  +  ^n(n-l)l']x''-'  +  &c.  =  0. 


INVARIANTS.  9 

Next,  observe  the  form  of  any  function/  of  the  coefficients 
«i,  ^2,  ^3,  &c.,    when   a^,  cig,  &c.   are   changed   into   a^  +  da^j 

This  form  will  be 

But,  by  the  substitution  of  a;  +  Z  for  x,  a^  becomes  a^  +  nl^  and 
^2  becomes  a^^+in—V)  la^-\-\n  (w— 1)  1?. 

Clearly,  then,  if  this  substitution  were  made  in  any  function 
of  the  coefficients  %,  a^,  &c.,  and  the  result  arranged  with 
reference  to  Z,  we  must  have,  by  (1), 

/+Z  L  J£-4- (^_1)  a,  J/L +(^_2)  a2#1 +&C.  =  0. 
L     da^  da^  da^J 

This  is  true  whatever  I  may  be. 

Let  1  =  0,  and  we  have,  as  the  condition  which  any  function 
of  the  differences  will  satisfy, 

da^  da^  da^ 

This  relation  is  both  necessary  and  sufficient  in  order  that  the 
given  function  of  the  coefficients  should  remain  unchanged  by 
the  substitution  of  aj  +  Z  for  x  in  the  given  equation. 

We  can  now  write,  not  only  the  literal  part,  but  the  coeffi- 
cients of  any  symmetric  function.  For  instance,  if  we  are  to 
form  2  (i3— y)^  we  see  that  its  order  is  2  and  its  weight  2. 
There  can  be  no  more  than  two  factors  in  any  term,  while  the 
weight  for  each  term  must  be  2.  It  must  be  of  the  form 
Aa<^-{-Ba\ .     By  the  above  differential  equation, 

lA{n-l)-\-2nB']a^  =  0. 

n  —  \ 
This  ffives  B  •= -r — ,  when  J.  =  1 ;  or  the  function  can 

differ  by  only  a  factor  from  {n  —  1)  a^  —  2na^. 

B  2 


10  INVARIANTS. 

We  may  see  fhat  this  factor  is  unity  by  supposing  y  =  1 
and  the  other  roots  0 ;  then  flg  =  0 ;  and  a^  =  1,  since 
a  +  /3-f  &c.  =  %,  and  a  {p-\-y-]-&c.)+l3y  +  &c.=  a^, 

4.  The  homogeneous  equation 

(%,  (^i  a,,)  (a;,  2/)" 

or      aoaj**  +  ?iaiaj'*~^2/  +  Jw(7i— 1)  a2aj""y+ +  «„2/''  =  0 

reduces  to  the  general  equation  of  Art.  2  by  dividing  by  a^y"*. 
And  it  is  plain  that  the  differential  equation  of  the  last  Article 
will  undergo  a  corresponding  change.  Hence,  for  the  substi- 
tution of  x  +  l  for  X,  we  must  write 

fto  #-  +  2^1  -^  +3a2  -^  +&C.  =  0, 
da^  da^  da^ 

while  for  the  substitution  y-\-l  for  y  it  must  be  written  in  a 
reverse  order,  that  is, 

na^-^-^{n-l)  a,-^  +  (n-2)  a,-^  +&c.  =  0. 
da^  rfaj  da^ 

5.  The  symmetric  function  of  the  homogeneous  equation  in  — . — 
Suppose  a  one  of  the  roots,  then  —  =  a.    That  is,  any  system 

of  values,  as  — ^  =  a,   in  other  words,  any  ratio  which  is  =  a, 

will  satisfy  the  homogeneous  equation.  Or,  we  may  state  it 
thus :  any  symmetric  function  expressed  in  terms  of  its  roots, 
as  a?i,  x^,  cBg,  &c.,  may  be  reduced  to  the  corresponding  func- 
tion of  a  homogeneous  equation  of  the  same  degree,  by  dividing 
each  a?!,  X2,  &c.  by  y^,  y^,  &c.,  and  then  multiplying  this 
result  by  any  power  of  y-^y^^  &c.  that  will  clear  it  of  fractions. 
Hence  we  may  write  any  function  of  the  differences  as  the 
sum  of  products  of  determinants 

«i    2/1     X     ^i    Vi     &c.  X  (yiyi&c.y, 
«2    2/2  ^3    2/3 


INVARIANTS.  11 

where  n  =  the  variable  power  necessary  to  clear  of  fractions. 
Thus,  to  form  for  (a,  b,  c,  d)  (x,  yf  the  sum  of  the  products 
of  the  squares  of  the  differences  of  the  roots,  we  have  the 
ratios,  or  roots, 

^1         ^2         ^3 

2/l'  2/2'  2/3' 

that  is, 


aji 

2/1 

^X 

X2 

2/2 

'X 

x^ 

2/3 

«2 

2/2 

X, 

2/3 

x^ 

2/1 

-i'        In  this  case  the  order  is  4  and  weight  6. 
i  The  form  is  therefore 

^  Aa^ao  -{-Ba^a^a^aQ  +  Ga^ai  +  D^  0^0  + -^^2  «i (!)• 

f'       Operating  with     a.— \-2a-,  — l-Sa,  -; — >  ^^  g^t 

f  c^cti  c2a-2  da^ 

(B  +  6A)  a^a^al  +  (3(7+25)  a^al  a^ 
^'  +(2^+6D  +  3J5)a^aiao+ (4:^7  +  30)  a^ctj  =  0, 

J       which  gives  us,  taking  J.=:  1,  and  equating  each  term  to  0, 
M  5  =  -6,     (7=4,  &c.  ; 

or^  since  ^q  =  a  and  a^  =  d,  we  have 
]  a'd:'-6ahcd-^Wd-^4iac'-Wc\ 

<  The  result  would  be  the  same  had  we  required  the  product 

of  the  squares  of  the  differences 

I  The  order  being  the  same,  4,  and  the  weight  also  6,  the  form 

I  ^     would  be 

I —  Aa^  +  Ba^a^a-^  +  Ga^a^  +  Ba^,  +  Ea2  %  . 

[  '         To  render  this  homogeneous,  as  if  derived  from  a  homo- 
5       geneous  equation  in  x^  y,  each  factor  must  be  divided  by  a^,, 
and  the  whole  multiplied  by  the  highest  power  of  %  in  any 
denominator.     It  would  then  be  identical  with  (1). 


12  INVARUNTS. 

6.  The  eliminant*  or  resultant  of  a  system  of  equations  is 
that  function  of  the  coefficients  whose  vanishing  expresses 
that  the  equations  are  simultaneous.  If  we  have  as  many 
independent  equations  as  we  have  variables,  we  can  ordin- 
arily, by  direct  elimination,  arrive  at  such  a  function  freed 
from  any  of  the  assumed  variables.  This  function  is  generally 
indicated  by  A. 

7.  Eliminant  by  symmetric  functions. — The  product  of  the 
several  roots  of  an  equation  is  a  symmetric  function,  as  Sa/3y 
or  Sa^/3.  If  we  have  a,  /3,  y  as  the  roots  of  the  equation 
f(x)  =0,  and  a,  (j^,  y^  as  the  roots  of  /^  (a;)  =  0,  then,  since 
they  have  a  common  root  a,  the  eliminant  condition  is  involved. 

If  the  first  set  of  roots  be  substituted  in  the  second  equation, 
fi{x),  the  result  for  the  value  a  will  vanish;  therefore  the 
continued  product 

/.(a)X/.(«X/.(r) 

will  vanish  ;  and  consequently  will  conform  to  the  definition  of 
an  eliminant,  since  it  is  plain,  being  a  symmetric  function  of 
the  roots  of  f(x),  it  can  be  expressed  in  terms  of  the  given 
coefficients  of  f(x)  =  0  and  /^  (x)  =  0,  however  they  may  be 
written. 

From  this  it  is  seen  that  the  eliminant  is  a  function  of  the 
difierences  of  the  roots  of  the  two  or  more  equations. 

If  the  equations  are  homogeneous,  f(x,  y)  =  0,  f^  (x,  y)  =  0, 
they  may  be  treated  as  non-homogeneous  by  dividing  each 
equation  by  the  coefficient  of  the  highest  power  of  x  and  the 
highest  power  of  y.  To  illustrate  this  form  of  operation,  let 
us  find  the  eliminant  of 

aa3'+  ^hxy-Y  cy""  =  0 (1), 

a,x^  +  2b,xy-{-cy  =  0 (2), 

*  Thus      U      *  I  =  0,     \a     c  \^-\b      c\x\a      *|  =  0 

are  determinant  expressions  for  the  eliminants  of 

ax  +b   =  0  .     ax^+bx  +c  =0      j.psT)Potivplv 

a,x  +  b,  =  0     ^"""^    a,x  +  b,x  +  ci  =  0     respectively. 


INVARIANTS.  13 

or,  written  in  the  non-homogeneous  form, 

0^  +  72^  +  %  =0,      z^-\-mz-{-mi  =  0. 

The  symmetric  function  is  then 

(u^  +  ma  +  mj)  (fP  +  ml3  +  m{)  =  0, 
or 

aV^  +  mal3  (a  +  /3)  +  m^  (a^  +  i3')  +  m^afi  +  mm^  (.ci-\-(i)'i-  m\  =  0, 

But     a^^-\Z^  =  n^-2n^  (Art.  2),     a;3  =  w^,     a+/3=:— w. 

Hence  (%— mi)^  +  (??2— w-)(nim— ^imj)  =  0. 

Giving  m,  n^  m^,  w^  their  values,  we  have 

or  (^ca-^—c^ay  +  4i(h-^a  —  ha-^(h^c  —  hc-^)  =  ^j 

the  eliminant.  This  method  is  useful  in  this  place  simply  as 
an  exercise  in  symmetric  functions.  In  practice,  it  would  be 
far  easier  to  eliminate  directly. 

8.  The  order. — By  inspecting  this  example  and  others,  we 
are  enabled  to  determine  inductively  the  order  of  the  eliminant 
in  the  coefficients.  The  symmetric  function  consists  of  as  many 
factors  as  there  are  units  in  the  degree  of  the  first  equation, 
but  each  of  these  factors  involves  the  coefficients  of  the  second 
in  the  first  degree.  On  the  other  hand,  the  entire  product 
consists  of  the  several  symmetric  functions  of  the  roots  of  the 
first  equation,  and  the  highest  degree  of  these  is  the  same  as 
that  of  the  second  equation  ;  hence  it  is  evident  that  the  orders 
of  the  coefficients  in  the  eliminant  are  the  same  as  those  of  the 
^ven  equations,  but  taken  in  an  inverse  order ;  that  is,  the  co- 
efficients of  the  first  equation  have  the  order  of  the  second,  and 

le  contrary. 

If,  for  instance,  there  were  three  homogeneous  equations  in 
bhree  variables  of  the  2nd,  ord,  and  4th  orders,  then  the  eliminant 

^ould  be  a  homogeneous  function  of  the  12th  order  in  the  co- 


14  INVARIANTS. 

efficients  of  the  first  equation,  of  the  8tli  in  those  of  the  second, 
and  of  the  6th  in  those  of  the  third. 

9.  The  weight. — It  is  not  so  easy  to  determine  the  weight.  But 
we  may  begin  by  considering  that  the  elirainant  is  a  symmetric 
function  of  the  differences  between  the  roots  of  the  first  and 
second  equations  expressed  in  terms  of  their  cofficients,  and 
then  the  number  of  these  diSerences  is  equal  to  the  product  of 
the  orders  of  the  equations.  If  we  multiply  each  root  by  any 
factor  as  Tc,  we  do,  in  efiect,  multiply  each  difierence  by  h  ;  and 
consequently,  the  eliminant,  which  is  the  product  of  these 
differences,  is  multiplied  by  A;  to  a  power  equal  to  the  product 
of  the  degrees  of  the  equations.  Now,  each  root  in  the 
equations 

a^x''  +  na^x''-^y  +  \n{n—l)  a^x''-^y^  +  &c.  =  0 (1), 

h^x"^ -\-mh^x'"-'^ y -^^m  (7n-l)  h^x'^-^if  +  ^c.  =  0...  (2), 

will,  it  is  evident,  be  multiplied  by  Ic  when  we  multiply  a-^,  \ ; 
ftg.  ^2  5  ^y  ^)  ^^»  <^c. ;  and  therefore  each  term  of  the  eliminant 
would  involve  k  to  the  mn^^  degree.  In  this  manner  we  can 
readily  determine  the  weight  of  each  term,  which  we  shall  find 
to  be  constant,  that  is,  m7i  for  each  term. 

10.  It  is  easy  to  see,  from  the  definition  of  an  eliminant  and 
from  the  results  of  (Art.  3),  that  the  eliminant  must  satisfy 
the  difi'erential  equations  there  given  ;  or,  if  referred  to  equa- 
tions (1)  and  (2)  of  the  last  Article,  must  be  of  the  form 

«o  -^ •"  2^1-5 1- 3^2— h&c.  +  &o-T7— +<^c.  =  0, 

aaj  da^  da^  db^ 

where  A  represents  the  eliminant  of  equations  (1)  and  (2). 

11.  The  eliminant  of  three  equations  in  three  variables. — The 
eliminant  vanishing,  the  equations  are  simultaneous.  This  can 
be  brought  under  the  system  of  two  equations.  For,  solving 
between  any  two  equations,  and  substituting  these  values  in 
the  third,  the  product  of  these  substitutions  must  vanish,  since, 
by  hypothesis,  there  is  a  community  of  values   between  the 


INVARIANTS.  16 

different  sets,  the  number  of  which  must  equal  the  weight  of 
the  eliminant  of  those  two  equations,  that  is,  the  product  of 
their  degrees.  These  substituted  successively  in  the  remaining 
equation,  and  multiplied  together,  will  furnish  the  requisite 
symmetric  functions  by  which  the  coefficients  of  the  solved 
equations  may  be  expressed,  which  gives  the  eliminant  whose 
weight  is  equal  to  the  product  of  the  degrees  of  the  three 
equations.  For  four  equations  we  proceed  in  the  same  manner, 
solving  for  three  and  substituting  these  values  in  the  fourth. 

12.  In  reviewing  this  method  of  elimination,  it  will  be  seen 
to  be  of  the  widest  generality,  and  all  its  results  susceptible  of 
very  satisfactory  proof.  It  is  not  introduced  for  any  use  in 
actual  elimination,  but  that  the  reader  may  here  avail  himself  of 
important  assistance  in  the  study  of  the  Theory  of  Invariants. 

IB.  The  reader  interested  in  determinants  will  naturally 
seek  some  form  for  elimination  by  this  method.  That  of  Euler 
leading  in  this  direction  is  of  high  theoretical  value.  Two 
equations,  homogeneous  or  otherwise,  are  supposed  to  be  satis- 
fied by  a  common  root  of  the  first  degree ;  then  the  first,  multi- 
plied by  all  the  remaining  factors  of  the  second,  is  evidently 
equal  to  the  second  multiplied  by  all  the  remaining  factors  of 
the  first ;  as,  if  we  have 

x^—(a  +  h)  x-\-ah  —  0, 
x^—(a-\-c)  x-\-aG  ■=  0, 

then  (x  —  c){x^—(a-\-lj)x-\-ab}=.  {x^b)  {x^—{a-\-c)  x  +  ac]', 

or,  in  general,  if  we  multiply  the  homogeneous  equation 
f{x^  2/)  =  0  by  any  arbitrary  function  of  a  degree  one  less 
than  /i  (aj,  y)  =  0,  and  the  latter  by  any  arbitrary  function 
with  a  degree  one  less  than  the  former  equation,  and  then 
equate  term  to  term,  we  shall  have  a  number  of  equations 
equal  to  the  sum  of  the  degrees  of  the  two  given  equations, 
and  the  eliminant  will  of  course  appear  in  the  form  of  a  deter- 
minant. 


16 


INVARIANTS. 


To  eliminate  between 

ax^-\-2bxy  +  cif, 

(hx^  +  Uxy  +  hf)  (ax^  +  2hxy  +  cy^) 

=  (Jc,x-\-l,y)(a,x^-\-Sh,x^y  +  Sc^xy^  +  d2/)  ; 

equating  like  terms, 

ha—\a^  =  0, 

2nc  +  Ua-2>W—\a^  =  0, 

Tcc  +  la  +  ^Uh-Zh^c^  —  ZW  =  0, 

2lb  +  Jdc-]c^d—Sl^r.^  =  0, 

lc-\d  =  0. 

Eliminating  fc  and  Z,  we  have 

aOO—  CTi  0=0 

26     0       a      -36i     -«! 

c       a      26     -3ci     -36i 

0      2&      c       -  c?      -3ci 

0       c       0  0      —  d 

as  the  eliminant. 

14.  The  various  other  methods,  such  as  Bezout's  method,* 
Sylvester's  dialytic  process,  the  uses  of  the  Jacobian  in  elim- 
ination, explained  in  (D.  39), f  since  they  do  not  illustrate  the 
Theory  of  Invariants,  may  be  omitted. 

We  will  now  pass  at  once  to  a  subject  which  is  intimately 
connected  with  that  theory. 

15.  Discriminants.  —  If  an  equation,  or  quantic,  as  it  is 
called  when   it   is   not   equated  to   0,  be  differentiated  with 


*  I  must  qualify  this  statement,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  Bezout's  method. 
It  is  well  known  by  those  acquainted  with  Dr.  Sylvester's  researches,  that 
what  he  calls  a  Bezoutiant  is  the  discriminant  of  a  quadratic  function  in 
any  number  of  variables,  and  is  expressible  as  a  symmetrical  determinant 
which  is  written,  as  in  (D.  22),  with  a  double  suffix.  The  eliminant  of  two 
equations  of  the  w*^  degree  may  be  similarly  expressed.  The  use  of  the 
Bezoutiant  in  the  theory  of  equations  is  exhibited  in  a  Memoir  by  Syl- 
vester, Phil.  Trans.,  1853,  p.  513. 

t  Tract  No.  1,  Determinants. 


INVAKIANTS. 


17 


respect  to  its  variables,  the  eliminant  of  these  several 
differentials  is  the  discriminant.  As  the  quantic  is  under- 
stood to  be  homogeneous,  it  is  evident  that  the  discriminant 
must  be  homogeneous  also.  The  order  of  the  discriminant 
is  clearly  the  product  of  the  degrees  of  the  differentials  of 
which  it  is  the  eliminant. 

Observing  the  same  order  of  the  suffixes  a^^  %,  &c.,  the 
weight  of  the  discriminant  will  depend  upon  the  number  of 
differentials  and  the  order  of  the  quantic.  Thus,  for  a  binary 
quadratic  the  weight  must  be  2  ;  for  a  ternary  cubic,  that  is,  a 
quantic  containing  three  variables,  3  (3  —  1)^.  This  arises  from 
a  slight  modification  of  the  reasoning  in  Art.  9.  The  weight 
would  be  evidently  (w  — 1),  taken  as  many  times  as  a  factor  as 
there  are  variables,  were  it  not  for  the  consideration  that  all 
but  one  of  these  differentials  begin  with  a  coefficient  whose 
relation  to  the  leading  variable  is  the  same  as  in  the  original 
quantic ;  in  other  words,  with  a  suffix  one  greater  than  the  first 
differential  which  begins  with  % ;  hence  the  number  of  suffixes 
must  be  increased  in  this  proportion.  If  j)  =  the  number  of 
differentials,    (t^  —  l)^  must  be  increased  by  (%— 1)^~\  that  is, 

{n—\y  +  {n-iy-^  =  n  {n-\y-\ 

which  is  the  sum  of  the  suffixes  for  each  term  of  the  dis- 
criminant. 


16.  If  we  divide  the  homogeneous  equation  by  y'',  the  result 
is  reducible  to  a  product  of  factors,  as 

X      y       X      X      y       X      X      y       X  &c.  =  0. 
^i     yi  ^2     2/2     •         ^s     2/3 

Comparing  this  product  with 

we  see  that  2/i!/2  2/3  ^^'  —  ^oj 

since  the  product  of 

(xy^—x^y)  (xy^  -  x^y)  (xy^  -x^y)&c.=  Q  (1) 

^ives  2/i  2/2  &c.  for  the  coefficient  of  x^. 


18  INVARIANTS. 

17.  The  discriminant  is  equal  to  the  Jcontinned  product  of 
the  squares  of  the  differences  of  the  roots  of  the  given  quantic 
taken  two  and  two. 

Suppose    a3i?/i,  x^y<^^  x^7j^,    &c.   are  the^rootsjof  (1)  above, 

then     -j^  =  2/i  {xy^—yx^){x])^-yx^  &c.  +  ?/2  (xy^-x^y)  &c. 
ax 

fid 
Observing  the  effect  of  substituting  a^ij/i  in  -     ,  which  is 

ctx 

2/i  (^i2/2"~yi^2)  <^C' j  substituting  in  the  same  manner  x^y^^ 
ajg^/j,  &c.  in  the  same  equation,  and  taking  the  continued  pro- 
duct, we  must  have 

2/i2/2  &c.  fe2/2 -2/1^2)'  fe2/3-2/i^3)^&c.  =  0 (1), 

which,  as  we  have  seen,  is  the  eliminant  (Art.  7)  of  Q  and  -— ^. 

ax 

The  same  product,  divided  by  y-^  y^  &c.  =  a^,  will  give  the  dis- 
criminant. 

This  will  more  fully  appear  when  we  consider  that 

then,  when  we  have  substituted  successively  all  the  roots  of 

— —  =  0   in    Q,   we   shall   have   for   the   continued    product 
ax 

2/12/22/8  ^^-  niultiplied  by  a  similar  result  of  substituting  the 
same  roots  in  —P^-     But  this  latter  result  is  evidently  the 

discriminant.  Hence,  if  (1)  be  divided  by  a^,,  that  is,  if  the 
eliminant  of  the  quantic  and  its  first  differential  with  reference 
to  X  be  divided  by  the  product  of  the  ?/'s,  we  shall  obtain  the 
same  result  as  if  we  had  found  the  eliminant  of  the  first  differ- 
entials with  reference  to  x  and  y. 

18.  Enough  preliminary  matter  has  now  been  introduced  to 
enable  the  reader  to  follow  with  profit  all  that  will  follow. 


INVAEIANTS.  19 

To  those  who  wish  to  pursue  the  theory  of  discriminants 
further,  and  desire  to  study  an  interesting  geometrical  applica- 
tion, the  theorem  of  Joachimsthal,  taken  as  the  basis  of  an 
investigation  on  the  nature  of  cones  circumscribing  surfaces 
having  multiple  lines,  by  Dr.  Salmon  ("  Cambridge  and  Dublin 
Math.  Journal,"  1847  and  1849)  would  probably  prove  as 
fruitful  in  this  direction  as  any  that  could  be  mentioned.* 

*  The  theorem  above  alluded  to  is  included  in  the  following  statement. 
If  we  have  the  quantic  {aQ,  a-^ ...  ««_i,  an'^x,  y)",  and  a^  contain  a  factor  ty 
and  if  ^o  contain  t"  as  a  factor,  the  discriminant  will  be  divisible  by  t^ ;  also, 
if  a^  contain  ^  as  a  factor,  and  if  a^  and  aQ  contain  t^  and  t^  respectively, 
then  the  discriminant  will  be  divisible  by  t^,  and  so  on.  The  application 
by  Dr.  Salmon  was  that,  if  Uq  +  a^x  +  a^'^  +  &;c.  be  the  equation  to  a  sur- 
face, and  if  xy  be  a  double  line,  a^  will  contain  y  in  the  second,  and  a^  in 
the  first  degree.  The  discriminant  in  respect  to  x  is  divisible  by  y\  and 
the  locus  is  a  tangent  cone. 


20 


CHAPTER  II. 
FORMATION  OF  INVARIANT  FUNCTIONS. 

19.  The  definition  of  an  invariant  and  covariant  of  a 
single  quantic  has  already  been  given  (D.  42).  In  pur- 
suance of  this,  we  might  proceed  at  once  to  show  how  in 
general  such  functions  can  be  formed,  and  then  give  some 
explanation  of  the  geometrical  importance  of  the  theory; 
but,  for  the  sake  of  clearness,  we  will  commence  with  one  of 
the  simplest  examples  of  an  invariant  function. 

20.  The  determinant  of  a  system  of  linear  equations  is  an 
invariant  of  that  system,  because,  as  it  will  be  remembered, 
when  the  variables  are  all  transformed  by  the  same  linear 
substitution,  the  determinant  of  the  transformed  equations 
is  equal  to  the  determinant  of  the  given  equations  mul- 
tiplied by  the  modulus  of  transformation  (D.  42).  In 
other  words,  the  determinant  (function  of  the  coefficients)  of 
the  given  equations,  which  remains  unaltered  by  the  trans- 
formation, is  called  an  invariant.  The  equations  of  (D.  17) 
will  exactly  illustrate  this. 

When  the  linear  equations 

dv  +  ev^  +/v2  =  0  ^ 

^l^  +  ^l^l+/l^2=0i (1) 

are  transformed  by  the  substitutions 

ax  -\-by  +CZ  =  v  ^ 

a^x  +  h^y  +  c^z  =  v^  I (2), 

then  the  determinant  of  the  transformed  system  will  be  equal 


INVARIANTS.  /  21 

to  (dcif^)  X  {ab^c^,  which  may  be  written 

/(transformed)  =  A'* /(given), 

where  A  =  the  modulus  =  the  determinant  formed  from  the 
sinister  members  of  (2). 

The  /,  which  is  also  a  determinant  expressing  the  coexistence 
of  equations  (1),  is  in  this  case  called  an  invariant. 

21.  It  is  not  difficult  to  see  from  the  above  that  a  somewhat 
complicated  problem  is  now  presented  to  us.  We  are  to  trace 
the  effect  of  linear  transformation  upon  the  same  functions  of 
the  coefficients  of  an  equation,  to  determine  the  number  of 
the  functions  which  remain  unaltered  by  such  transformation, 
and  to  deduce  convenient  rules  for  their  formation.  It  was 
seen,  for  instance  (D.  41),  that  when  the  binary  quadratic 
(ahc^Xj  yY  was  linearly  transformed  by  the  substitution  of 

X  =  lx-\-my^ 

y  =  \x-\-m{y, 

we  wrote    Ax'^  +  2Bxy  +  Gy^    as   the    transformed  quadratic, 
in  which 

A=  a?-Y2Ul^-Vcl\, 


C  =  am?  -\-2hmm-^-\-  cnii , 

JB  =  aim  +  h  (Im^  +  Z^m)  +  cl{in-^, 

and  from  which  we  obtained 

AC-B''  =  {ac-h^){lm^-\my. 

The  invariant  in  this  case,  ac—  h^,  is  no  other  than  the  dis- 
criminant of  the  given  quadratic  ax^  +  2hxy-^cy^. 

22.  Proceeding  now  to  the  binary  cubic  (a,  h,  c,  d'^x,  y)*, 
we  obtain  its  discriminant ;  that  is,  we  find  its  two  differentials, 
and  by  direct  elimination  their  eliminant,  which  is  the  dis- 
criminant, viz., 

4>(bd-c')(h'-ac)-\-(ad-hcy, 
which,  in  form,  is  the  same  as  that  obtained  in  Art.  7.     And 
here,  again,  we   say  that   the   invariant  in  this   case  is  no 
other  than  the  discriminant. 


22  INVARIANTS. 

23.  Since  ac—h^  is  an  invariant  of  the  quadratic 

we  can,  by  the  introduction  of  a  constant,  derive  not  only  two 
invariants  after  the  analogy  of  ac  —  W,  but  one  other  whose 
constituents  are  derived  from  the  coefficients  of  the  trans- 
formed system. 

Thus,  if  we  have  the  two  quadratics, 

s^x^-\-2t^xy+uy, 

we  may  multiply  the  second  by  k,  an  arbitrary  constant,  and 
obtain  by  addition 

(s  +  Jvs^)  x^-\-2(t  +  U^)  xy  +  (u  +  Jcu^)  y\ 

which,  by  a  transformation  identical  with  that  in  Art.  21, 
becomes 

(8+hS,)  X'  +  2  (T+JcT,)  XY+(U+hU,)  Y^ 

and  the  invariant,  consequently,  by  symmetry,  is 

i8+JcS,)(U+hU0-{T+hT,y 

=  A^\_(s  +  hs,)(u-\-7cu^)-(ti-M,y]. 

Since  this  equation  is  satisfied  by  any  value  of  Tc,  and  therefore 

identical,  the  coefficients  of  the  like  powers  of  h  must  be  equal, 

and  therefore 

8U-T'  =  A''(su-f), 

8,U-Tl  =  A'(s,u,-f,), 

8U,'j-8,U-2TT^  =  A\su,+s,u-2tt,). 

The  last  of  these  is  therefore  an  invariant  of  a  system  of  two 
quantics. 

And  here  it  would  be  well  to  observe  that,  if  we  had  operated 

upon  the  given  invariant  su—f  with   ^i "T"  +  ^i -jT  +  ^i -t-> 

the  result  would  have  been  the  same  as  that  actually  obtained 
by  the  substitution  of  s-\-ks^  for  5,  &c. ;  and  thus,  in  general,  if 
we  have  an  invariant  of  any  known  quantic,  we  may  find  the 


INVARIANTS.  23 

invariant  of  a  system  of  two  or  more  simultaneous  quantics  of 
the  same  degree,  either  by  substitution  or  by  the  use  of  the 
operator,  as  above. 

24.  As  we  have  stated,  the  binary  quadratic  and  cubic  have 
no  other  invariant  than  their  respective  determinants  ;  but,  as 
we  shall  see,  binaries  of  a  higher  degi'ee  may  have  two  or  more 
functions  unaltered  by  transformation.  For  instance,  if  we 
take  the  binary  quartic 

ax'^  +  4ibx^y  +  Qcx^y^  +  4dxi/^  +  ey*, 

and  operate  upon  it  with  the  symbols*  -—  and -,  that  is, 

ay  dx 

substitute     _  -  for  x  and — -  for  y  ;  we  shall  find  that  the 

dy  dx  '^ 

result  ae—4<hd-\-2c^ 

will  conform  to  the  definition  of  an  invariant.  The  same  v^ill 
be  true  if  we  expand  the  determinant  formed  from  the  fourth 
differentials  of  the  quartic,  viz.. 


a  h  c 
bed 
c     d    e 


ace-{-2hcd-ad'-eh'-G' (1). 


That  these  two  invariants  may  be  derived  from  the  binary 
quartic,  may  be  shown  by  actually  transforming  the    given 

*  The  theory  of  these  symbols  must  be  reserved  for  another  part  of  the 
subject ;  see  Arts.  28,  33.  The  actual  process  is  to  introduce  the  symbols 
into  the  quantic,  thus  obtaining  a  differential  symbol.  Thus,  by  substi- 
tuting    for  v,  and  —  for  a;  in  the  given  quantic,  we  have 

dx  dy 

a 4o +  6c  — - —  —  Ad +  e  — -. 

di/  dfdx  dy^dx^  dydx^         dx"^ 

Operating  upon  the  quartic  with  this  symbol,  we  get 

A8ae~192bd+lUa^ 

Hence  the  relation  is    .  ae  —  ibd  +  Sc^. 

If  the  quantic  had  been  of  odd  degree,  the  result  would  have  vanished. 


24  INVARIANTS. 

quartic,  equating  the  values  of  -4,  B,  C,  &c.,  and  we  should  find 

and  also  another,  (1),  which  entering  into  the  discriminant 
forms  still  a  third.  These  latter,  however,  do  not  at  present 
concern  us  beyond  the  assurance  that  they  exist,  the  theory  of 
their  formation  being  reserved  for  future  consideration. 

25.  The  Theory  of  Covariants  will  be  found  to  be  immedi- 
ately connected  with  the  Theory  of  Invariants.  This  follows 
from  the  fact  that  the  covariant  is  a  function  not  only  of  the 
coelEcients,  but  also  of  the  variables  of  the  given  quantic  ; 
that  is, 

/(iS,  Z7,  &c.  X,  Y,  &c.)  =  A'"/ (5,  u,  &c.  x,  y,  &c.) 

To  illustrate  this,  let  us  take  the  Hessian  (D.  40)  of  the 
quartic 

ax*+Ux^y  +  6cxY  +  Mxif-\-ei/  (1), 

and  we  have 

ax^-{-2hxy  +  c7/,     hx^  +  2cxy-{-dy^ 
tx^  +  2cxy  +  dy"^^     cic^  -|-  2dxy  +  ey^ 

which,  expanded,  gives  the  invariant  form  mn—l^,  and  differs 
in  form  only  from  the  invariant  of  the  quadratic  (Art.  23) 
ac  —  lr'  by  the  variables  of  the  given  quantic. 

Looking  at  this  example  a  little  further,  we  see  that  (1)  and 
(2)  contain  the  same  powers  of  the  variables,  and  equally  the 
same  coefficients.  Hence  the  invariant  of  the  covariant  in 
this  case  can  be  no  other  than  the  invariant  of  (1),  and  this 
conclusion  may  easily  be  seen  to  be  general. 

26.  Covariants  may  be  formed  by  substituting  in  the  given 
quanbic  x-\-hx^  and  y  +  hy^  for  x  and  y.  The  coefficients  of 
the  several  powers  of  h  form  covariants,  and,  taken  in  order, 
are  called  emanants  of  the  quantic.  Thus,  if  we  take  the 
binary  cubic 

ax^-\-2>l)xhj  +  Zcxy''  +  dy\ 

*  To  transform  this  quartic,  ax'^  &c.,  the  reader  has  only  to  repeat  the 
process  of  Art.  21  on  a  larger  scale. 


(2), 


INVARIANTS.  25 

and  substitute  as  proposed,  we  shall  find  the  several  emanants 

^1  —  +  2/1  ,   j  ,  in  which  form  the  coefficients  of  the 

ascending  powers  of  h  appear.    - 

The  emanants  of  any  quantic  can  in  general  be  expressed  in 

the  form 

(^v^+2/.^)     (1) 

as  first,  second,  and  n^^  emanants. 

If  we  take  the  second  power,  to  get  the   second  emanant, 
we  may  write 

Xi  rr^  +  Ix^y^mn  +  \j^  n? (2) 

as  the  result,  where  w  and  n  represent  the  differentials      ■ ,  -— , 

^  ax    dy 

and  a?i,  ij^  are  regarded  as  cogredient  to,*  or  vary  as,  the  given 
variables.  Now  it  is  easy  to  see  that,  if  we  regard  (1)  or  (2) 
as  a  function  of  x^,  y^,  and  the  original  variables  as  constants, 
and  proceed  to  form  the  invariants,  these  invariants  will  iu 
turn  represent  covariants  of  the  given  quantic,  if  we  then  con- 
ceive 03,  y  as  variables. 

This  will  appear  at   once  by  reference  to  Art.  23,  where 
we  were  enabled,  after  transforming  the  quadratic,  to  write 

Transform  now  (2),  and  write  its  invariant,  and  we  shall  have 

dX'  '  dY'       KdXdYJ  Idx'  '  dif       \dxdyl  A  '"^  ^' 

where   V  =  the  transformed,  and   v  =  the   original   quantic. 

*  To  exhibit  this,  let  (abc^x,  t/Y  be  the  given  quantic. 
Making  the  substitutions,  we  have 

k^  (axi^  +  2bxit/i  +  cy^)   and  2k  { axx-^  +  b  [xy^  +  x^tf)  +  cyy-^ } 

as  first  and  second  emanants ;  but,  by  hypothesis,  X\,  y-^  are  cogredient  to 
xy ;  hence  each  of  the  coefficients  above  resume  the  quadratic  form,  in 
other  words,  they  become  identical.  Hence  there  are  not,  as  we  shall  see, 
two  covariants  to  the  quadratic  (^abc^x,  y)^,  but  one  (as  there  is  no  func- 
tion of  the  differences  of  the  roots),  and  that  one  must  be  the  quantic  itself. 


26  INVARIANTS. 

This  invariant  is  now  the  covariant  of  the  given  quantic,  as  is 

evident  algebraically  if  we  compare  (2)  with  the  form  for  the 

second  emanant, 

/      dv   ,       dv\^ 

in  which  x,  y  are  first  treated  as  constants,  by  which  supposi- 
tion we  form  the  invariant,  and  then  as  variables,  so  that  the 
result  conforms  to  the  definition  of  an  invariant.  It  is  plain 
also  that  (3)  is  the  expanded  determinant  formed  from  the 
quadratic  emanant,  and  in  this  sense  may  be  regarded  as  a 
discHminant  of  the  quadratic  function,  and  is  therefore  an 
invariant  with  the  limitation  that  its  variables  are  regarded  as 
constants.  The  first  emanants  of  a  system  of  linear  equations 
yield  a  determinant.  Hence  in  general  we  may  say  that  the 
Jacobian  (D.  39)  of  the  first  emanants  of  a  system  of  linear 
equations — that  is,  the  first  difi'erentials  of  these  equations 
regarded  as  functions  of  a^i,  yi,  ^j^ — will  form  a  determinant 
which  is  a  covariant  of  the  system. 

27.   Inverse  Suhstitution. — Tn  Trilinear  Coordinates   a,  (3,  y 
are  used  ordinarily  to  express  the  coordinates   of  the  point. 

Let  now  a3a  +  ?//3  +  ^y  =  0 

be  the  equation  of  a  straight  line  in  which  a,  /3,  y  are  the 
tangential  coordinates  of  the  line,  that  is,  its  perpendicular 
distances  from  the  three  points  of  reference  ;  and  ^,  y,  z  the 
perpendicular  distances  of  any  point  in  the  line  from  the  three 
lines  of  reference,  that  is,  its  trilinear  coordinates  (T.  2,  25).* 
By  transforming  this  equation  to  new  axes  by  linear  substi- 
tution, it  will  be  seen  that,  while  the  trilinear  coordinates  are 
transformed  by  direct  substitution,  the  tangential  coordinates 
are  transformed  at  the  same  time  by  the  inverse  substitution. 

Let  X  =  l-^X+m^Y+n-^Z^ 

y  =  Zg^+^c., 

z  =  Z3X+&C. 
*  Tract  No.  IL,  Art.  25. 


INTARIANTS.  27 

Then  the  new  equation  of  the  line  may  be  written 

AX+Br-f  r^=  0  (1), 

where  A  =  l^a  -\-  1^(d  +  l^y, 

B  =  m^a  +  rn^lj  +  m^y, 
r  =  n^a  -^-n^i^+n^y. 

The  two  sets  of  coordinates  in  this  case  are  said  to  be 
contragredient  to  each  other  ;  and  in  general  it  may  be  stated 
that  the  tangential  coordinates,  whether  of  a  line  or  a  plane, 
will  be  transformed  by  a  different — that  is,  inverse — substitu- 
tion, from  the  coordinates  representing  different  points.  The 
latter  are  said  to  be  cogredient,  as  x,  x-^,  y,  ^/i,  &c.,  because 
transformed  by  the  same  substitution  ;  while  the  former  are 
said  to  be  contragredient,  because  tranformed  by  an  inverse 
substitution. 

28.  This  may  be  stated  in  another  form  ;  for,  since  the  equa- 
tion which  was  a  function  of  x,  y,  z  has  been  transformed  to  a 
function  of  X,  Y,  Z,  the  total  differential  coefficients  with 
respect  to  the  latter  are  functions  of  those  with  respect  to  the 
former. 

We  have,  from  (1)  of  the  last  Article, 

a  {l^X-^-m^Y+n^Z)  +  /3  {l^X+m^Y+n^Z) 

-\-y{l,X+m^Y^n,Z)^0', 
and  therefore 

d    _  1    ^    y   1  ^   \   1    d^ 
dX        ^  dx       ^  dy        ^  dz^ 

dx        ,     « 
smce  -—.  =  fci,  <x;c. 

clX 

Comparing  oc,  y,  z  with        .,  — ,  — -,   we  see  that  the  substi- 
ct^   cty    ctz 

tution   which   linearly  transforms  the  one  will  linearly  trans- 
form tlie  other,  but  by  a  reciprocal  relation   as  expressed  by 


28 


INVARIANTS. 


the  determinants  of  the  coefficients 


h       h       's 

m-i    Wg     Wj 


If  now    ,  ,  ~z~,  —   vanish,  as  will  happen  only  when  the  dis- 
bar  di/    dz  J 

criminant  of  the  quantic  or  system  vanishes,  then  — -   will 

necessarily  vanish  also. 

29.  The  consideration  of  inverse  substitution  leads  directly 
to  a  function  well  known  in  geometry  as  the  contravariant.  For 
it  will  be  seen  at  once  that,  if  a  quantic  which  is  a  function  of 
two  sets  of  variables  x,  y,  z;  a,  /3,  y,  be  linearly  transformed, 
the  function  involving  the  coefficients  and  the  variables,  re- 
garded as  transformed  by  the  inverse  substitution,  must  be 
similar  to  the  covariant,  but  which  is  called  the  contravariant ; 
that  is, 

/(A,  A,,  &c.  A,  B,  r)  =  A-/(ao,  «!,  &c.  «,  /3,  y). 

It  is  evident  also,  from  what  has  preceded,  that  the  contra- 
variant may  be  deduced  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  exhibited 
in  Art.  28.     If  we  take  the  binary  quadratic, 

ax^-^2hxij  +  cy^  (1), 

and  combine  it  with  Jc(xa-\-yl3y (2), 

we  shall  have 

{a-\-1ca')x'  -\-2(h  +  lcaf5)xy  +  (c  +  hP')y' (3). 

If  now  (1)  becomes,  by  linear  transformation, 

and  (2)  becomes  h  {XA  +  ^B)^ 

then  (3)  becomes 


INVARIANTS.  29 

and  the  invariant  form  gives 

(A  +  JcA')  (C  +  JcB')  -  ( 5  -f  JcABy 

And  since  we  may  equate  the  coefficients  of  the  like  powers 
of  k,  we  have 

AB2-2i?AB-f-CA2  =  A\al3^^2hal3  +  ca^) (1), 

that  is,  a/3^— 2&op  +  co^,  differing  only  by  a  power  of  the 
modulus  from  the  corresponding  function  of  the  transformed 
coefficients  and  variables  o,  (j,  is  a  contra  variant. 

In  reviewing  now  three  functions  thus  considered,  it  will 
be  seen  that  they  all  equally  possess  the  property  of  in- 
variance. 

30.  In  general,  when  a,  fy,y  are  regarded  as  contragredient 
to  X,  2/,  ^,  the  contravariant  may  be  expressed,  by  application 
of  the  preceding  Article, 

^0^" + &c.  +  A:  (XA  +  YB + zry 

and  the  invariant  would  be 

/(^  +  M",  A,-^hA^'-'B,  &c.)  =  A"7K  +  ^-"«",  a,  +  Jca»-^l3,  &c.) 

We  have  thus  to  develop  the  sum  of  two  functions,  which, 
by  Taylor's  Theorem,  gives  us  for  the  coefficients  of  the  con- 
stant /j, 

\      claQ  da^  db^  I 

If  r=l,  this  formula  gives  us  what  has  been  called  the  first 
evectant. 

*  P  =  the  invariant  of  the  quantic. 


80  INVARIANTS. 

To  apply  this,  we  know  that  ac  —  \p-  is  the  invariant  of  the 
quadratic.     We  have  then 

which  is  identical  with  (1)  of  the  last  Article. 
If  the  quantic  be  a  ternary  quadratic,  as 

we  shall  have  for  an  invariant 

a^     ^6     ^'4     ■=  %a^a^-\~^a^a^^^  —  a^a.^  —  a^(Xi^  —  a^<i^  =  F, 

ag  «!  ttg 

^4        «3        «2 

which  is  the  discriminant  of  the  quantic  ;  whence 

\      aa-0  aaj,  aaj  actg  aa^  daj 

+  2  (rt^ag— ao%) /^y  +  2  {a^a^  -  a^a^)  ay  +  2  (dga^  -  aa^Tg)  a/3 

is  a  contravariant,  and  in  geometry  expresses  the  condition 
that  a  given  line  represented  by  a  trilinear  equation  shall 
touch  the  given  conic,  or,  in  other  words,  is  the  tangential 
equation  of  the  conic* 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  discriminant  of  the  first  evec- 
tant  of  the  second  degree  can  be  written  as  a  determinant : 

dE 


da 


=  0 


Salmon's  '*  Conies,"  p.  249. 


INVARIANTS.  31 

and  may  be  regai'ded  as  the  invariant  of  a  system,  or  of  the 
given  contravariant. 

It  is  also  to  be  observed  that  there  are  instances  of  functions 
involving  both  x,  y,  z  and  o,  /3,  y,  and  which  do  not  change 
by  transformation  of  the  quantic,  that  is, 

/(Jo, A  -  X,  Y...  J,5...)  =  A-/K%  •••  ^-.y  ■■■  «,/5...), 

which  have  received  the  general  name  of  mixed  concomitants. 

That  such  functions  may  easily  be  formed  may  be  seen  by 
examining  the  covariant  (1)  of  Art.  26. 

If  we  subject  it  to  the  operation  of  finding  the  coefficients 

by  Taylor's  Theorem,  we  shall  have   ( «^  y  +"/^  77  "^^^^T  )  ^> 
where  C  =  the  covariant  in  question. 

31.  We  may  here  perhaps  interest  the  reader  by  introducing 
an.  illustration  of  the  geometrical  application  of  invariants.  It 
is  well  known  that  when  we  transform  from  one  rectangular 
system  to  another,  that  a+h  and  ah  —  Ji^  remain  unaltered  by 
the  transformation.  Suppose  it  were  inquired  as  to  the  form 
these  quantities  take  when  the  transformation  is  made  from 
rectangular  (or  oblique)  to  oblique  axes,  where  a,  h,  h  are  con- 
stants in  the  quadratic 

ax^  +  2hxij  +  bi/  (1). 

Let  the  transformation  be  from  axes  inclined  at  the  angle  to 
to  axes  of  any  other  inclination,  as  O.  Then,  by  making  the 
proper  substitutions,  (1)  becomes 

AX'  +  'IHXY+BT'  (Art.  21). 

By  symmetry,    cc^ -\- 2oi^i/  cos  w+y    would  become 

X^ -1-2X^008  12+1^, 

as  either  expresses  the  square  of  any   point   from  the  origin. 
Adopting  now  a  method  with  which  we  are  familiar,  we  say  • 

ax"^  -f  2](Xi/  +  hf  -h  k  {x^  +  2x'ij  cos  w  -fy') 

=  JXH2IfXr-i-5r^  +  X;(XH2Xrcosl2+ Y^). 


32  INVARIANTS. 

If  we  determine  k  so  that  the  first  side  of  the  equation  may 
become  a  perfect  square,  the  second  will  become  a  perfect 
square  also,  that  is,  h  must  be  one  of  the  roots  of 

^2sin'^w  +  (a  +  &-2/tcos  w)  Z;  +  a&  - /.'^  =  0. 

This  value  of  h  will  make  the  left  member  a  perfect  square. 
A  similar  quadratic  will  be  found  in  the  right-hand  member, 
which  will  make  it  also  a  perfect  square.  Both  members 
become  perfect  squares  for  the  same  value  of  h^  and  are  there- 
fore equal. 

Equating  coefficients  of  corresponding  terms,  we  have,  what 
we  already  knew  (Art.  5)  in  form, 

a-^-h  —  211  cos  M  _  A-\-B  —  2Il  co^  £1 
sin^  u)  sin^  il  ' 

sin^  (1)  sin^  li 

(This  elegant  demonstration  is  due  to  the  late  Dr.  Geo.  Boole. 
See  Camhridge  Math.  Jour.,  N.  S.,  VI.  87.) 

32.  From  Art.  28,  we  learn  that  x,  y,  n;  a,  (3,  y  sustain  a 
reciprocal  relation  to  each  other.     The  same  is  to  be  observed 

of  Xy  y,  z   and  —,  — ,  -  .     The  transformation  of  the  former 
ax    dy    dz 

transforms  the  latter,  but  by  an  inverse  method.  In  this  way 
the  contra  variant  is  obtained,  Vihich,  as  has  been  remarked, 
possesses  the  property  of  invariance.  Know  in  the  contra- 
variant  we  substitute  --,  &c.,  we  shall  obtain  a  function  which, 
dx 

containing  signs  of  operation,  and  being  itself  unchanged  by 
transformation,  may  be  called  an  operating  symbol — a  type  form 
which,  if  applied  to  the  quantic  or  to  its  covariants,  must  give 
either  an  invariant  or  a  covariant  according  as  the  variables 
disappear  or  remain  after  differentiation. 

ca^— 26a/3-f-a/3*    being  a   contravariant   of  ax^-^ll/xy-^-ci/y 


INVARIANTS.  38 

we  obtain,  by  applying  to  the  quadratic  the  operating  symbol 

(f  cP  d? 

c  -— ^  —  2h  " — —  +  a  -—     the  invariant  ac  —  h^. 
dx*  ax  ay         ay" 

38.  Proceeding  upon  the  principle  now  before  ns,  we  are 
enabled  to  generate,  as  will  be  seen,  the  three  functions  con- 
sidered, by  means   of  simple   substitution.     Since  /(/?,  —a) 

becomes,   by  a  linear   transformation,  '  >  that  is,  a 

contravariant,  we  have  then,  in  a  binary  quadratic,  only  to 
substitute  /3  and  —a  for  x  and  ij  to  obtain  the  contravariant. 

If,  therefore,  we  write  a  with  the  negative  sign,  there  is  no 
reason  why  we  should  not  say  that  —  a,  /3  are  transformed  by 

the  same  rules  as  03,  y.  The  symbols  — ,  &c.,  which  we  re- 
garded as  contragredient  to  ce,  ij^  may  be  with  equal  reason 
called  cogredient  to  — a?,  Xj ;  and,  conversely,    — ,   —  y-   may 

be  taken  as  cogredient  to  a?,  y.  Hence,  if  we  substitute  these 
symbols  in  either  the  quantic  or  its  covariants,  we  obtain  a 
new  set  of  functions  of  the  same  form.  The  exception  is  seen 
in  the  binary  quartics,  where,  for  instance  in  the  quadratic, 
the  substitution  gives  4  {ao—h^),  an  invariant. 

34.  A  fuller  investigation  of  the  quadratic,  in  the  general 
theory,  will  lead  to  what  is  perhaps  already  sufficiently  evident, 
that  the  quadratic  (a,  &,  c'^x,  yY  has  no  covariant  but  the 
quantic  itself.*  We  have  seen  that  its  discriminant  is  the  in- 
variant ac—P,  and  its  contravariant  ca^  — 2&o/3-|-«/3^ ;  and 
since  ac  —  h^  is  an  invariant,  we  learn,  from  Art.  26,  that  the 
second  emanant  is  a  quadratic  in  x-^,  ?/i,  and  its  discriminant 
is  a  covariant,  for  a  quantic  higher  than  the  second  degree. 
We  know  (Art.  22)  that  the  invariant  of 

(a,  h,  c,d^x,yf (1) 

is  a'd'-\-4^ac'-6ahcd-\-Mb'-Sb'c'  (2). 

*  An  invariant  being  a  function  of  the  differences  of  roots,  there  can  be 
no  such  function  formed  other  than  the  given  quantic.    See  Note,  p.  24. 


84 


INVARIANTS. 


Hence  for  every  quantic  higher  than  the  third  we  have  the 
covariant 


L  \  dx^  dy  I  dx^  \  dec  du  I  dx^ 


d^         d' 


dyl  dx^  Xdx  dy  J  dx^  dx^  dij  dx  ny^  dy^ 

dy^  dx^  dy  \dx^  dy  dx  dy'^l  \ 

The  covariant  of  (1)  may  be  found  by  forming  the  evectant 
(Art.  30) 

where  P  =  (2). 

Then,  by  substituting  a;,  y  for  a,  /3,  we  have 

03^  (acZ2-3&c(^  +  2c«)  +  Zxhj  {-acd-^'lhH-hc^) 

+  'Sxy'  {-aU^'lao''-V"c)  +  y^  (a^d-3abc-h2h^). 

And  thus  generally  for  binaries,  when  any  invariant  is  known. 

35.  If  we  take  any  quantic,  and  observe  the  effect  of  any 
linear  substitution,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  its  invariant  will 
remain  unchanged  if  for  x  we  substitute  y  or  Ix,  and  y  for  x. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  order  or  degree  of  the  invariant  is 
still  constant,  and  also  that  the  weight,  which  is  estimated  by 
taking  the  sum  of  the  suffixes  of  the  factors  of  the  several 
terms,  is  constant  for  each  invariant. 

If  s,  Si,  s.^,  &c.  represent  the  suffixes  before  transformation, 
n  —  s,  n—s-^,  n—s^  &c.  will  represent  the  suffixes  of  the  same 
coefficients  after  transformation,  and  we  shall  have 

s  +  Sj 4-  cs*2  &c.  =  n  —  s-\-n  —  8^  -\-  n—s^  &c,, 

or  2m;  =  nt^ 

where  w  =  the  weight  of  the  suffixes  for  each  terra  of  the 
coefficients,  and  t  =.  the  degree  or  order  of  the  invariant.  In 
other  words,  the  weight  is  =  \ut. 


INVARIANTS.  35 

In  this  way  the  invariant  of  any  quantic  may  be  written  at 
once,  the  required  degree  being  known. 

If,  for  instance,  an  invariant  of  a  binary  quartic  of  the 
second  degree  in  the  coefficients  is  required,  we  have 

w  =  \nt  =  4. 

There  will  be  as  many  terms  of  the  proposed  invariant  as  the 
sum  of  two  numbers  0  ...  4  inclusive  can  be  written ;  hence 

is  the  required  invariant.  The  values  of  ^q,  &c.  will  depend 
upon  other  considerations.  The  first  is,  that  an  invariant  must 
be  a  function  of  the  differences  of  the  roots ;  for  it  is  to  be 
unchanged  when  we  effect  the  transformation  by  substituting 
x  +  l  for  X  ;  it  must  therefore  satisfy  a  differential  equation  for 
the  function  of  the  differences  of  the  roots,  as 

«o^-  +  2«,^  +  3^,§^+4«3^  +  &c.=  0 (2). 

da^  da^  da^  da^ 

The  second  consideration  is,  that  the  coefficients  thus  ob- 
tained are  clearly  proportional. 

Applying  then  (2)  to  (1),  we  have 

(.42  +  4^o)  a^a^  +  (4^^  +  8^2)  «ia^2  =  0. 
Taking  ^^  =  1,  we  find  the  invariant  to  be 

a^a^— 4aiCt3  +  3(X2 ; 
or,  using  the  coefficients  of  the  quartic, 


Thus  the  differential  equation  furnishes  the  conditions  to 
determine  the  values  of  A^,  &c. 

If  the  number  of  conditions  is  greater  than  these  coeffi- 
cients, there  is  no  additional  invariant ;  if  the  same,  one  more, 
or  one  alone  ;  if  less,  more  than  one.  If  we  wished  to  obtain 
the  discriminant  of  the  quartic,  which  is  also  an  invariant,  by 
this  method,  or  rather  if  we  wished  to  obtain  an  invariant  of 


36 


INVARIANTS. 


the  sixth  order  in  the  coefficients,  we  should  find  the  number 
of  ways  in  which  12  can  be  written  as  the  sum  of  6  numbers 
from  0  ...  4,  and  we  should  have  as  many  conditions  as 
\nt—l  or  11  can  be  written  as  the  sum  of  6  numbers  from 
0  ...  4. 

36.  We  may  arrive  at  the  covarianfc  in  the  same  manner. 

If  n  represent  the  degree  of  the  quantic,  n^  the  degree  of 
the  covariant,  in  x  and  y,  and  m  the  degree  of  x  in  any  term, 
we  have 

m-\-s-\-s^-{-s^  &c.  =  n^—ni  +  n  —  s  -{-n  —  s^  -j-  n—s.^  &c. 

Calling  m  +  s+Sj  &c.  the  weight,  the  equation  gives 

w  ■=  \  (nt  +  n^. 

If  we  wished  to  form,  for  instance,  the  quartic  covariant  to 
the  quartic  of  the  second  degree  in  the  coefficients,  we  could, 
instead  of  taking  the  Hessian  of  the  quantic,  which  would  give 
the  required  covariant,  estimate  the  terms  multiplying  each 
variable,  since  ^  =  2,  ^  =  4,  m  =  4,  and,  if  we  are  concerned 
with  the  coefficient  of  ic'*,  n^  =  4. 

The  weight  would  then  be  6,  and  hence 
4  +  s  +  5i  =  6, 

5  +  51  =  2. 

There  are  therefore  two    terms   multiplying  x^  each  of  the 
second  degree,  that  is,  a^^a^  and  a-^a-^,  or  ac  and  IP'. 

In  the  same  manner  we  find,  for  the  terms  which  multiply  aj', 
3  +  5  +  Si  =  6. 
Hence  the  terms  are  a^^a^  and  a^cig,  or  ad  and  hc^  &c.  &c. 

Now  it  will  be  perceived  we  do  not  know  how  by  this  pro- 
cess to  connect  ac  and  V',  ad  and  he. 

To  ascertain  this  relation,  let  us  suppose  that 

^;fc"^  +  Mi^"^~V+'^^-%^^2-^"'"'y  +  &c (1) 

represents  the  covariant. 


INVAR  IA^'TS.  37 


Suppose  also 


f^Q-j — \-a^-Y- &G.    and    na,-rr--\-(n—V)  a.—~  &g. 

to  be  represented  by  a  and  /3.     If  now,  in  (1),  we  suppose  the 
same  substitution   as  was  made  in  the  original  quantic,  and 

that 

da    -^'      da   -""''      J^-^^^'      ^-^'^^' 

then  f=a,f+2a,f+Sa,^  +  &c.; 

da  da-^  da^  da^ 

and  we  can  write,  on  the  supposition  that  these  changes  are 
identical, 

--  ^  =  0,  &c.  as  above, 
da 

and,  for  the  same  reason. 

Thus,  when  A^  is  a  function  of  the  differences,  we  can  find 
all  the  other  terms  of  the  covariant ;  that  is,  we  can,  by  suc- 
cessive differentiation,  pass  from  one  term  to  the  other,  and 
thus,  by  the  use  of  these  two  operators,  determine  the  exact 
form  of  the  coefficients  of  the  covariant.  Thus,  in  the  case  of 
the  quadratic  covariant  to  the  quartic,  we  found  A^  to  be  of  the 

dA 
form    Aaffi^-\-Ba^a^^    which,   operated   upon  by  -r-^,  becomes 

da 

(J.H-25)«o«i  =  0.    If  ^.=1,  then  ^=  —  1,  and  Af^-=. a^a^— a^a^. 

dA 
Operate  upon  this  latter  with  —r^^  which  in  this  case  is 

da^  da^  da^         da^ 

and  we  get  2  («5o^3'~"^2^i)  =  -^i* 

dA 

Again,  operating  with  -j^  upon  a^^a^—a^a^,  and  we  have 

4«ifl'3+a^«0— 2^3«l  — S^oflTg  =  ^2  =  flr4«'o+2«ifl'3— 3«2^2- 


38 


INVARIANTS. 


dA 
Operating  then  upon  this  latter  with  -—,  we  obtain 


2(a^a^-a^a^)  =  A^ 


And  finally  we  have 


dA, 
di3 


=  a^^a^—a^a,  =  A^. 


The  covariant  then,  written  fnlly,  is 

(ac-  W)  x'  +  2  {ad-  he)  x^i/  +  (ae  +  2hd-Sc'')  xY 

+  2  (he-cd)  xy^  +  (ce-d')  y\ 

We  see,  therefore,  that  A^  is  the  source  of  the  covariant,  and 
we  can  readily  write 

as  the  law  of  derivation. 

That  Jo  is  appropriately  called  the  source  is  evident  from 
its  repeated  use,  being,  in  fact,  operated  upon  by  each  succes- 
sive differential  symbol,  as  is  seen  on  p.  36. 


39 


CHAPTER  III. 

THEOEY  OF  LEAST  OR  CANONICAL  FORMS. 

37.  When  a  quantic  has  been  reduced  to  the  least  form  in 
which  it  can  be  written,  and  yet  retain  its  generality,  it  is  said 
to  be  reduced  to  its  canonical  form.  The  theory  has  been 
presented  by  Dr.  Sylvester  (see  Philosophical  Magazine,  Nov. 
1851).  The  name  canonical  seems  to  have  been  first  applied 
by  Hermite.  The  number  of  constants  remains  in  most  cases 
implicitly  the  same. 

Since  lx-\-my  may  be  represented  by  X,  and  I'x  +  m'y  by  Y, 
a  cubic  in  two  variables  may  be  represented  by  X^-\-Y^.  This 
is  evident,  as  the  entire  number  of  constants  is  implied  in 
this  form. 

The  quadratic  (a,  h,  c'^x,  yf  can  be  reduced  with  four  con- 
stants* to  the  form  x^  +  y^,  or  to  a  similar  form  Az^-\-Bi^  con- 
taining the  original  number.  But  the  binary  quadratic  in 
geometrical  investigations  is  so  completely  manageable  in  its 

*  To  reduce  2x"+  lix  +  29  to  the  sum  of  two  squares. 
We  have  {Ix  +  myf  +  {}'x  +  m'yf 

as  the  transformed  quadratic,  or 

{x  +  ty-  +  (a;  +  t'Y  =  2a;2  +  14a;  +  29, 

where  t  =  — ,   and  if  =  %, 

I  i 

whence  f^  +  f^  =  29, 

and  t  +  t'=^7  or   t  =  2,   t'=5, 

while  the  coefficient  of  x  is  plainly  1,  therefore   {x  +  2f  +  (a?  +  o)-  is  the 
expression. 

D 


40  INVARIANTS. 

original  form  that  its  reduction  to  a  sum  of  squares  is  not  a 
matter  of  mucli  interest. 

But  the  reduction  of  the  cubic  is  of  more  practical  impor- 
tance, since,  independent  of  geometrical  considerations,  the 
reduction  to  the  sum  of  two  cubes  furnishes  a  method  of 
solution  of  numerical  equations.     The  cubic 

becomes,  we  will  suppose,  by  transformation 

and,  remembering  that  the  Hessian 

^    ^_  I  ^^^^  ^  ^ 
dx^     dy^      \dxdyl 

gives  a  covariant  which  may  be  transformed  in  the  same 
manner  and  into  a  function  of  the  same  constants  as  before, 
that  is, 

Idx'  '  df     [dxdyj  J      dX^  '  dY'     [dXdY/     ^  ^' 

we  see  that  the  transformed  becomes  ADXY  when  B  and  G 
vanish. 

Or,  since  we  are  simply  seeking  the  factors  into  which  the 
Hessian  may  break  up  when  B  and  G  vanish,  we  may  omit  the 
factor  A^  (being  composed  of  the  constants  of  transformation), 
and  examine  the  left-hand  member  of  (1)  for  the  required 
factors  X,  Y. 

With  these  conditions,  the  Hessian  cannot  differ  by  more 
than  a  factor  from  XY. 

As  an  illustration,  let  us  take 

4a3H30a32+  78»  +  70  =  0  =  w. 

The  Hessian  is 

2x-\-5        5x-\-lZ  I  =  x^+bx-\-6. 
5aj  +  13     13a3  +  35 


INVARIANTS.  41* 

Taking  the  factors  of  this,  x  +  2  and  a?  +  3,  we  have 

A(x  +  2y-{-D(x  +  Sf 

for  the  determination  of  A  and  D  by  comparison  with  the 
given  quantic 

^+     D=4, 
SA  +  27D  =  70, 

or  A=2,     D  =  2. 

Hence  2  (a!  +  2)»  +  2  (x  +  Sy  =  u, 

that  is,  (a;  +  2)^  +  (a;4-3)^  diifers  by  only  a  factor  from  it, 
and  therefore 

(aj  +  2)  +  (a3  +  3)  =  0 

gives  a;  =  —  f  as  a  root  of  the  given  cubic.  The  other  roots 
of  this  cubic  being  imaginary,  it  is  evident  that  not  every 
cubic  can  be  reduced  to  this  form,  since  it  must  differ  from 
one  which  contains  three  real  factors,  or  one  containing  a 
square  factor. 

In  the  latter  case,  we  could  evidently  express  the  canonical 
form  of  the  given  cubic  by  (Ix  -\-  myf  (I'x  +  m'y)  or  (x  +  tf  (x  +  f) 
or  x^y. 

To  reduce  x^+7x^-{-16x  +  12  to  the  form  x'^y. 

We  have      x'+(t'-\-  2t)  x^  +  {2tt'  +f)x-\- tH\ 

whence  i'+  2^  =  7, 

m+  f  =  16, 
tH'=  12, 
^  =  2,     r=3. 


38.  The  canonizant. — This  is  a  name  given  by  Dr.  Sylvester 
to  a  determinant  which  is  used  in  the  extension  of  the  method 
of  the  last  Article.     The  theory  assumes  that  a  quantic  of  the 

D  2 


42 


INVARIANTS. 


fifth  degree  can  be  reduced  to  a  sum  of  three  terms  of  the 
fifth  degree,  one  of  the  seventh  degree  to  the  sum  of  four 
terms  of  the  seventh  degree,  and  thus  for  every  odd  degree  ; 
and  then  proceeds  to  make  the  assumption  good  in  the 
following  manner.  The  transformation  is  supposed  to  be 
efiecfced,  as  before,  by  letting 

s  =  Ix+my,     t  =  l'x-\-my,     v  =  V'x  +  m'y. 

The  theorem  then  requires  that 

(a,  &,  c,  d,  e,f^x,  yf  =  s^  +  f^-v\ 

Since  the  right-hand  member  of  this  equation  contains  implicitly 
as  many  constants  as  the  given  quantic,  it  must  be  capable  of 
expressing  that  quantic  when  s,  tj  v  have  been  properly 
determined. 

Jjetu  =  the  left-hand  member,  and  CTthe  right-hand  member 
of  the  above  equation ;  then,  by  successive  differentiation,  we 
shall  have 


U 


d^  d' 

dx*  dx^dy 

d*  d' 

dx^dy  dx^dy' 

d'  d' 

dx^dy^  dxdy^ 


d' 


dx^dy^ 

d"- 
dxdy^ 
d^ 

dy' 


=  TJ 


d^ 
dx'' 


dx^dy^ 


d^ 
dy' 


or  the  symmetrical  determinants, 


ax  +  hy  hx  +  cy  cx  +  dy 
hx  +  cy  cx-\-dy  dx  +  ey 
cx  +  dy     dx  +  ey     ex^-fy 


ih    rt    rv 

Ims     I'mt     rm'v 


I' 

P 

r 

=  s.t.v 

I    r 

2 

r    r 

2  ^ 

r 

I 

Im 

I'm' 

l"m" 

m  m' 

m'  w!' 

VYl' 

m 

m' 

m' 

m" 

INVARIANTS. 

That  is,  if  the  expansion  of 

ex  +  dy 


43 


ex+fy 


yields  the  factors  s,  t^  v,  then  these  factors  will  differ  from  the 
factors  {x  +  ty),  (x  +  t'y) ,  {x  +  fy)  by  only  nnmerical  coefficients  ; 
and,  consequently, 

(a,  &,  c,  d,  e,  fix,  yy  =  Tix  +  tyy+Tix  +  fyY  +  r  (x  +  fyf. 


39.  In  the  same  manner,  to  find  the  condition  that  a  quantic 

of  even  degree  can  be  reduced  to  the  sum  of  —  n^  powers, 
where  n  is  even. 

The  nature  of  this  condition  is  seen  from  the  last 
Article.  The  determinant  formed  from  the  n  differentials 
will,  on  the  supposition  that  the  quantic  can  be  reduced  to  the 

sum  of   —  n^^  powers,  vanish   by  the   same   process   whicli 

proved  that  a  quantic  of  odd  degree,  as  for  instance  the  fifth, 
could  be  reduced  to  a  sum  of  three  powers  of  the  same  degree. 
The  determinant  formed  from  the  n  differentials  in  the  latter 
case  being  a  covariant,  gave  the  necessary  factors  s,  t,  v,  while, 
in  the  case  now  under  consideration,  the  proposed  determinant, 
it  will  be  seen,  gives  an  invariant  whose  vanishing  proves  that 
the  quantic  can  be  reduced  to  a  sum  of  powers  each  of  the 
n^  degree. 

To  see  if  2a;*  +  12ajH30«H36a;-}-17  =  8  can  be  reduced  to 
a  sum  of  two  fourth  powers,  we  take  the  fourth  differentials 
as  in  the  last  Article  and  we  obtain  the  determinant 


2  3     5 

3  6     9 
5    9    17 


=  0. 


The  vanishing  of  this  determinant  shows  that  in  this  case 


44  INVARIANTS. 

the  reduction  is  possible.  To  obtain  the  binomials,  we  equate 
like  powers  of  S  and  s,  v^in  8  =  s*+v^,  and  we  find 

s  =  :r  +  !I,     V  =  a;-\-2. 

40.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  carry  this  proof  into  the  higher 
powers.  But  it  may  be  said,  in  general,  that  if  the  quantic 
does  not  break  up  into  sums  of  powers  of  binomials,  it  will  be 
sufficient  to  add  to  these  powers  some  multiple  of  their  product 
or  product  of  their  powers,  as 

(a,  h,  c,  d,  ej^,  yy=  s'  +  t'  +  6DsH\ 

and  (a,  h,  c,  d,  e,f,  gjx,  yf  =  s^^-f+u^-\-Estu. 

That  these  are  the  least  or  canonical  forms  may  be  seen 
by  extending  the  proof  ah'eady  given.  The  subject  in  such 
form  as  developed  by  Sylvester  and  others  would  not  be 
necessary  here. 

41.  Comhinants. — We  have  seen  (Art.  20)  that  the  eliminant 
of  a  system  of  linear  equations  is  an  invariant.  An  invariant 
or  eliminant  of  a  system  of  equations  or  quantics  of  a  uniform 
degree  higher  than  the  first  is  called  a  comhinant.  One 
peculiarity  of  the  combinant  is  that  it  satisfies  the  equation 

da         db 
where  0  is  the  combinant  of 

ax''-\-nhx''-''-j-&c.  =  0 (1), 

a,x''-\-nh,x''-'-\-&c.  =  0 (2). 

&c.  &c. 

42.  Another  peculiarity  to  be  observed  is,  that  if  a  pair  of 
quantics  have  a  common  factor,  their  Jacobian  will  contain 
this  factor  in  the  second  degree. 

Take  the  equations  as  above,  and  form  their  Jacobian,  and 


INVARIANTS. 


45 


the  truth  of  this  will  be  evident ;  or,  let  a  be  a  common  factor  in 

u=.  ax^  +  Zay'^, 


then 


du 

du 

dx 

dy 

dv 
dx 

djo_ 
dy 

=  -  20a'xy. 


If,  in  (1)  and  (2),  (Art.  41),  w  =  2,  we  shall  have,  for  /, 

ax  +hy      hx  +cy  \  =  /, 
a^x-i-\y     \x-^c^y\ 

whose  discriminant  we  find  to  be 

4  (a&i — a^ h)  (Jbc^ —h^c)  —  (ac^  —  a^ cy. 

This,  as  we  have  seen,  is  the  eliminant  of  u  and  v  as  quad- 
ratics; or,  in  other  words,  we  find  that  in  this  case,  at  least,  the 
J  of  u  and  v  contains  their  eliminant  as  a  factor :  and  this  is  a 
truth  to  be  observed  when  ?i  =  3,  4,  &c.,  in  which  cases  the 
discriminant  of  J,  as  is  evident,  will  be  composed  of  the 
eliminant  of  the  quantics  and  some  other  factor  whose  form 
may  be  determined. 

43.  If  (1)  and  (2)  above  be  represented  by  u  and  v,  then 
u  -f  hv  represents  a  locus  common  to  u  and  v ;  and,  by  assigning 
varying  values  to  h,  we  shall  obtain  a  system  of  quantics  some 
of  which  will  contain  square  factors  ;  and  in  the  involution  of 
points  formed  by  these  quantics  there  will  be  as  many  double 
points  as  there  are  quantics  which  contain  square  factors. 
The  number  of  these  is  seen  to  be  2  (n—1),  or  is  the  same  as 
the  order  in  the  coefficients  of  the  discriminant.  The  number 
of  double  points  may  then  be  determined  by  the  Jacobian  of 
w  and  V.     If  u-\-hv  has  a  factor  (x—af,  then  a  will  satisfy 

^  +  7,^^1  =  0,  and^  +  ^^=0.  It  will  evidently  satisfy  the 
ax        ax  dy        dy 


4^6 


INVARIANTS. 


equation  obtained  by  eliminating  h,  and  therefore  the  Jacobian 
of  (1)  and  (2).  We  thus  have  an  easy  method  of  determining 
the  number  of  double  points  resulting  from  the  involution  of 
these  quantics.  In  this  form  we  see  that  h  can  be  so  determined 
that  u-\-hv  shall  contain  the  square  factor  (aj  —  a)^ ;  and,  by 
adding  another  condition,  we  may  determine  the  valae  of  con- 
stants so  that  the  quantic  shall  contain  {x  —  af.  The  coefficient 
in  (1)  and  (2)  will  then  be  of  the  degree  3  (??  — 2).  Conversely, 
if  (x  —  aY  exists  as  a  factor  in  u-\-liv-Ymt,  this  factor  in  the 
first  degree  will  exist  in  the  three  second  differential  coeffi- 
cients, and  consequently  in  their  eliminant  with  respect  to  li 


0, 


and  m  ;  that  is 

d'^u       d'v       d^t 
dx"       dx^       dx^ 

d'u       dh       dH 

dxdy    dxdy    dxdy 

d^u       d\'       dH 
df       df       df 

which  gives  the  number  of  triple  points  in  the  above  system 
u-\-hv  +  mt ;  and,  if  2/  =  l?  it  expresses  the  number  of  these 
points  on  the  axis  of  x,  or  3  {n  —  2),  which  fulfils  the  condition 
of  a  combinant. 


44.  Tad-invariant. — When  we  find  the  eliminant  of  (1)  and 
(2),  and  equate  it  to  zero,  we  express  the  condition  that  the  two 
curves  may  be  tangent  to  each  other.  If  we  express  also  the 
existence  of  a  cubic  factor  in  any  quantic  of  the  series  u  -}-  hvj 
that  is,  a  cuspidal  curve,  by  ^"=0  and  by  V=0,  one  having 
two  double  points,  or  two  square  factors,  and  by  TF=0,  what 
has  been  described  above  as  the  tact-invariant ;  then  the  dis- 
criminant of  u-\-hv  with  respect  to  h  will  contain  Z7,  F,  W  as 
factors. 

If  u  and  V  are  tangent  to  each  other,  then  the  discriminant 
of  u+hv  will,  as  a  function  of  h,  have  a  square  factor ;  in  other 
words,  when  expressed  geometrically,  it  is  the  condition  that  a 
curve  has  a  double  point. 


INVARIANTS.  47 

45.  The  tact-invariant  is  of  the  order  Sn  (n—1)  in  the 
coefficients.  Hence,  if  we  have  three  surfaces  L,  P,  Q  (of  Z,  m, 
n  degrees),  the  condition  that  two  of  the  Imn  points  of  inter- 
section will  coincide  is  called,  in  this  case,  the  tact-invariant, 
and  the  coefficients  of  1/  are  in  the  degree  mn  (2l+n-\-m—4<)f 
and  so  of  P  and  Q. 

The  tact-invariant  of  two  surfaces  aL  and  P  have  the  co- 
efficients of  X  in  the  degree  m(V  +  2lm  +  Sm^ — 4Z— 8m  +  6).* 
These  results  are  obtained  from  quantics  of  four  variables. 

The  geometrical  importance  of  these  results  will  be  further 
seen. 

46.  As  to  the  numher  of  invariants  of  a  binary  quantic,  we 
have  already  seen  that  a  quadratic  has  one,  that  a  cubic  has 
one,  each  of  these  being  the  discriminant  of  the  given  quantic. 

If  we  take  the  next  in  order,  the  quantic 

(a,  b,  c,  d,  e^x,  yY, 

we  can  easily  determine  the  number  of  ordinary  invariants, 
omitting  from  our  enumeration  those  which  are  expressible  as 
rational  and  integral  functions  of  the  same  or  lower  degrees. 
Remembering  that  the  invariant  must  satisfy  the  differential 
equation 

ao-^+2ai--— +3a2-_— +&c.  =  0, 
rtaj  da^  da^ 

and  that  the  last  invariant  must  be  of  the  order  2  in  the 
coefficients,  it  must  therefore  be  of  the  weight  4  in  the 
coefficients,  that  is, 

Aa^a^^ + Ba^a-^  +  Ga^a,^. 

Operating  upon  this  with  the  differential  equation,  we  have 
AiAa^a^  +  SBa^a^  +  Ba^a^ + 4^Ga^a^, 

*  Terquem's  Annales,  Vol.  XIX.,  and  Quarterly  Journal,  Vol.  I. 


48 


INVARIANTS. 


which,  taking  A  as  1,  gives  for  B,  —4,  and  for  C,  3 ;  and  we 
have  by  substitution 

or  ae—4>hd-\-dc^, 

as  the  invariant  fun'ction,  which  is  the  same  as  would  have 
resulted  by  actual  transformation.  Had  we  followed  the 
latter  method,  we  should  have  found  that  the  function  of  the 
new  would  be  equal  to  the  old  when  multiplied  by  the  fourth 
power  of  the  modulus,   (Im—TmY  or  A^,  or,  written  fully, 

AE-4.BD  +  W^  =  ^'  {ae-4;bd  +  'dc^)  (1). 

Proceeding  now  to  the  invariant  of  the  third  order  in  the 
coefficients,  we  see  that  the  weight  would  be  6,  and  must  be 
of  the  general  form 

which  embraces  all  possible  forms. 

By  applying  the  differential  equations  as  before,  we  have 

ace  +  2hcd-~ad^—eh'^  —  c^j 

or        AGE+2BCD-AD'-EB'-G' 

=  A^  (ace  +  2hcd-ad''~Gh'-c^) (2). 

If  the  A^  does  not  follow  clearly  by  symmetry,  the  actual 
transformation  will  make  it  evident.  If  we  proceed  to  the 
fourth  order  in  the  coefficients  of  another  invariant,  we  shall 
find  only  a  function  of  those  already  found,  which  therefore  is 
not  to  be  counted  in  the  enumeration. 

47.  Absolute  Invariants. — If  we  eliminate  A  between  (1)  and 
(2)  in  the  above,  we  shall  obtain  what  has  been  called  an 
absolute  invariant,  that  is, 

{ACI]-\-2BGB--ATy-BB''-Gy  {ae-4;bd-^Zcy 

=  (^AE-WB-^^Cy  {ace  +  2bcd-ad'-eh'-cy. 


INVARUNTS.  49 

And  if  J  and  T  represent  the  invariants  (1)  and  (2),  their 
ratio  P  :  T^,  as  is  seen,  is  unchanged  by  transformation. 

48.  As  to  the  discriminant  of  the  quartic  which  is  the  elimi- 
nant  of  its  two  first  differentials,  we  shall  see  that  we  can 
arrive  at  a  method  of  derivation  by  means  of  (1)  and  (2).  We 
have  only  to  remember  that  the  eliminant  vanishes  if  the 
differentials  have  a  common  factor,  and  that  this  factor  will 
exist  if  the  binary  quantic  contains  a  square  factor.  We  have 
only,  to  arrive  at  this  condition,  to  suppose  the  first  two  coeflB.- 
cients  to  vanish  ;  the  quantic  then  has  a  square  factor,  since  it 
is  divisible  by  y^.  It  is  clear,  also,  that  the  invariant  of  such 
a  quantic  must  vanish.  The  one  contains  the  other  as  a 
factor  when  the  two  first  coefficients  a  and  h  vanish.  Or  we 
may  state  it  thus : — The  invariant  is  a  symmetric  function  of 
the  differences  of  the  roots,  and  the  discriminant  is  the  product 
of  the  squares  of  the  differences  between  any  two  roots  (Art. 
17)  ;  that  is,  the  invariant,  on  the  above  supposition  that  the 
roots  are  equal,  as  expressed  in  the  terms  of  the  roots,  must 
contain  the  difference  between  the  roots  taken  two  and  two. 
Now,  since  the  ratio  ot  P  :  T^  is  unchanged  by  transformation, 
a  new  invariant  may  be  constructed  from  them,  and  we  see 
that  P  —  27T^  will  vanish  when  a  and  h  are  each  0;  that  is, 
I  becomes  3c^,  and  T,  —  c^  on  that  supposition.  And  since  we 
know  (Art.  15)  that  this  form  gives  us  the  required  order  in 
the  coefficients,  we  conclude  it  to  be  the  discriminant,  that  is, 

(ae—Ud  +  dc'y-27(ace-\-2hcd-ad''-eh'-c')\ 

which,  being  of  the  form  of  PzkJcT^,  is  not  commonly  reckoned 
as  distinct  from  I  and  T ;  and  thus  generally  when,  as  in  this 
case,  I  and  T  are  expressible  as  an  invariant,  a  function  both 
rational  and  integral  of  I  and  T,  such  function  is  not  counted 
as  a  new  invariant.  We  would  infer  also,  in  the  same  manner, 
that,  if  I  and  T  are  invariants  of  the  same  degree,  then  IdikT 
need  not  be  counted. 


60  INVARIANTS. 

To  sum  up  our  number  of  invariants  thus  far,  we  have 
ac—V'  the  invariant  of  the  quadratic  (a,  &,  cja;,  y)^, 
which  is  the  discriminant. 

Next,  o?d?  -  6a  bed + Wd  +  4ac«  -  Sh'c' 

is  the  discriminant  of  the  cubic  (a,  h,  c,  d'^x,  yY  (Art.  5);  that 
is,  it  is  the  eliminant  of  its  two  first  differentials. 

This  is  its  only  invariant  (Art.  22). 

And,  lastly,  the  I  and  T  of  the  quarfcic  (a,  h,  c,  d,  e^x^  y)^ 
just  considered,  which  are  two  ordinary  invariants. 

49.  The  Series  of  Covariants. — It  follows  from  the  definitions 
of  invariants  and  covariants,  and  may  easily  be  verified,  that 
every  invariant  of  a  covariant  is  an  invariant  of  the  original 
quantic,  and  the  contrary  ;  consequently  the  quadratic  can  have 
no  other  covariant  than  the  quadratic  itself;  or  we  say  that  this 
fact  follows  immediately  from  the  consideration  that  there  are 
no  difiierences  of  roots — there  being  in  this  case  but  one  differ- 
ence— and  that  there  can  be  no  function  of  the  difierences  of 
the  roots.  But  in  the  cubic,  since  a  symmetric  function  of 
differences  of  roots,  and  differences  between  x  and  one  or  more 
of  the  roots,  is  a  covariant,  we  can  form  a  covariant  distinct 
from  the  cubic.     The  form  of  this  covariant, 

(aH-Sahc  +  2h\  ahd-2ac'  +  h\ 

-acd  +  2h'd-hc\  Zlcd-ad^-2c'-\x,  y)\ 

has  been  investigated  in  Art.  34,  and  the  process  need  not 
be  repeated  here.  We  have  also  the  Hessian  which  Dr. 
Salmon  writes 

B  = 


a      b      c 
bed 

y^  ^xy  x^ 


=  {ac-b')x^  +  {ad-bc)xy  +  (J}d-c^)y' 


These  two  covariants  examined  in  connection  with  the  quantic 
itself,  which  is  also  a  covariant,  show  at  once  that  the  list  for 


INVARIANTS.  51 

the  cubic  is  complete.  For  we  see  tliat  the  coefficient  of  o? 
in  each  case  is  a,  ac—lcP'^  o?d  —  ^abc-\-W^  which  are  called  the 
leaders.  Kecurring  now  to  the  discussion  (Art.  35),  we  find 
that  whatever  analytical  relation  exists  between  the  leaders  of 
covariants,  that  same  or  similar  relation  will  hold  with  the 
covariants  as  a  whole.  This  being  the  case,  we  need  only 
operate  upon  these  leaders  in  order  to  discover  the  successive 
covariants. 

Thus  B.  above  is  the  Jacobian  of  the  first  covariant 
(a,  5,  c,  c^Jaj,  ?/)',  or  F,  and  the  original  quantic  (a,  &,  c^a?,  ijfi 
say ;  so  also  the  third  covariant  in  the  above  series,  whose 
leader  is  o?d — 3a6c4-26',  is  the  Jacobian  of  the  above  Hessian, 
and  the  original  quantic,  which  in  this  case,  the  cubic,  is  F, 
and  thus  each  succeeding  covariant,  is  found  by  taking  the 
Jacobian  of  the  last  covariant  of  the  series  and  the  original 
quantic,  whatever  that  may  be.  For  the  cubic  this  last 
covariant  is  indicated  by  /. 

50.  The  question  whether  any  other  covariants  may  be 
properly  added  to  this  list,  as  regards  the  cubic,  may  be 
examined  as  follows.  We  see  that  a-,  ac,  o^d^  &c.  are  divisible 
by  a.  We  find  then  what  new  functions,  rational  and  integral, 
of  these  leaders  may  be  formed  whicb  contain  a.  In  this  case, 
the  leaders  of  H, /,  ac  —  V"^  aH ■^dahc  + 21^^  become,  on  the 
supposition  that  a  =  0,  4B'*+ J'^  =  0.  It  therefore  contains 
some  power  of  a.  Performing  the  operation  indicated  by 
4iH^-\-J^  =  0  and  dividing  by  a^,  we  obtain  the  discriminant 
of  the  cubic       aH^-6ahcd-Sh'c'-\-4<ac^+Mh\ 

Now  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  covariant,  as  also  an 
invariant,  is  by  definition  a  function  of  diJfferences  of  the  roots, 
and  that  a  covariant  is  known  when  its  source  or  leading  co- 
efficient is  known  (Art.  36)  ;  hence  these  leaders,  as  well  as 
resulting  invariants,  will  satisfy  concurrently  the  difierential 

equation    F  ( «o  -r—  +  2«i  -; h  Sa. h  &c. )  =  0, 

\      da^  da^  da^  I 

where  F  is  any  leader  or  invariant. 


52  INVARIANTS. 

From  this  fact,  and  in  conformity  with  tbe  definition,  we 
might,  for  the  purposes  of  this  classification,  include  the 
invariants  with  the  covariant  of  a  quantic.  The  above  dis- 
criminant, then,  may  be  classed  with  the  coefficients  of  the 
CO  variants. 

Regarded  in  this  light,  we  shall  find  that  a  quantic  of  the 
^th  degree  will  have  n  covariants,  including  the  quantic  itself, 
so  that  each  other  covariant,  multiplied  by  some  power  of  the 
quantic,  will  be  equal  to  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  the 
n  covariants.  Thus,  at  once,  if  we  represent  the  discriminant 
(invariant)  by  A,  we  shall  have 

A7^  =  /2  +  4B■^* 

or,  using  the  canonical  forms, 

a^dP  {ax^+dyy  =  a'd'  (ax' -  dfy -\- 4^  {adxyf. 

51.  If  in  A  we  let  «  =  0,  we  have  left  a  quantity  containing 
coefficients  which  cannot  be  eliminated  by  combining  with 
—h^  or  25^.  In  other  words,  no  new  functions  of  ac  —  W, 
a^d—Sahc  +  2h'  can  be  formed  divisible  hj  a.  Hence  we  may 
say  for  the  cubic  the  list  is  complete. 

52.  The  covariants  of  the  quartic  are  first  the  Hessian,t  and 
then  the  Jacobian  of  this  Hessian  and  the  quartic  itself  must 
be  taken.     We  find  H  to  be 

{ac-h\  2(ad-hc),   ae  +  2bd-3c\  2(Jbe-cd),  ce-d^Jx,yY. 

The  Jacobian  has  its  first  term,  or  leader,  a^d^dahc  +  2b'  &c., 
which,  by  Prof.  Cayley's  symbolical  representation  (where  the 
Hessian  of  every  binary  quantic  is  written  12^,  and  the 
Jacobian  ofH  and  the  quantic  12^,  13),  is  easily  distinguished, 
and  indicates  a  basis  of  calculation. 


*  Prof.  Cayley,  "Phil.  Trans.,"  1854. 

t  Known  in  geometry  as  the  Harmonic  Conic. 


INVARIANTS.  ,  53 

53.  We  might  state  here  more  fully  the   principle  of  this 
symbolic  representation. 

In  Arts.  30  and  34,  it  was  shown  that  — — ,  — — ,  &c., regarded 

ax     ay 

as  operating  symbols  contragredient  to  a?,  y,  &c.,  while  trans- 
formed by  a  direct  substitution  x,  y,  &c.,  will  be  transformed 
by  an  inverse  substitution,  and  the  contrary ;  and  that,  repre- 
senting — — ,  — — ,  &c.,  by  a,  /3,  &c.,  operating  symbols  could  be 
ax     ay 

formed  which,  substituted  in  the  quartic,  a  covariant  or  invari- 
ant could  be  formed  according  as  the  variables  were  or  were 
not  removed  by  differentiation.  We  can  thus  form  an  opera- 
tive symbol  for  a  system  of  quartics  by  a  system  of  determi- 
nants formed  of  a,  (3,  &c.  Thus  a-^f^^—a^^^-^,  represented  by  12,  is 
an  invariant  symbol  of  operation.  If  we  operate  on  two  quan- 
tics  8  and  V,  the  result  of  the  operation  upon  their  product 
^Fby  12  is  the  Jacobian. 
If  these  are  quadratics, 

then  the  result  of  the  operative  symbol  12^,  or 

a\  /32  —  2ai  ft  agft  +  «2  /3?  , 
on  iSFwill  be  an  invariant,  i.e.,  ac^-\-ca^—2hi^. 

In  the  same  manner,  12^  13  expresses  the  operative  symbol 
(or  its  effect  upon  a  binary  quantic) 

(aift-«2A)'  («i/53-/5s«i). 

54.  We  have  then,  as  the  effect  of  12  on  SV,  the  Jacobian 

d8   dV  _  dS   dV 
dx    dy        dy    dx^ 

and  the  application  to  any  two  quantics  may  be  expressed  by 

Id8   dV      dS    dVy 
\  dx    dy        dy    dx  I  ^ 

or  12". 


54  •  INVARIANTS. 

In  the  former  case,  the  exponent  of  the  power  does  not  apply 
to  8  and  V,  but  only  to  the  symbols  of  differentiation.  The 
result  is,  of  course,  the  same  in  both  cases — an  invariant  if 
n  =  the  degree  of  the  quantic,  since  all  the  variables  are  removed 
by  differentiation,  or  a  covariant  if  n  is  less  than  the  degree  of 
the  quantic.  From  this  it  will  immediately  appear  that,  if  by 
this  process,  we  wish  to  form  the  covariant  of  a  single  quantic, 
we  have  only  to  make  S  =  V.  Thus,  if  we  desired  to  form  the 
covariant  of  a  single  quantic  with  the  symbol  12^,  or 

fds  dv  _  ds  dvy 

\  da:    dy         dy    dx  / 
we  have  only  to  make  iS  =  F,  and  the  latter  symbol  becomes 

g  r  d-'s  d's     (  d's  \n 

Ida;'     dy'        \da;dy)y 

which,  applied  to  two  quadratics  8  and  F,  would  in  this  case 
give  2  (ac  —  h').  Hence,  in  general,  the  quantic  to  be  operated 
upon  may  be  conceived  to  be  the  product  of  two  or  more  quantics 
8,  F,  T,  &c.,  whose  variables  are  distinguished  by  subscripts, 
as  ^1,  yi,  0^2,  y2>  <^^'j  ^^^  when  the  differentiation  is  complete 
the  variables  are  written  solely  ^r,  y.  Since  32  and  23  are 
clearly  the  same  with  opposite  signs,  as  also  12  and  21,  it 
will  appear  that  either  of  these  symbols  with  odd  powers  will, 
when  applied  to  any  single  function  as  8Vf  cause  it  to  vanish. 
Following  this  analogy,  we  can  easily  write  the  symbol  for  a 
system  of  ternary  quadratics.     If,  for   ^i,  y^^  &c.,  we  write 

J J  &c.  (in  which  the  cogredient  variables  can  be  written 

dx^    dy^ 

as  a  determinant 


VX       2/2       2/3 


=  VL6\ 


INVARIANTS. 


55 


we  shall  have,  when  the  symbol  123^  is  applied  to  the  ternary 
quadratics 

a^  +  ly^  +  cz^  +  2/?/;3  +  2gzx  +  tlixy 

=  6  (abc-\'2fgh-af''hg^-ch^), 


a 

h 

9 

h 

b 

f 

9 

f 

c 

i.e.,  six  times  the  discriminant  of  the  ternary  quadratic  when 
a  =  (Xj  =  ag  &c. 


66 


CHAPTER  lY. 

COMPUTATION  AND   GEOMETRICAL  APPLICATION  OF 
INVARIANTS. 

55.  The  attentive  reader  of  tlie  preceding  pages  will  have 
now  no  great  difl&cnlty  in  making  a  variety  of  important  ap- 
plications of  the  Invariant  Theory. 

It  is  shown  in  works  on  the  Conic  Sections,  that  if  Fand  Fj 
represent  two  conies,  there  are  three  values  of  h  for  which 
IcVzkV-^  represents  a  pair  of  right  lines. 

We  take 

ax^  +  ly'^  +  cz^ + 2/2/»  +  2^«aj  +  2'hxy  =  0 

as  the  general  homogeneous  equation  of  the  second  degree  in 
three  variables ;  and  this  is  intimately  connected  with 

ax^-\-'by^-\-2hxy  +  2gx  +  2fy-^c  =  0 (1) ; 

the  latter  being  derived  from  the  former  by  making  z-=\. 

This  latter  may  represent  two  right  lines,  and  does  in  ge- 
neral, when  its  coefficients  fulfil  the  relation 


a 

h 

9 

h 

h 

f 

9 

f 

c 

=  ahc-\-2fgh—af—hg^—ch^  =  0, 


which  is  obtained  by  the  resolution  of  (1)  as  a  quadratic ;  the 
above  determinant  being  the  condition  necessary  to  make  the 
quantity  under  the  radical  a  perfect  square.     If  we  call 


then 


Fi  =  OiX^  +  6i2/'  +  Cjg'  +  2f^yz  +  2g^zx  +  2hiXy, 
Aj  =  ajfejCi  -j-  2/1^1^1  —  ctifi  —  &i^i  -  Ci^i . 


INVARIANTS.  57 

It  is  not  difficult  to  see  that  the  three  values  of  h^  for  which 
fcFzb  Fi  represents  a  pair  of  right  lines,  is  obtained  by  substi- 
tuting ka  +  a-^i  hh-\-h^,  &c.,  for  a,  &,  c,  &c.,  in  A.  Writing 
this  result  in  full,  we  shall  find  that  h^  will  have  A  for  its  co- 
efficient; W  and  h  will  have  functions  for  their  coefficients, 
which  may  be  represented  by  d  and  d^ ;  and  lastly,  that  A^ 
appears  as  the  absolute  term ;  that  is, 

A^H0/^'  +  0iA;  +  Ai  =  O. 
The  value  of 

0  =  {hc-f)  a,  +  (ca -/)  h,  +  (ah  -  h')  c^ 

+  2  (y/.~a/)/,  +  2  Qif-lg)g,  +  2  (fy-ch)  h, ...  (2), 

and  01  =  (&iCi  —fi)  a  +  &c., 

the  same  as  0,  the  accents  being  interchanged. 

Now  between       A]c^+dh^  +  djc  +  \z=  0  (3), 

and  ^7+  Fi  =  0, 

we  may  eliminate  ^,  which  gives 

AF'--0F'F+0iFiF='-F'Ai  =  O, 

denoting  the  three  pairs  of  lines  which  join  the  four  points  of 
intersection  of  F  and  Fj. 

56.  Since  any  two  conies  have  a  common  self-conjugate 
triangle,  and  since  they  may  be  written 

V  =ax^+  hif  +  cz"  =  0, 

(see  T.,  Arts.  45,  47,  56,)  or 

Fi  =  i6^  +  2/'  +  «'  =  0, 

where  x  is  written  for  ic-v/^i,  &c.,  we  obtain,  by  Invariants, 
the  three  values   for  which  hV-^  +  V  represents  right  lines. 

£  2 


68  INVARIANTS. 

Then  A  reduces  to  ahc, 

6=  ah-\-'bc  +  aCj     6^^  =  a  +  h  +  c,     Aj  =  1 ; 

or,  were  we  to  substitute  Jca+a-^,  &c.,  in  ahc,  we  must  have, 
for  the  required  condition, 

h^  +  Jc^(a  +  h+c)-\-k{a'b-\-ac-\-hc)-\-ahc  =  0, 

which  is  satisfied  by  —a,  —  &,  —  c. 

For  another  example,  let  us  take  the  ellipse* 

and  the  circle     (x—x^y+  (y—yiY—'^'^  =  0  =  Fj. 

In  forming  A  from  F,  we  must  remember  to  affect  the  result 
by  the  negative  sign,  since  c  or  the  coefficient  of  z^,  as  well  as 
z^  itself,  is  reduced  to  unity  with  the  minus  sign.     Hence 

'^^"■^' 
To  obtain  6  we  must  recur  to  the  general  equation  of  the  circle 

x'  +  y'  +  2gx  +  2fy  +  c  =  0. 

From  which  we  find,  by  comparing  the  values  of  the  coeffi- 
cients with  those  in  the  preceding  Article,  that 


-h- 

Sfl  =   »!. 

/i  =  Vi, 

'=^. 

c,  =  x] 

+  y\- 

r\ 

c=-l 

From  these  values  we 

find  d  to  be 

_  i  _  i  +  '^'i  +  yl-^ 


*  Students  who  are  familiar  with  Salmon's  "  Conic  Sections,"  will  at 
once  recognize  these  examples.  It  is  believed  that  the  treatment  here 
given  them  will  completely  remove  the  difficulties  which  hitherto  have 
been  experienced  by  many  in  their  solution. 


INVARIANTS.  59 


^.«  +  yl-^-'^'-n 


In  the  same  manner,  by  interchanging  the  accents,  we  find 

+  (l-0)(-l) 


0^  =  (^\+y\-''-yl)~,  +  (.^\+y\-^-''])i 


~  J  '^  h'       ^       ''Aa'  "^feO' 


and  Aj  =  ajj  +  2/J  —  r^  —  2/J  —  »5  =  —  »•' ; 

from  which  the  equation  in  Jc  is  formed. 

If,  instead  of  the  ellipse,  we  had  taken  the  circle 
»^  -h  2/'  -  r'  =  0, 
Fj  remaining  as  before,  accenting  the  r,  we  should  have  had 

A  =  -  r^ 
since  a  =  1,     6  =  1,     c  =  —  r^\ 

e:=(-r'-0)l  +  (-7^-0)l  +  (l-0)(xl+y\-r\) 
=  xl  +  yl-  2r'  ^r],  by  (2)  of  Art.  55  ; 


»2 

A,  =  —  r^ 


as  in  the  previous  case. 

57.  Since  A,  A^,  6,  6^  are  invariants  of  the  system  of  conies 
under  consideration,  their  computation  should  be  carefully 
studied,  because  in  solid,  as  we  shall  see,  as  well  as  in  plan© 
geometry,  these  functions  are  fundamental. 

Take  the  parabola  y^  =  2px,  and  Fj  as  before,  the  circle 


€0  INVARIANTS. 

Here  5  =  1,  while  p  corresponds  to  y  in  the  more  general 
equation,  as  is  evident  from  (1),  Art.  65,  the  other  coeJSicients 
reducing  to  zero. 

We  have  then  A  =  —  5^^  =  —  p', 

d  =  (0-/)  l  +  (0  +  2p)  (-C.0  =  -p  (2x,-\-pl 

A  =  —  r^ ,  as  before. 

If  x^  +  y""  =  r"  and  {^^-x;f-\-{y-y^^  =  rj 

represent  two  circles,  and  d  the  distance  between  their  centres, 
we  have,  as  before, 

A  =  -r^     0  =  cZ^-2r2-rf,     Q^  =  d^-r'-^r^,     Ai  =  -rJ. 

58.  If  we  turn  to  equation  (3),  Art,  55,  and  observe  its  degree, 
and  remember  that  two  conies  always  intersect  in  four  points, 
and  that  four  points  may  be  connected  by  six  lines,  viz.,  12, 13, 
14,  23,  24,  34,  we  may  conclude  that  this  equation  is  that  of 
the  three  pairs  of  chords  of  intersection  of  the  two  conies. 

An  easy  application  of  this  equation  is  found  in  the  problem, 
to  find  the  locus  of  the  intersection  of  normals  to  a  conic  from 
the  ends  of  a  chord  which  passes  through  a  given  point. 

The  equation  of  the  normal  to  an  ellipse  is 

d^xy^  —  h^x^y  =  c^x^y^. 

If  we  interchange  the  accents,  the  right  line  becomes  a  curve,    \ 

in  fact,  an  hyperbola     a^x-^y—V^xy-^  =  c^xy, 

expressing  that  the  point  on  the  normal  is  known,  and  that 
the  point  on  the  curve  is  sought ;  consequently,  we  see  that 
the  intersections  of  the  given  ellipse  and  the  equation  last 
written  are  points  whose  normals  will  pass  through  the  given 
point ;  that  is,  x^  y^ 


INVARIANTS.  61 

Let  4+?^-l=0  =  7, 


a   '   2,3 


2  {a^xy^-V^x^y—c\y^)  =  Vy 

This  latter  equation,  it  is  evident,  should  be,  as  has  been 
done,  multiplied  by  2  in  order  to  sustain  the  fixed  numerical 
relation  expressed  in  the  corresponding  coefficients  of  the 
general  equation.  The  equation  of  the  six  chords  joining  the 
feet  of  normals  through  xy,  the  locus  required  when  satisfying 
the  given  point,  is  readily  formed  by  substituting  the  requisite 
invariants  in  equation  (3),  referred  to  above. 
We  have  then 

since  \  =  c^, 

9i  =  ^Yf  and  ai  =  h^  =  e^=z  0, 

and  therefore  6^  =  -(aV-c*+&Vi^)> 

Ai=  ^2a'b'c\yy 
Hence,  if  a/3  represent  the  given  point,  we  have 

~  (a'ISx-h'ay-c'al3y  +  &c.  =  0, 

an  equation  of  the  third  degree,  reducing  to  a  conic  when 
the  axis  is  a  part  of  the  locus. 

59.  In  the  cubic  for  k,  its  values,  for  which  hVzk  Fj  repre- 
sents right  lines,  remain  the  same  without  reference  to  the 
coordinates  in  which  V  and  Fj  are  taken.  In  other  words,  the 
relation  between  the  coefficients  A,  0,  &c.,  remains  unaltered 
by  a  change  of  coordinates,  and  these  coefficients  for  the  new 
system  are  equal  to  those  of  the  old,  multiplied  by  the  square 
of  the  modulus  of  transformation,  or  in  general  by  some  power 
of  that  modulus.    (Art.  20.) 


62  INVARIANTS. 

60.  If  1  and  2  of  the  foar  points  of  intersection  of  two 
conies  coincide,  then  13  and  23  will  coincide  with  14  and  24. 
In  this  case  the  cubic  in  h  will  have  two  equal  roots.  Let  us 
take  the  differential  coefficient  of  this  equation,  and  proceed  as 
if  to  find  their  greatest  common  divisor.  This  condition  may- 
be expressed  as 

(00i-9AAiy-4(0'-3A0O(9i2-3Ai0)  =  0.* 

In  this  case  the  conies  are  said  to  touch  each  other,  though  it 
miist  not  be  supposed  that  there  are  not  also  two  other  real 
or  imaginary  points  in  which  the  conies  meet.  A  great  vai-iety 
of  examples  will  at  once  occur  to  the  reader  which  will  illus- 
trate the  foregoing.  We  might  exhibit  an  application  of  the 
last  example.  Art.  58.  Expressing  that  the  two  curves  touch, 
we  must  have,  since  0  =  0, 

27AAiH40i'  =  0. 

Now  that  this  equation  will  apply  to  the  finding  of  the  evolute 
of  the  given  curve — that  is,  the  ellipse — we  have  only  to  remem- 
ber that  the  coordinates  of  the  centre  of  the  osculatory  circle 
and  those  of  the  evolute  coincide,  that  two  of  the  normals 
coincide  which  can  be  drawn  through  each  point  of  the  evo- 
lute J  and  we  have 

as  the  required  equation. 

61.  Before  passing  to  other  applications,  we  may  discuss 
the  conditions  under  which  Aj,  0,  and  0^  vanish. 

If  Ai  =  0,  how  shall  we  interpret  Q  and  B^  ?  Since  Fj  breaks 
np  into  two  right  lines  when  \  =  0,  we  may  represent  these 
lines  by  a  and  /3,  and  then  instead  of  V-\-hV^  we  may  write 
7^+2A;a/3,  whose  discriminant  maybe  found  by  substituting 
A  +  fc  for  A  in  A,  from  which  we  obtain 

A  +  2h(fg-ch')-cJc^ (1). 

*  This  condition  may  be  found  by  equating  the  discriminant  of  the 
given  cubic  in  k  (Article  55)  to  zero. 


INVARIANTS.  63 

But  when  the  coefficient  of  h  vanishes,  that  is,  when  fg  =  ch, 
we  have  the  condition  that  the  pole  of  the  axis  of  x  in  the 
general  equation  should  lie  on  the  axis  of  ?/ ;  in  other  words,  in 
this  case,  that  the  lines  a  and  /3  are  conjugate  with  respect  to  V. 
Now  the  vanishing  of  the  discriminant  indicates,  as  we  know, 
a  double  point  in  the  curve,  and  hence  the  vanishing  of  (1) 
shows  us  that  the  point  aj^  lies  on  the  curve  V\  that  is,  the 
coefficient  of  A;^  vanishes  when,  in  this  case,  c  =  0  ;  and  conse- 
quently that,  when  ^1=0,  the  intersection  of  the  two  lines  is 

on  r. 

More  generally,  the  geometrical  interpretation  of  0=0  may 
be   shown  if  we  take  the  trilinear  equation  (T.  47)   of  the 

general  form  ax^  -f  iy"^  +  cz^  =  0, 

in  which  the  triangle  of  reference  is  self-conjugate  in  respect 
to  F^.     We  have  then 

Again,  from  (T.  53),  we  see  that 

fiy^-\-gi^^'+K^y  =  ^ (2) 

represents  a  curve  circumscribing  the  triangle  of  reference. 
Hence  we  say  that,  if  V-^  has  the  form  of  (2),  d  will  vanish, 
since,  in  that  case,  a^=L'b-^-=c^=-0',  that  is,  d  will  vanish  when 
the  triangle  of  reference  inscribed  in  F^  is  self- conjugate  in 
respect  to  V.  If  we  reverse  this  relation,  taking  the  triangle 
of  reference  as  self-conjugate  in  respect  to  F^, 

d=^(bc-f)a,+  {ca-g'')\^{ah-h')c^ (3), 

since  in  this  case  yj  =  ^^  =  /^^  =  0. 

We  see  that  (3)  will  vanish  if  we  impose  the  condition  of 
equal  roots  in  the  general  equation  ;  that  is,  if  he  =/^,  &c., 
which  is  the  condition  of  coincident  tangents,  or  that  »  as  a 
line  should  touch  F;  that  is,  that  the  triangle  should  circum- 
scribe V  while  self-conjugate  in  respect  to  F„  in  which  case 
«  =  0. 


64  INVARUNTS. 

62.  Since  V=  ha^  represents  a  conic  having  double  contact 
with  F,  a  being  the  chord  of  contact,  if  now  V  represent 
the  general  equation  in  a;,  y,  z,  and  lx-\-my-\-nz  the  equation 
of  a  line  in  trilinear  coordinates,  the  equation  of  any  conic 
having  double  contact  with  V  on  the  points  of  intersection 
with  the  given  conic,  can  be  written 

W+{lx-\-my  +  nzf  =  0   (1)  ; 

and  suppose  it  were  required  to  so  determine  h  that  this  equa- 
tion may  represent  two  right  lines.  In  this  case  A  remains 
unaffected,  but  6  evidently  becomes 

(hec-f)  1^+  (ca-g')  m^+  {ah-h^)  n"^^  (gh-af)  mn 

+  2  Qif-hg)  nl  +  2(fg-ch)  Im  =  0. 

But  since,  by  hypothesis,  Fj  breaks  up  into  two  right  lines, 
Aj  =  0,  and  0  also  vanishes,  since  there  is  double  contact,  or 
the  intersection  of  the  two  lines  is  on  F ;  hence  the  cubic  in  k 

reduces  to  Ah^+dk^  =  0. 

In  other  words,  there  are  two  roots  =  0,  and  we  have 

kA-\-e  =  0 (2) 

to  determine  the  other.  When  there  are  two  equal  roots,  the 
conies  touch  each  other  (Art.  59).  Hence,  finding  the  value 
of  A;  in  (2),  and  substituting  it  in  (1),  we  have 

eV=  A(lx+my  +  nzy, 

which  is  the  equation  of  the  pair  of  tangents  at  the  points 
where  the  conic  is  cut  by  the  given  line.  Where  0  =  0,  re- 
presenting its  new  value  as  above,  we  have  the  condition  that 
the  line  touches  the  conic,  and  the  tangents  coincide  with  the 
line. 

63.  It  may  be  well  here  to  remind  the  beginner,  that 
by  a  tangent  is  understood,  analytically,  in  general,  a  line 
meeting  the  curve  in  two  coincident  points,  and  that  when 


INVARIANTS.  65 

the  curve  breaks  up,  as  we  have  supposed,  into  two  right  lines, 
the  only  tangent  which  can  meet  such  a  locus  must  be  on  the 
intersection  of  these  right  lines  ;  and  since  a  curve  of  the 
second  degree  may  always  have  two  tangents,  both  tangents 
must  coincide  with  the  line  at  the  point  of  intersection. 

We  know  that,  when  Fand  Fj  represent  conies,  V+hVi  =  0 
represents  a  conic  passing  through  their  points  of  intersection. 
If  now  the  condition  were  sought  that  the  line  lx  +  my-{-7iz  =  0 
should  pass  through  one  of  these  points,  we  may  equate  z  in 
F  to  0  and  in  the  equation  of  line  =  1  ;  and  then,  substituting 
the  value  of  y  found  from  the  equation  of  the  line  in  F=  0, 
we  have  a  quadratic  in  x  whose  condition  of  equal  roots  we 
wrote  in  the  last  Article,  viz., 

e  =  {hc-f)  V-\-  (ca-g')  m^-^  {ah-h')  n'  +  2  (gh-af)  mn 
-f  2  Qif~  ly)  nl+2{fg-  cJi)  Im. 

Let  this  right  member  now  be  represented  by  S,  the  condition 
that  the  given  line  touches  F.  If  in  this  expression  we  write 
a-\-Jca-^  for  a,  Z)  +  A:&i  for  h  and  c,  we  shall  manifestly  have  the 
same  condition  for  V-\-JcVi,  or  any  conic  of  the  system,  which 
we  had  for  F.  Hence,  multiplying  out,  we  have,  for  the  co- 
efficient of  &, 

ihc,-\-h^c-2ff^)  l''  +  (ca^  +  c,a'-2gg;)  m'^-\-(a\  +  a^h-2]i\)n'^ 

+  2  {Q\^-gi^—af^—aJ)  mn  +  2  Qif^-^liJ-hg^—^g)  nl 

+  2  (fgi  +fig-c\  -  c^h)  Im. 

Representing  this  by  O,*  and  the  coefficient  of  k^  by  S^  we  have 

The  condition  that  this  equation  should  have  equal  roots  is 
$^  =  4SSi;  or  is  the  condition  that  the  given  line  should  pass 
through  one  of  the  four  points  ;  and  as  the "  envelope  of  this 


*  Wlien  *  =  0  we  have  tlie  condition  that  the  given  line  shall  be  cut 
harmonically  by  V  and  Fj.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that  this  condition 
is  a  contravariant  of  the  system  of  conies  V  and  Fj. 


66  INVARIANTS. 

system  is  clearly  only  these  four  points,  tlie  equation  last 
written  may  be  regarded  as  the  envelope  of  the  system.  It  is 
to  be  remembered  that  we  are  here  really  discussing  functions 
which  remain  unaltered  by  change  of  axis,  because,  if  V  and  V^ 
by  transformation  to  a  new  set  of  co-ordinates  become  V  and 
Fj,  then  V+JcV-^  becomes  V+kVi,  Jc  still  remaining  constant. 


Now 


=  0  is  the  determinant  whose  vanishing 


a     h    ff 

h     b     f 

9     f    c 

is  the  condition  that  the  general  equation  may  represent  right 
lines.  DiflPerentiating  this  function  with  reference  to  each  of 
its  letters,  we  have  the  coefficients  of  S  above.  Also  both  ^ 
and  Dj  are  functions  of  A,  in  such  manner  as  to  possess  the 
character  of  invariance. 

64.  If  we  seek  the  condition  that 

shall  touch  the  conic  represented  by  the  general  trilinear 
equation  (T.  43) 

aa2-|-&/32  +  C7H2//37  +  2^ya  +  2/ia/3  =0 (1), 

we  shall  have  the  condition  represented  by  S,  as  above.  For 
the  coefficients  there  given,  hc—p,  &c.,  we  may  write  A,  B, 
&c.,  or 

Al?-\-Bm'  +  W  +  2Fmn-\-2Qnl  +  2mm  =  0  (2), 

which  is  sometimes  called  the  tangential  equation  of  the  conic. 
If  between  this  equation  and  the  equation  of  the  line  we  elimi- 

.    .     f 
nate  n,  we  shall  have  a  quadratic  in  — r,  and  the  condition  of 

m 

two  equal  roots,  or  that  it  breaks  up  into  straight  lines ;  or, 
which  in  this  case  is  the  same  thing,  the  envelope  of  the  line  is 

{BG-F^)a?  +  {GA-G^)^^+&.Q.=:0    (3), 

an  equation  symmetrical  with  S, — the  latter  in  Z,  w,  n  and 


INVARIANTS.  Q7 

its  coefficients  in  small  letters,  the  former  in  a,  jS,  y  and  its 
coefficients  in  large  letters.  We  may  see,  then,  that  the  enve- 
lope of  a  line  whose  coefficients  fulfil  the  condition  S  is  the 
conic  (1),  for  we  have  only  to  substitute  for  A,  JB,  &c.,  their 
values  bc—f^,  &c.,  and  (2)  becomes  AF=  0  when  7"=  (1). 
Consequently,  if  we  write  the  trilinear  equation  corresponding  to 

we  have  AV+JcD+k^A^Vi  =  0 (4), 

in  which  D  is  symmetrical  with  $  ;  that  is, 

an  equation  in  x,  y,  z  when  Fand  Fj  have  the  meaning  we  have 
heretofore  assigned  them. 

The  envelope  of  the  system  (3)  is 

but  the  envelope  in  this  case  is  the  four  common  tangents. 
Hence  this  is  the  equation  of  the  four  common  tangents  to  the 
two  conies. 

To  illustrate  this,  take  the  two  conies 

2aj*+4/+62^=  0. 

A  =15,  Aj  =  48,  ^  =  15,  J5  =  5,  (7  =  3, 

A^  =  24,  B^  =  12,  (7i  =  8 ; 

I>=2(18  +  20)a;'^  +  12(10+6)^H30(4+6)g'. 
Hence 

(7603^+192^'^+ 3002^^)2  =  2880  (a?H32/'  +  62')(2aj2+4/+6a«) 

is  the  equation  of  the  four  common  tangents  to  the  two  conies. 

If  3^'-2a;''-4a;y  =  0=  F, 

and  J  +  ^_1=0=F„ 

what  is  D  ? 


68  IXYARIANTS. 

65.  As  has  been  before  intimated,  an  invariant  is  a  function 
whose  vanishing  indicates  some  property  of  the  curve  inde- 
pendent of  the  axis  to  which  it  is  referred.  In  the  same 
manner,  as  we  know,  covarianta  are  particular  loci  whose 
relation  to  the  equations  whence  they  were  derived  is  inde- 
pendent of  the  axes  of  these  given  equations.  In  other  words, 
the  two  functions  agree  so  far  as  axes  are  concerned. 

Turning  our  attention  now  to  covariants,  which,  as  we  have 
seen,  contain  the  given  variables,  we  may  find  our  illustration 
in  the  system  of  conies  we  have  been  considering,  V  and  Fj, 
which  we  will  again  refer  (Article  56)  to  their  self- conjugate 
triangle,  that  is. 

If  we  proceed  now  as  in  the  last  Article,  we  find 

A  =  bCf    B  =  ca,    C  =  ab^ 

A,  =  B,  =  C,  =  1; 

consequently 

D=:(ah  +  hc)x^  +  (bc-\-ba)f+(ac-{-cb)z^    (1)  ; 

equation  (2)  of  the  preceding  Article  becomes 

Al'-^Bm'+ 071^=0, 

or  the  condition  that  a  line  should  touch  V.  Hence  the  locus 
of  the  poles  with  regard  to  Tj  of  the  tangents  to  V  is 

Ax'  +  By^+Cz^  =  0   (2). 

Adding  (1)  and  (2),  we  have 

(A+B  +  G)(x'+f+z')  =  D. 

Or,  since  (Art.  56)         e  =  A  +  B  +  G, 

we  have  GFj  =  D  as  the  equation  of  the  polar  conic  of  V  with 
respect  to  Vi  in  terms  of  the  conies  of  the  system  and  the 
conic  D.  The  locns  OFi  =  D  is  therefore  a  covariant  of  Fand 
Fi,  and  this  relation  will  not  be  altered  when  V  and  Fj  are 


INVARIANTS.  '  69 

transformed  to  othes  axes.  Similarly,  6j^V=D  is  a  locns,  a 
covariant,  the  polar  conic  of  F^  in  regard  to  F". 

Returning  to   ^  =  0  (see   note,   Art.    63),  we  see  that  it 
becomes,  retaining  the  same  expressions  for  V  and  Fj, 

(6  +  c)P+(c  +  a)m2  +  (a  +  5)^'  =  0, 

which  may  be  called  the  tangential  equation  of  the  conic 
enveloped  by  a  line  cut  harmonically  by  V  and  Vy  Now  the 
trilinear  equation,  as  found  from  this,  is  of  the  form  of 
equation  (3)  of  the  last  Article,  that  is, 

or 

(c-{-a)(a  +  h)x'+(a+hXb  +  c)y'  +  (c  +  a)(b  +  c)z^  =  0...(1), 

since  in  this  case  A  =  (&4-c),  &c. 

Adding  the  value  of  D  to  (1),  and  reducing,  we  have 

as  the  equation,  a  locus,  covariant  with  F^and  F^,  expressing 
in  terms  of  these  conies  a  conic  enveloped  by  a  line  cut  har- 
monically by  the  conies  in  question.  If  D  breaks  up  into  two 
right  lines,  we  have  simply  A  =  0  in  equation  (1), 

or  {a'b  +  ac)(hc+ha)(ac  +  ah)  =  0. 

66.  It  would  be  a  profitable  exercise  for  the  reader,  at  this 
stage,  to  reduce  a  few  conies  to  the  forms 

a^-\-y'  +  z'  =  0, 
This  can  be  done  with  the  help  of 

Aic''+ejc^+ejc-\-\  =  0  (1). 

That  is,  the  roots  of  this  equation  will  give  us  the  new  a,  6,  c ; 
then  we  shall  have 

x'+y'  +  z'  =  F,     ax'  +  by'  +  cz'  =  V„ 

when  V  and  F^  are  the  given  conios. 


70  INVARIANTS. 

We  shall  still  need  one  more  equation,  and  for  this  we  can 
conveniently  nse  equation  (1)  of  the  preceding  Article, 

(ab  +  ac)  x^+(hc  +  ah)  7/  +  (ac  +  ch)  z^  =  D, 

with  this  caution,  that,  as  the  discriminant  of  F^is  1,  D  must  be 
divided  by  A  to  put  the  three  equations  upon  the  same  relation. 
Thus,  if  Fand  F^  are 

x^-2xy-\-2i/-4x  +  6y  =  0, 

Sx^-6xy-\-5y''-2x-l  =  0, 

we  see  these  are  of  the  general  form 

ax^+2hxy  +  hy^+2gx  +  2fy  +  c  =  0. 

The  A  of  the  first  is  -5  (Art.  55), 

0  =  -14,  01=  -9,  Ai=-ll; 

and  since  (Art.  56)  the  roots  of  (1),  when  the  conies  are  re- 
ferred to  their  self-conjugate  triangle,  are  —a,  —6,  —  c,  the 
actual  form  of  (1)  for  numerical  use  must  be 

or  in  this  case 

-bJc^+Uh'-9h-\-ll  =  0 (1). 

In  order  to  calculate  the  co variant  D,   we  must  first  know 
A,B,C,  A,  B,,  Oi,  &c. 

These  may  be  computed  by  equation  (2),  Art.  64. 


gives  us 

Vi  gives 

a  =  l, 

a,  =  3, 

h=-l, 

ft.  =  -3, 

i  =  2, 

6.  =  5, 

?  =  -2, 

S>  =  -1, 

/=3. 

/.  =  o, 

c  =  0; 

c,  =  -1. 

As  given  in  Art.  63, 

A  =  hc-A 

B  =  ca-g\ 

C=ab-h', 

F  =:gh-af, 

G=} 

'f~hff, 

H=zfy-ch. 

INVARIANTS.  71 

In  the  same  manner  ^dj  =  h^c^—ff^  &c. 
The  value  of  D  must  be  computed  from  the  general  equation, 
which  we  now  write  in  full, 

+  (AB^  +  A^B^2HE,)z'-{-2  (GH,+  G,H-^AF^'-A^F)yz 

+  2  (HF^ + E,F-  BG,  -  B,G)  xz 

+2  (FG,+F,G-GH,-G,E)  =  D. 

Now  suppose  the  roots  of  (1)  to  be  represented  by  a,  h,  c 
(the  new  a,  h,  c),  and  we  shall  have 

From  which  we  can  obtain  the  values  of  X,  Y,  Z,  which 
were  required.  The  reader  can  complete  this  example.  These 
computations  are  important  on  account  of  their  frequent 
occurrence  in  geometrical  investigations,  as  will  be  seen  in  a 
succeeding  Tract. 

67.  Another  of  a  large  class  of  examples  will  show  how  in- 
variants determine  the  situation  of  a  conic,  as  for  example  a 
fixed  locus. 

Let  us  take  F,  a  curve  circumscribing  the  triangle  of 
reference  (T.,  Art.  53), 

that  is,  2  (u(3y-{-vya  +  waP)  =  0. 

Let  Vi  be  touched  by  two  sides  of  the  triangle.  This  can  be 
represented  by  the  tangential  equation,  in  this  case  (T.,  Art. 

54),  by  aH/32  +  y^-2/3y-27a-2a/3  (l+wh\ 

since  a=0,  /3=0,  in  each  case,  satisfies  the  equation,  giving 
perfect  squares.  Then  will  hV+  Fi,  a  conic  passing  through 
their  intersections,  be  touched  by  the  third  side  of  the  triangle. 
Computing  the  invariants  as  before,  we  have 


72  INVARIANTS. 

A  =  2uVWj 

:=  —(u-\-v-{-wy—2uvwhf 

0j  =  2  (u-\-v-\-w)  (2-\-w]c),     Aj  =  —(2  +  hJc)\ 

From  which  we  obtain 

0i«=4AAiJfc+40A, 

and,  eliminating  the  parameter  k  between  tbis  last  equation 
and  7cV+Vt„  we  have  the  envelope  of  the  third  side  of  the 
triangle  of  reference;  or — which,  in  this  ease,  is  the  sametbing — 
by  substituting  the  value  of  Jc^  derived  from  that  equation,  in 
the  latter,  we  obtain,  plainly,  a  fixed  conic  touched  by  the 
third  side,  that  is. 

When  0j'  =  40A,  h  =  0^  and  is  simply  the  condition  that  the 
three  sides  of  th^  triangle  are  touched  by  V^. 

68.  If  I  and  m  are  any  lines  at  right  angles  to  each  other 
through  a  focus,  we  can  construct  an  equation,  a  particular 

form  of  u^a^  +  v'(3'  =  wY,  (T.,  Art.  47) 

that  is,  P  +  m'  =  eY, 

where  y,  the  polar  of  the  focus,  is  the  directrix.  If  e  =  0,  as 
in  the  circle,  we  have  the  equation  which  determines  the 
direction  of  the  points  at  infinity  on  any  circle  ;  or,  in  other 

words,  P-^m^=:0 

is  the  tangential  equation  of  these  points,  or  the  condition  that 

the  line  lx-\-my  +  n  =  0 

should  pass  through  one  of  them. 

Now  the  necessary  relation  between  these  constants,  in  order 


INVARIANTS.  73 

that  this  line  may  touch  the  curve  represented  by  the  general 
equation,  sometimes  called  the  tangential  equation  of  the 
curve,  is  given  Art.  63,  equation  (2).  Distinguishing  this  by 
Si  let  us  proceed  to  examine  the  discriminant  formed  from 

which  is  A^+TcA  (a  +  h)  +  J(^  {db-h% 

Form  also  the  discriminant  of 

8  +  h8^i 
which  is  A^ + hAJd^  +  Ic'A^d  +  h^A\ , 

and  we  see  that  a  +  &  corresponds  to  6^  and  ab—h^  to  d.  Hence 
we  say  that,  the  invariants  of  any  conic  and  a  pair  of  points 
at  infinity  being  formed,  we  can  express  the  condition,  by 
placing  ^1  =  0,  that  the  curve  is  an  equilateral  hyperbola,  and 
by  0  =  0,  that  it  is  a  parabola.  This  result  follows  from  the 
theory  of  invariants, — viz.,  that  whatever  homogeneous  relation 
is  seen  to  exist  in  the  one  case  will  also  exist  in  the  other,  ir- 
respective of  the  coordinates  in  which  the  curves  are  expressed 
or  the  axes  to  which  they  are  referred. 

We  now  seek  for  the  corresponding  expression  in  Trilinear 
Coordinates.  The  length  of  the  perpendicular  on  one  of  these 
four  imaginary  common  tangents  from  any  point  must  be  in- 
finite. Hence  the  denominator  of  p  (T.,  20)  must  be  put  =  0, 
that  is, 

l^-\-m^  +  n^—2mn  cosA  —  2nl  cos  B—2lm  cos  0  =  0 

must  be  the  general  tangential  equation  of  the  points  in  ques- 
tion in  trilinear  coordinates.  Combining  this  with  Sj  as  before, 
we  find  that  ©i  corresponds  to 

a  +  h  +  c—2f  cos  A  — 2g  cos  B^2h  cos  (7, 

which,  equated  to  0,  is  the  condition  that  the  conic  S-\-7c8i 
shall  represent  an  equilateral  hyperbola. 

In  this  computation  the  coefficient  of  7c  only,  it  is  evident, 
need  be  formed,  which  divided  by  A  must  give  the  condition 


74  INVARIANTS. 

sought.  To  find  tlie  condition  that  the  curve  shall  represent 
a  parabola,  it  will  be  necessary  to  form  the  coefficient  of  Tt^ 
and  then  divide  this  result  by  A^. 

68.  By  the  theory  of  foci,  the  four  tangents  drawn  through 
the  two  imaginary  points  at  infinity  on  any  circle  form  a  quad- 
rilateral, in  which  two  of  these  vertices  are  real  and  the  foci 
of  the  conic.  Now,  since  ^-f^^i  touches  the  four  tangents 
common  to  8  and  8^^  it  will  represent  these  two  vertices  or 
foci  in  question,  when  Tc  has  been  so  determined  that  the 
conic  (8+lc8i)  reduces  to  a  pair  of  points,  with  the  condition 
that  8i  represents  the  two  points  at  infinity. 

To  find  these  foci,  we  proceed  to  find  the  value  of  k  in 

which,  substituted  in  S  +  k  (l^-\-m^),  gives  two  factors,  viz., 
(l^  +  m^-^  +  n)  (l^+m^+n), 

in  which  — ^,  ^  and  — ,  ^  are  the  coordinates  of  the  foci,  one 

Zi     Zi  z^     z^ 

value  of  k  giving  the  real  and  the  other  the  imaginary  foci. 
As  a  simple  illustration,  let  us  seek  the  coordinates  of  the  focus 

of  a;2  +  2a;^  +  i/2-2a;--2y  +  2  =  0. 

Here  ah— I?  =  0,  and  consequently 

reduces  to  2k^-\-^''  =  0. 

But  A  =  2  +  2— 1-1-2  =0. 

Hence  8y  or 

AV  +  Bm^  +  W  +  2Fmn  +  20^1^  2Slm  +  k{f  +  m»), 
reduces  to         l^  +  'ni?  —  2lm     or      Q  —  m^il  —  m). 


INVARIANTS.  75 

Therefore  the  cordinates  of  the  focus  are  1,  1,  if  we  regard 
Zi  as  the  linear  unit  in  the  equation  of  the  line 

Ixi-^myi  +  nz^. 

But  if  these  variables  are  conceived  of  as  functions  of  one 
another,  or  the  line  as  a  function  of  the  variables,  then,  as  z^=0 

and  the  coordinates  are  represented  by  -^,  ^,   these   become 

infinite,  which  result  is  still  consistent  with  the  geometrical 
conception  of  the  foci  of  the  parabola,  where  one  focus  is  re- 
garded as  at  infinity. 


London :  C.  F.  Hodgson  &  Son,  Printers,  Gough  Square,  Fleet  Street. 


VOLUMES  ALREADY  PUBLISHED. 


Tract  No.  1.— DETERMINANTS. 
„     No.  2.— TRILINEAR  COORDINATES. 
,,     No.  3;— INVARIANTS. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


'?o. 


"%^ 


i4faai52HB 


*i^ 


]3Nov'55fi|jF 


T  3  0 1955  m 


V}^ 


-ii 


,-,t^r""n 


«rS  T:f> 


vw 


-^^^ 


«^1"1"S^ 


auH9 


CD 

«65 


LD  21-100m-9,'48XB399sl6)476 


M5a:S4;2i 


I